BH^BH^BHHBHH 


THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 


PRESENTED  BY 

PROF.  CHARLES  A.  KOFOID  AND 
MRS.  PRUDENCE  W.  KOFOID 


THE 


AMERICAN   HORSEWOMAN 


BY 


MRS.  ELIZABETH   KARR 


:  Gold  that  buys  health  can  never  be  ill  spent, 
Nor  hours  laid  out  in  harmless  merriment." 

J.  WEBSTER 

THIRD   EDITION 


BOSTON  AND    NEW  YORK: 

HOUGHTON,  MIFFLIN  AND   COMPANY. 
Clje  Eifccrtftte  IBrn 

1890 


Copyright,  1884, 
Bz  ELIZABETH   KARR. 

All  rights  reserved. 


The  Riverside  Press,  Cambridge: 
Electrotyped  and  Printed  by  H.  0.  Houghton  &  Co. 


PEEFACE. 


IN  presenting  this  volume  to  the  women  of 
America,  the  author  would  remark  that,  at  least 
as  far  as  she  is  aware,  it  is  the  first  one,  exclu- 
sively devoted  to  the  instruction  of  lady  riders, 
that  has  ever  been  written  by  one  of  their  own 
countrywomen.  In  its  preparation,  no  preten- 
sion is  made  to  the  style  of  a  practiced  author, 
the  writer  freely  acknowledging  it  to  be  her 
first  venture  in  the  (to  her)  hitherto  unex- 
plored regions  of  authorship ;  she  has  simply 
undertaken,  —  being  guided  and  aided  by  her 
own  experience  in  horseback  riding,  —  to  write, 
in  plain  and  comprehensive  language,  and  in 
as  concise  a  manner  as  is  compatible  with  a 
clear  understanding  of  her  subject,  all  that  she 
deems  it  essential  for  a  horsewoman  to  know. 
This  she  has  endeavored  to  do  without  any  af- 
fectation or  effort  to  acquire  reputation  as  an 
author,  and  wholly  for  the  purpose  of  benefit- 
ing those  of  her  own  sex  who  wish  to  learn  not 
only  to  ride,  but  to  ride  well.  She  has  also 

M37C310 


iv  PREFACE. 

been  induced  to  prepare  the  work  by  the  ur- 
gent solicitations  of  many  lady  friends,  who, 
desirous  of  having  thorough  information  on 
horseback  riding,  were  unable  to  find  in  any  sin- 
gle work  those  instructions  which  they  needed. 

Many  valuable  works  relating  to  the  subject 
could  be  had,  but  none  especially  for  ladies. 
True,  in  many  of  these  works  prepared  for 
equestrians  a  few  pages  of  remarks  or  advice 
to  horsewomen  could  be  found,  but  so  scant 
and  limited  were  they  that  but  little  useful 
and  practical  information  could  be  gleaned 
from  them.  The  writers  of  these  works  never 
even  dreamed  of  treating  many  very  important 
points  highly  essential  to  the  horsewoman  ; 
and,  indeed,  it  could  hardly  be  expected  that 
they  would,  as  it  is  almost  impossible  for  any 
horseman  to  know,  much  less  to  comprehend, 
these  points.  The  position  of  a  man  in  the  sad- 
dle is  natural  and  easy,  while  that  of  a  woman 
is  artificial,  one-sided,  and  less  readily  acquired ; 
that  which  he  can  accomplish  with  facility  is 
for  her  impossible  or  extremely  difficult,  as  her 
position  lessens  her  command  over  the  horse, 
and  obliges  her  to  depend  almost  entirely  upon 
her  skill  and  address  for  the  means  of  control- 
ling him. 

If  a  gentleman  will  place  himself  upon  the 


PREFACE.  V 

side-saddle  and  for  a  short  time  ride  the  sev- 
eral gaits  of  his  horse,  he  will  have  many  points 
presented  which  he  had  not  anticipated,  and 
which  may  puzzle  him ;  that  which  appeared 
simple  and  easy  when  in  his  natural  position 
will  become  difficult  of  performance  when  he 
assumes  the  role  of  a  horsewoman.  A  trial  of 
this  kind  will  demonstrate  to  him  that  the  rules 
applicable  to  the  one  will  not  invariably  be 
adapted  to  the  other.  The  reader  need  not  be 
surprised,  therefore,  if  in  the  perusal  of  this 
volume  she  discovers  in  certain  instances  in- 
structions laid  down  which  differ  from  those 
met  with  in  the  popular  works  upon  this  subject 
by  male  authors. 

Another  inducement  to  prepare  this  volume 
existed  in  the  fact  that  the  ladies  throughout 
the  country,  and  especially  in  our  large  cities 
and  towns,  are  apparently  awakening  to  an 
appreciation  of  the  importance  of  out  -  door 
amusement  and  exercise  in  securing  and  pro- 
longing health,  strength,  beauty,  and  symmetry 
of  form,  and  that  horseback  riding  is  rapidly  be- 
coming the  favorite  form  of  such  exercise.  In- 
structions relating  to  riding  have  become,  there- 
fore, imperative,  in  order  to  supply  a  need  long 
felt  by  those  horsewomen  who,  when  in  the 
saddle,  are  desirous  of  acquitting  themselves 


Vi  PREFACE. 

with  credit,  but  who  have  heretofore  been  un- 
able to  gain  that  information  which  would  en- 
able them  to  ride  with  ease  and  grace,  and  to 
manage  their  steeds  with  dexterity  and  con- 
fidence. The  author  —  who  has  had  several 
years'  experience  in  horseback  riding  with  the 
old-fashioned,  two -pommeled  saddle,  and,  in 
later  years,  with  the  English  saddle,  besides 
having  had  the  benefit  of  the  best  continental 
teaching  —  believes  she  will  be  accused  of 
neither  vanity  nor  egotism  when  she  states  that 
within  the  pages  of  this  work  instructions  will 
be  found  amply  sufficient  to  enable  any  lady 
who  attends  to  them  to  ride  with  artistic  cor- 
rectness. 

Great  care  has  been  taken  to  enter  upon  and 
elucidate  all  those  minute  but  important  details 
which  are  so  essential,  but  which,  because  they 
are  so  simple,  are  usually  passed  over  without 
notice  or  explanation.  Especial  attention  has 
also  been  given  to  the  errors  of  inexperienced 
and  uneducated  riders,  as  well  as  to  the  mis- 
takes into  which  beginners  are  apt  to  fall  from 
incorrect  modes  of  teaching,  or  from  no  instruc- 
tion at  all;  these  errors  have  been  carefully 
pointed  out,  and  the  methods  for  correcting 
them  explained.  A  constant  effort  has  been 
made  to  have  these  practical  hints  and  valuable 


PREFACE.  vii 

explanations  as  lucid  as  possible,  that  they  may 
readily  be  comprehended  and  put  into  practical 
use  by  the  reader. 

From  the  fact  that  considerable  gossip,  in- 
cluding some  truth,  as  to  illiteracy,  rudeness, 
offensive  familiarity,  and  scandal  of  various 
kinds  has  in  past  years  been  associated  with 
some  of  the  riding-schools  established  in  our 
cities,  many  ladies  entertain  a  decided  antipathy 
to  all  riding-schools  ;  to  these  ladies,  as  well  as 
to  those  who  are  living  in  places  where  no  rid- 
ing-schools, exist,  the  author  feels  confident  that 
this  work  will  prove  of  great  practical  utility. 
Yet  she  must  remark  that,  in  her  opinion,  it  is 
neither  just  nor  right  to  ostracize  indiscrimi- 
nately all  such  schools,  simply  because  some  of 
them  have  proven  blameworthy ;  whenever  a 
riding-school  of  good  standing  is  established  and 
is  conducted  by  a  well-known,  competent,  and 
gentlemanly  teacher,  with  one  or  more  skilled 
lady  assistants,  she  would  advise  the  ladies  of 
the  neighborhood  to  avail  themselves  of  such 
opportunity  to  become  sooner  thorough  and 
efficient  horsewomen  by  pursuing  the  instruc- 
tions given  in  this  work  under  such  qualified 

teachers. 

ELIZABETH  KARR. 
NORTH  BEND,  OHIO. 


A  BRIEF  SYNOPSIS   OF  CONTENTS. 


INTRODUCTION. 

PAQB 

Utility,  health,  and  enjoyment,  in  horseback  riding.  —  Af- 
fection of  the  horse  for  a  kind  mistress.  —  Incorrect  views 
entertained  by  ladies  relative  to  horses  and  horseback  rid- 
ing. —  Tight  lacing  incompatible  with  correct  riding.  — 
Advantages  of  good  riding-schools.  — Instinct  not  a  suffi- 
cient guide.  —  Compatibility  of  refinement  and  horseback 
riding.  —  Importance  of  out-of-door  exercise  .....  1 

CHAPTER  I. 

THE   HORSE. 

Origin  and  countries  of  the  horse.  —  Earliest  Scriptural  men- 
tion of  the  horse.  —  Caligula's  horse.  —  Horseback  riding 
in  the  Middle  Ages.  —  The  Arab  horse  and  his  descendants. 
—  Selection  of  a  horse,  and  points  to  be  observed.  —  Suit- 
able gaits  for  the  several  conformations  of  riders.  —  The 
fast  or  running  walk.  —  Various  kinds  of  trotting.  —  The 
jog  trot  undesirable.  —  Temperament  of  the  horse  to  be 
taken  into  consideration.  —  Thorough-bred  horses.  —  Low- 
bred horses.  —  Traits  of  thorough  and  low  bred  horses.  — 
Purchasing  a  horse  ;  when  to  pay  for  the  purchase.  —  Kind- 
ness to  the  horse  instead  of  brutality.  —  Advantages  of 
kind  treatment  of  the  horse.  —  Horses  properly  trained 
from  early  colt-life,  the  best.  —  Certain  requirements  in 
training  a  horse  for  a  lady.  —  Ladies  should  visit  their 
horses  in  the  stable.  —  Ladies  of  refinement,  occupying 


X  A   BRIEF  SYNOPSIS  OF  CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

the  highest  positions  in  the  civilized  and  fashionable  world, 
personally  attend  to  their  horses  —  Nature  of  the  horse. — 
Unreliable  grooms  ;  their  vicious  course  with  horses  in- 
trusted to  their  care.  —  Care  required  in  riding  livery- 
stable  horses 13 

CHAPTER  II. 

THE   RIDING    HABIT. 

Riding  habit  should  not  be  gaudy.  — Instructions  concern- 
ing the  material  for  riding  habit,  and  how  this  should  be 
made.  —  The  waist.  —  The  basque  or  jacket.  —  Length  of 
riding  habit.  —  White  material  not  to  be  worn  on  horse- 
back. —  Riding  shirt.  —  Riding  drawers.  —  Riding  boots. 

—  Riding  corset.  —  Riding  coiffure  or  head-dress.  —  Rid- 
ing hat.  —  Minutias  to  be  attended  to  in  the  riding  cos- 
tume. —  How  to  hold  the  riding  skirt  while  standing.  — 
Riding  whip 52 

CHAPTER  III. 

THE   SADDLE   AND    BRIDLE. 

Saddle  of  ancient  times,  and  the  manner  of  riding.  —  Plan- 
chette.  —  Catherine  de  Medici  deviser  of  the  two-pom- 
meled saddle.  —  M.  Pellier,  Sr.,  inventor  of  the  third 
pommel.  —  English  saddle.  —  Advantages  of  the  third 
pommel.  —  Saddle  should,  invariably,  be  made  and  fitted 
to  the  horse.  —  Seat  of  saddle.  —  Kinds  of  saddles  for  dif- 
ferent ladies.  —  Proper  application  of  the  third  pommel. — 
Saddle  recommended  and  used  by  the  author.  —  Points  to 
be  attended  to  in  procuring  a  saddle.  —  Girths.  —  New 
mode  of  tightening  girths.  —  Stirrups  and  stirrup-leathers. 

—  Safety  stirrups.  —  How  to  attach  the  stirrup-leather.  — 
The   bridle   and   reins.  —  Martingales.  —  Snaffle-bits.  — 
Curb-bits.  —  Curb-chain.  —  Tricks  of  horses  with  bits,  and 


A   BRIEF  SYNOPSIS   OF  CONTENTS.          xi 

PAGE 

their  remedy.  —  Adjustment  of  the  bit  and  head-stall.  — 
Care  of  the  bit.  —  How  to  correctly  place  the  saddle  on  the 
horse.  —  Remarks  concerning  girthing  the  horse.  —  Great 
advantages  derived  from  knowing  how  to  saddle  and  bridle 
one's  horse 67 

CHAPTER  IV. 

MOUNTING   AND   DISMOUNTING. 

Timidity  in  presence  of  a  horse  should  be  overcome.  —  First 
attempts  at  mounting.  —  Mounting  from  a  horse-block.  — 
Mounting  from  the  ground.  —  Mounting  with  assistance 
from  a  gentleman  ;  how  this  is  effected.  —  What  the  gen- 
tleman must  do.  —  A  restive  horse  while  mounting  ;  how 
to  be  managed.  —  Attractiveness  of  correct  mounting.  — 
To  dismount  with  assistance  from  a  gentleman  ;  what  the  . 
gentleman  must  do.  —  Attentions  to  the  skirt  both  while 
mounting  and  dismounting.  —  Dismounting  without  aid  J 
upon  the  ground  ;  upon  a  very  low  horse-block.  —  Con- 
cluding remarks 99 

CHAPTER  V. 

THE    SEAT   ON    HORSEBACK. 

The  absolute  necessity  for  a  correct  seat.  —  Natural  riders 
rarely  acquire  a  correct  seat.  —  The  dead- weight  seat.  — 
The  wabbling  seat.  — Essential  to  good  and  graceful  riding 
that  the  body  be  held  square  and  erect.  —  The  correct  seat. 

—  Proper  attitude  for  the  body,  shoulders,  waist,  arms, 
hands,  knees,  and  legs,  when  on  horseback.  —  Uses  and 
advantages  of  the  third  pommel.  —  Lessons  in  position 
should  always  be  taken  by  the  novice  in  horseback  riding. 

—  Faulty  positions  of  ladies  called   "excellent  equestri- 
ennes," pointed  out  at  an  imaginary  park.  —  Remarks  con- 
cerning the  improper  use  of  stirrups  and  pommels.  —  Pupils 
and  teachers  frequently  in  erroneous  positions  toward  each 


xii         A   BRIEF  SYNOPSIS  OF  CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

other.  —  Obstinacy  of  some  pupils,  and  wrong  ideas  of 
others.  —  Ladies  should  not  be  in  too  much  haste  to  be- 
come riders  before  they  understand  all  the  elementary  and 
necessary  requirements  ;  but  should  advance  carefully,  at- 
tentively, and  thoroughly.  —  Suggestions  to  teachers  of 
ladies  in  equitation 114 

CHAPTER  VI. 

HOLDING   THE   REINS,    AND   MANAGING   THE   HORSE. 

A  thorough  knowledge  of  the  management  of  the  horse 
highly  necessary  for  a  lady.  —  Position  in  the  saddle  has 
an  important  influence.  —  Horses  generally  more  gentle 
with  women  than  with  men.  —  Position  should  be  acquired 
first,  and  afterwards  the  reins  be  used.  —  How  to  hold 
the  hands  and  snaffle-reins,  in  first  lessons.  —  To  turn  the 
horse  to  the  right,  to  the  left,  to  back  him,  to  stop  him, 
with  a  snaffle-rein  in  each  hand.  —  Manner  of  holding  the 
snaffle-reins  in  the  bridle-hand ;  to  turn  the  horse  to  either 
side  ;  to  back,  and  to  stop  him.  — To  change  the  snaffle- 
reins  from  the  left  to  the  right  hand ;  to  reinstate  them  in 
the  bridle-hand.  —  To  separate  the  snaffle-reins;  to  shorten 
or  lengthen  them.  — To  hold  the  curb  and  bridoon,  or 
double  bridle-reins;  to  shorten  or  lengthen  them ;  to  shorten 
the  curb  and  lengthen  the  snaffle-reins;  to  shorten  the 
snaffle  and  lengthen  the  curb-reins.  —  To  tighten  a  rein 
that  has  become  loose.  —  To  change  the  double  bridle  from 
the  left  to  the  right  hand;  to  return  it  to  the  left  hand. 

—  Management  of  reins  when  making  quick  turns.  —  Euro- 
pean manner  of  holding  the  double  bridle-reins,  a  pair  in 
each  hand.  —  The  equestrienne  should  practice  and  per- 
fect herself  in  these  various  manoeuvrings  with  the  reins. 

—  The  proper  rein-hold  creates  a  correspondence  between 
the  rider's  hand  and  the  horse's  mouth,  and  gives  support 
to  the  animal.  —  Give  and  take  movements.  —  The  dead- 
pull.  —  In  collecting  the  horse  the  curb  must  be  used.  — 


A   BRIEF  SYNOPSIS  OF  CONTENTS.       xiii 

PAQB 

The  secret  of  good  riding.  —  The  management  of  the  reins 
with  restive  horses.  —  Liberty  of  the  reins  sometimes  nec- 
essary. —  Movements  of  horse  and  rider  should  corre- 
spond. —  Horse  united  or  collected.  —  Horse  disunited.  — 
To  animate  the  horse.  —  To  soothe  the  horse.  —  What  to 
do  in  certain  improper  movements  of  the  horse.  —  Conclud- 
ing remarks 145 

CHAPTER  VH. 

THE   WALK. 

The  movements  of  the  horse  in  walking.  —  A  good  walk  is  a 
certain  basis  for  perfection  in  other  gaits.  —  A  lady's  horse 
should  be  especially  trained  to  walk  well.  —  Every  change 
in  the  walk,  as  turning,  backing,  and  stopping,  should  be 
well  learned,  before  attempting  to  ride  in  a  faster  gait.  — 
The  walk  is  a  gait  more  especially  desirable  for  some  la- 
dies. —  The  advance,  the  turn,  the  stop,  the  reining  back, 
in  the  walk.  —  Remarks  on  the  reining  back 181 

CHAPTER    VIII. 

THE  TROT,  THE  AMBLE,  THE  PACE,  THE  RACK. 

The  movements  of  the  horse  in  trotting.  —  The  trot  a  safe 
gait  for  a  lady.  —  The  jog  trot.  —  The  racing  trot.  —  The 
true  trot.  —  The  French  trot.  —  The  English  trot;  is  desir- 
able for  ladies  to  learn.  —  Objections  to  the  French  trot. 

—  How  to  manage  the  horse  and  ride  the  English  trot.  — 
Which  is  the  leading  foot  of  the  horse  in  the  trot.  —  To 
stop  a  horse  in  the  English  trot.  —  Trotting  in  a  circle.  — 
Circling  to  the  right,  to  the  left.  —  The  amble.  —  The  pace. 

—  The  rack  .  197 


A  BRIEF  SYNOPSIS   OF  CONTENTS. 
CHAPTER  IX. 

THE    CANTER. 

PAGE 

Leading  with  the  right  foot,  with  the  left  foot.  —  The  rapid 
gallop.  —  The  canter. —  The  true  canter.  —  To  commence 
the  canter ;  position  of  the  rider,  and  management  of  the 
horse.  —  To  canter  with  the  right  leg  leading.  —  To  canter 
with  the  left  leg  leading.  —  To  determine  with  which  leg 
the  horse  is  leading  in  the  canter.  —  To  change  from  the 
trot  to  the  canter.  —  To  turn  in  the  canter,  to  the  right, 
to  the  left.  —  Management  of  the  horse  while  making  a 
turn  in  the  canter.  —  To  stop  in  the  canter.  —  Remarks 
concerning  position  in  the  canter 221 

CHAPTER  X. 

THE  HAND  GALLOP,  THE  FLYING  GALLOP. 

The  hand  gallop,  a  favorite  gait  with  ladies.  —  Position-  and 
management  of  the  reins,  in  the  hand  gallop.  —  Cautions 
to  ladies  when  riding  the  hand  gallop.  —  To  manage  a  dis- 
obedient horse  during  the  hand  gallop.  —  Turning  when 
riding  the  hand  gallop.  —  Position  of  rider  while  turn- 
ing in  the  hand  gallop.  —  The  flying  gallop  an  exercise 
for  country  roads.  —  Cautions  to  ladies  previous  to  riding 
the  flying  gallop.  —  Holding  the  reins,  position  of  the  rider, 
and  management  of  the  horse,  in  the  flying  gallop.  —  To 
stop  in  the  flying  gallop.  —  Concluding  remarks  ....  238 

CHAPTER  XI. 

THE  LEAP,  THE  STANDING  LEAP,  THE  FLYING  LEAP. 

Advantages  of  learning  to  leap.  —  Requisites  necessary  in 
leaping.  —  The  standing  leap.  —  Position  of  the  rider,  rein- 
hold,  and  management  of  the  horse,  in  the  standing  leap. 
—  Points  to  be  carefully  observed  in  the  leap.  —  How  to 
make  the  horse  leap.  —  Management  of  the  reins  and  of 


A   BRIEF  SYNOPSIS   OF  CONTENTS.         XV 

PAQE 

the  rider's  position  during  the  leap. —  Counsels  which 
should  be  well  learned  by  the  rider  before  attempting  the  . 
leap,  and  especially  as  to  the  management  of  the  horse.  — 
How  to  train  a  horse  to  leap.  —  A  lady  should  never  at- 
tempt the  leap,  except  with  a  horse  well  trained  in  it.  — 
Horses  do  not  all  leap  alike.  —  The  flying  leap.  —  Impor- 
tant points  to  know  relative  to  the  flying  leap 249 

CHAPTER   XII. 

DEFENSES  OF    THE    HORSE,    CRITICAL   SITUATIONS. 

A  lady's  horse  should  be  gentle,  well-trained,  and  possess  no 
vice.  —  Shying,  and  its  treatment.  —  Shying  sometimes  due 
to  defective  vision,  and  at  other  times  to  discontent. — 
Balking,  and  its  treatment.  —  Backing,  and  its  treatment. 
—  Gayety.  —  Kicking,  and  its  remedy.  An  attention  to 
the  position  and  motions  of  the  horse's  ears  will  determine 
what  he  is  about  to  do.  —  Plunging  ;  bucking  ;  what  to  do 
in  these  cases.  —  Rearing,  and  the  course  to  be  pursued. — 
Running  away,  and  the  course  to  be  pursued.  — Unsteadi- 
ness of  the  horse  while  being  mounted,  and  how  to  correct 
it.  —  Stumbling,  and  its  treatment.  —  What  to  do  when 
the  horse  falls.  —  Remarks  concerning  the  use  of  the  whip 
and  spur.  —  Be  generous  to  the  horse  when  he  yields  to 
his  rider 271 

ADDENDA. 

Thirty-four  points  necessary  to  be  learned,  and  to  be  well  un- 
derstood by  equestriennes.  —  Conclusion 301 

GLOSSARY 313 

INDEX  .  319 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


FIGURE  PAGE 

1.  HEAD  OF  ARABIAN  STEED 24 

2.  HEAD  or  LOW-BRED  HORSE 24 

3.  WIDTH  OF  LOWER  JAW  IN  THE  THOROUGH-BRED  .        .        26 

4.  WIDTH  OF  LOWER  JAW  IN  THE  LOW-BRED  .        .        .        .26 

5.  OBLIQUE  SHOULDER 27 

6.  STRAIGHT  OR  UPRIGHT  SHOULDER 28 

7.  ENGLISH  SADDLE 69 

8.  STOKES'  MODE  OF  GIRTHING  THE  SADDLE  .        .        .        .77 

9.  VICTORIA  STIRRUP 79 

10.  SPRING-BAR  FOR  STIRRUP-LEATHER 79 

11.  LENNAN'S  SAFETY  STIRRUP 80 

12.  LATCHFORD'S  SAFETY  STIRRUP     .        .        .        .     *  .        .81 

13.  CHIFFNEY  BIT 84 

14.  THE  COMBINATION  BIT .85 

15.  DWYER'S  CURB-BIT 86 

16.  THE  BIT  ADJUSTED          .  90 

17.  LADY  READY  TO  MOUNT  HER  HORSE         ....      104 

18.  LADY  READY  TO  DISMOUNT 110 

19.  CORRECT  SEAT  FOR  A  LADY  (Back  view)  ....       119 

20.  CORRECT  SEAT  FOR  A  LADY  (Side  view)       .        .        .        .124 

21.  CROOKED  POSITION  IN  SADDLE  (Miss  X.)        .        .        .129 

22.  CROOKED  POSITION  IN  SADDLE  (Mrs.  Y.)    ....  133 

23.  INCORRECT  POSITION  OF  LEGS  AND  FEET  (Side  view)     .      136 

24.  INCORRECT  POSITION  WHEN  LEGS  AND  FEET  ARE  WRONGLY 

PLACED  (Back  view) 137 

25.  SNAFFLE- REINS  ;  ONE  IN  EACH  HAND 149 

26.  SNAFFLE-REINS;  BOTH  IN  THE  LEFT  HAND      .        .        .       153 

27.  DOUBLE  BRIDLE;  ALL  REINS  IN  THE  BRIDLE-HAND  .        .162 

28.  DOUBLE  BRIDLE  ;  A  SNAFFLE  AND  A  CURB  REIN  IN  EACH 

HAND    .  .  166 


xviii  ILL  USTRA  TIONS. 

FIGURE  PAGE 

29.  THE  WALK 185 

30.  THE  TROT 205 

31.  ENTERING  UPON  THE  CANTER  WITH  THE  RIGHT  LEG  LEAD- 

ING         225 

32.  THE  FLYING  GALLOP 243 

33.  THE  STANDING  LEAP  —  RISING 251 

34.  THE  STANDING  LEAP — DESCENDING 259 

35.  THE  HORSE      .  ...  299 


INTEODUCTION. 


"  How  melts  my  beating  heart  as  I  behold 
Each  lovely  nymph,  our  island's  boast  and  pride, 
Push  on  the  generous  steed,  that  sweeps  along 
O'er  rough,  o'er  smooth,  nor  heeds  the  steepy  hill, 
Nor  falters  in  the  extended  vale  below!  " 

The  Chase. 

AMONG  ladies  of  wealth  and  culture  in  Eng- 
land, the  equestrienne  art  forms  a  portion  of 
their  education  as  much  as  the  knowledge  of 
their  own  language,  of  French,  or  of  music,  and 
great  care  is  taken  that  their  acquirements  in 
this  art  shall  be  as  thorough  as  those  in  any 
other  branch  of  their  tuition.  The  mother  be- 
stows much  of  her  own  personal  supervision 
on  her  daughter's  instruction,  closely  watching 
for  every  little  fault,  and  promptly  correcting 
it  when  any  becomes  manifest.  As  a  result 
universally  acknowledged,  a  young  English 
lady,  when  riding  a  well-trained  and  spirited 
horse,  is  a  sight  at  once  elegant  and  attractive. 
She  exhibits  a  degree  of  confidence,  a  firmness 
of  seat,  and  an  ease  and  grace  that  can  be 
acquired  only  by  the  most  careful  and  correct 


2  INTRODUCTION. 

instruction.  The  fair  rider  guides  her  steed, 
without  abruptness,  from  walk  to  canter,  from 
canter  to  trot,  every  movement  in  perfect  har- 
mony ;  horse  and  rider  being,  as  it  were,  of  one 
thought. 

"  Each  look,  each  motion,  awakes  a  new-born  grace." 

Unfortunately,  at  the  present  day,  from  want 
of  careful  study  of  the  subject,  the  majority  of 
American  lady  riders,  notwithstanding  the  ele- 
gance of  their  forms  and  their  natural  grace, 
by  no  means  equal  their  English  sisters  in  the 
art  of  riding.  In  most  instances,  a  faulty  posi- 
tion in  the  saddle,  an  unsteadiness  of  seat,  and 
a  lack  of  sympathy  between  horse  and  rider, 
occasion  in  the  mind  of  the  spectator  a  sense 
of  uneasiness  lest  the  horse,  in  making  play- 
ful movements,  or,  perhaps,  becoming  slightly 
fractious,  may  unseat  his  rider,  —  a  feeling 
which  quite  destroys  the  charm  and  fascination 
she  might  otherwise  exercise.  If  my  country- 
women would  but  make  a  master  stroke,  and 
add  correct  horseback  riding  to  the  long  list 
of  accomplishments  which  they  now  possess, 
they  would  become  irresistible,  and  while  de- 
lighting others,  would  likewise  promote  their 
own  physical  well-being.  There  is  no  cosmetic 
nor  physician's  skill  which  can  preserve  the 
bloom  and  freshness  of  youth  as  riding  can, 


INTRODUCTION.  3 

and  my  fair  readers,  if  they  wish  to  prolong 
those  charms  for  which  they  are  world  re- 
nowned, charms  whose  only  fault  is  their  too 
fleeting  existence,  must  take  exercise,  and  be 
more  in  the  fresh  air  and  sunshine. 

How  much  better  to  keep  old  age  at  bay  by 
these  innocent  means,  than  to  resort  to  meas- 
ures which  give  to  the  eye  of  the  world  a  coun- 
terfeit youth  that  will  not  deceive  for  a  moment. 
Even  an  elderly  lady  may  without  offense  or 
harsh  criticism  recall  some  of  the  past  joys  of 
younger  years  by  an  occasional  ride  for  health 
or  recreation,  and,  while  gracefully  accepting 
her  half  century,  or  more,  of  life,  she  can  still 
retain  some  of  the  freshness  and  spirit  of  by- 
gone years. 

Not  only  is  health  preserved  and  life  pro- 
longed by  exercise  on  horseback,  but,  in  ad- 
dition, sickness  is  banished,  or  meliorated,  and 
melancholy,  that  dark  demon  which  occasion- 
ally haunts  even  the  most  joyous  life,  is  over- 
come and  driven  back  to  the  dark  shades  from 
whence  it  came.  Should  the  reader  have  the 
good  fortune  to  possess  an  intelligent  horse,  she 
can,  when  assailed  by  sorrows  real  or  fancied, 
turn  to  this  true,  willing  friend,  whose  affec- 
tionate neigh  of  greeting  as  she  approaches, 
and  whose  pretty  little  graceful  arts,  will  tend 


4  INTRODUCTION. 

to  dispel  her  gloom,  and,  once  in  the  saddle, 
speeding  along  through  the  freshening  air,  fan- 
cied griefs  are  soon  forgotten,  while  strength 
and  nervo  are  gained  to  face  those  troubles 
of  a  more  serious  nature,  whose  existence  can- 
not be  ignored. 

To  the  mistress  who  thoroughly  understands 
the  art  of  managing  him,  the  horse  gives  his 
entire  affection  and  obedience,  becomes  her 
most  willing  slave,  submits  to  all  her  whims, 
and  is  proud  and  happy  under  her  rule. 

In  disposition  the  horse  is  much  like  a  child. 
Both  are  governed  by  kindness  combined  with 
firmness ;  both  meet  indifference  with  indiffer- 
ence, but  return  tenfold  in  love  and  obedience 
any  care  or  affection  that  is  bestowed  upon 
them.  The  horse  also  resembles  the  child  in 
the  keenness  with  which  he  detects  hypocrisy  ; 
no  pretense  of  love  or  interest  will  impose  on 
either. 

To  the  lady  rider  who  has  neither  real  fond- 
ness for  her  horse  nor  knowledge  of  governing 
him,  there  is  left  but  one  resource  by  means  of 
which  the  animal  can  be  controlled,  and  this  is 
the  passion  of  fear.  With  a  determined  will, 
she  may,  by  whipping,  force  him  to  obey,  but 
this  means  is  not  always  reliable,  especially 
with  a  high-spirited  animal,  nor  is  it  a  method 


INTRODUCTION.  5 

which  any  true  woman  would  care  to  employ. 
If,  in  addition  to  indifference  to  the  horse,  there 
be  added  nervousness  and  timidity,  which  she 
finds  herself  unable  to  overcome  by  practice 
and  association,  the  lady  might  as  well  relin- 
quish all  attempt  to  become  a  rider. 

Should  any  of  my  readers  think  that  these 
views  of  the  relations  between  horse  and  rider 
are  too  sentimental,  that  all  which  is  needed  in 
a  horse  is  easy  movement,  obedience  to  the 
reins,  and  readiness  to  go  forward  when  urged, 
and  that  love  and  respect  are  quite  unnecessary, 
she  will  find,  should  she  ever  meet  with  any 
really  alarming  object  on  the  road,  that  a  little 
of  this  despised  affection  and  confidence  is  very 
desirable,  for,  in  the  moment  of  danger,  the 
voice  which  has  never  spoken  in  caressing  ac- 
cents, nor  sought  to  win  confidence  will  be  un- 
heeded ;  fear  will  prevail  over  careful  training, 
and  the  rider  will  be  very  fortunate  if  she  es- 
capes without  an  accident.  The  writer  is  sus- 
tained in  the  idea  that  the  affection  of  the 
horse  is  essential  to  the  safety  of  the  rider,  not 
only  by  her  own  experience,  but  also  by  that 
of  some  of  the  most  eminent  teachers  of  rid- 
ing, and  trainers  of  horses. 

Maud  S.  is  an  example  of  what  a  firm 
yet  kind  rule  will  effect  in  bringing  forth  the 


6  INTRODUCTION. 

capabilities  of  a  horse.  She  has  never  had  a 
harsh  word  spoken  to  her,  and  has  never  been 
punished  with  the  whip,  but  has,  on  the  con- 
trary, been  trained  with  the  most  patient  and 
loving  care  ;  and  the  result  has  been  a  speed 
so  marvelous  as  to  have  positively  astonished 
the  world,  for  although  naturally  high  tem- 
pered, she  will  strain  every  nerve  to  please  her 
kind,  loving  master,  when  urged  forward  by  his 
voice  alone. 

Some  ladies  acquire  a  dislike  for  horseback 
riding,  either  because  they  experience  discom- 
fort or  uneasiness  when  in  the  saddle,  or  be- 
cause the  movements  of  their  horses  cause  them 
considerable  fatigue.  There  may  be  various 
reasons  for  this :  the  saddle  may  be  too  large, 
or  too  small,  or  improperly  made  ;  or  the  rider's 
position  in  the  saddle  may  be  incorrect,  and  as 
a  consequence,  the  animal  cannot  be  brought 
to  his  best  paces.  Discomfort  may  occasionally 
be  caused  by  an  improperly  made  riding-habit. 
The  rider  whose  waist  is  confined  by  tight 
lacing  cannot  adapt  herself  to  the  motions  of 
her  horse,  and  the  graceful  pliancy  so  essential 
to  good  riding  will,  therefore,  be  lost.  The 
lady  who  wears  tight  corsets  can  never  become 
a  thorough  rider,  nor  will  the  exercise  of  riding 
give  her  either  pleasure  or  health.  She  may 


INTRODUCTION.  7 

manage  to  look  well  when  riding  at  a  gait  no 
faster  than  a  walk,  but,  beyond  this,  her  mo- 
tions will  appear  rigid  and  uncomfortable.  A 
quick  pace  will  induce  rapid  circulation,  and 
the  blood,  checked  at  the  waist,  will,  like  a 
stream  which  has  met  with  an  obstacle  in  its 
course,  turn  into  other  channels,  rushing  either 
to  the  heart,  causing  faintness,  or  to  the  head, 
producing  headache  and  vertigo.  There  have 
even  been  instances  of  a  serious  nature,  where 
expectoration  of  blood  has  been  occasioned  by 
horseback  riding,  when  the  rider  was  tightly 
laced. 

The  naturally  slender,  symmetrical  figure, 
when  in  the  saddle,  is  the  perfection  of  beauty, 
but  she  whom  nature  has  endowed  with  more 
ample  proportions  will  never  attain  this  perfec- 
tion by  pinching  her  waist  in.  Let  the  full  fig- 
ure be  left  to  nature,  its  owner  sitting  well  in 
the  saddle,  on  a  horse  adapted  to  her  style,  and 
she  will  make  a  very  imposing  appearance,  and 
prove  a  formidable  rival  to  her  more  slender 
companion. 

There  is  a  mistaken  idea  prevalent  among 
certain  persons,  that  horseback  riding  induces 
obesity.  It  is  true  that,  to  a  certain  extent, 
riding  favors  healthy  muscular  development, 
but  the  same  may  be  said  of  all  kinds  of  exercise, 


8  INTRODUCTION. 

and  this  effect,  far  from  being  objectionable, 
is  highly  desirable,  as  it  contributes  to  symme- 
try of  form,  as  well  as  to  health  and  strength, 
conditions  that  in  a  large  proportion  of  our 
American  women  are  unfortunately  lacking. 
Those  who  ride  on  horseback  will  find  that 
while  gaining  in  strength  and  proper  physical 
tissue,  they  will,  at  the  same  time,  as  a  rule,  be 
gradually  losing  all  excess  of  flesh ;  it  is  impos- 
sible for  an  active  rider  to  become  fat  or  flabby ; 
but  the  indolent  woman  who  is  prejudiced 
against  exercise  of  any  kind  will  soon  find  the 
much  dreaded  calamity,  corpulency,  overtaking 
her,  and  beauty  of  form  more  or  less  rapidly 
disappearing  beneath  a  mountain  of  flesh. 

There  are  many  persons  who  entertain  the 
mistaken  idea  that  instinct  is  a  sufficient  guide 
in  learning  to  ride  ;  that  it  is  quite  unnecessary 
to  take  any  lessons  or  to  make  a  study  of  the 
art  of  correct  riding;  and  that  youth,  a  good 
figure,  and  practice  are  all  that  is  required  to 
make  a  finished  rider.  This  is  a  most  erro- 
neous opinion,  which  has  been  productive  of 
much  harm  to  lady  riders.  The  above  qualifi- 
cations are  undoubtedly  great  assistants,  but 
without  correct  instruction  they  will  never 
produce  an  accomplished  and  graceful  rider. 

The    instinctive    horsewoman    usually   rides 


INTRODUCTION.  9 

boldly  and  with  perfect  satisfaction  to  herself, 
but  to  the  eye  of  the  connoisseur  she  presents 
many  glaring  defects.  Very  bold,  but,  at  the 
same  time,  very  bad  riding  is  often  seen  among 
those  who  consider  themselves  very  fine  horse- 
women. In  order  to  gain  the  reputation  of  a 
finished  rider,  it  is  not  essential  that  one  should 
perform  all  the  antics  of  a  circus  rider,  nor  that 
she  should  ride  a  Mazeppian  horse.  The  fin- 
ished rider  may  be  known  by  the  correctness  of 
her  attitude  in  the  saddle,  by  her  complete  con- 
trol of  her  horse,  and  by  the  tranquillity  of  her 
motions  when  in  city  or  park;  in  such  places 
she  makes  no  attempt  to  ride  at  a  very  rapid 
trot,  or  flying  gallop-gaits  which  should  be  re- 
served for  country  roads,  where  more  speed  is 
allowable. 

There  is  still  another  false  idea  prevalent 
among  a  certain  class  of  people,  which  is  that 
a  love  for  horses,  and  for  horseback  riding  nec- 
essarily makes  one  coarse,  and  detracts  from 
the  refinement  of  a  woman's  nature.  It  must 
be  acknowledged  that  the  coarseness  of  a  vul- 
gar spirit  can  be  nowhere  more  conspicuously 
displayed  than  in  the  saddle,  and  yet  in  no 
place  is  the  delicacy  and  decorum  of  woman 
more  observable.  A  person  on  horseback  is 
placed  in  a  position  where  every  motion  is  sub- 


10  INTRODUCTION. 

ject  to  critical  observation  and  comment.  The 
quiet,  simple  costume,  the  easy  movements,  the 
absence  of  ostentatious  display,  will  always  pro- 
claim the  refined,  well-bred  rider.  Rudeness  in 
the  saddle  is  as  much  out  of  place  as  in  the 
parlor  or  salon,  and  greatly  more  annoying  to 
spectators,  besides  being  disrespectful  and  dan- 
gerous to  other  riders.  Abrupt  movements, 
awkward  and  rapid  paces,  frequently  cause 
neighboring  horses  to  become  restless,  and  even 
to  run  away.  Because  a  lady  loves  her  horse, 
and  enjoys  riding  him,  it  is  by  no  means  neces- 
sary that  she  should  become  a  Lady  Gay  Span- 
ker, indulge  in  stable  talk,  make  familiars  of 
grooms  and  stable  boys,  or  follow  the  hounds  in 
the  hunting  field. 

There  are  in  this  work  no  especial  instruc- 
tions given  for  the  hunting  field,  as  the  author 
does  not  consider  it  a  suitable  place  for  a  lady 
rider.  She  believes  that  no  lady  should  risk 
life  and  limb  in  leaping  high  and  dangerous 
obstacles,  but  that  all  such  daring  feats  should 
be  left  to  the  other  sex  or  to  circus  actresses. 
Nor  would  any  woman  who  really  cared  for  her 
horse  wish  to  run  the  risk  of  reducing  him  to 
the  deplorable  condition  of  many  horses  that 
follow  the  hounds.  In  England,  where  hunting 
is  the  favorite  pastime  among  gentlemen,  the 


INTRODUCTION.  11 

number  of  maimed  and  crippled  horses  that  one 
meets  is  disheartening.  Every  lady,  however, 
who  desires  to  become  a  finished  rider,  should 
learn  to  leap,  as  this  will  not  only  aid  her  in  se- 
curing a  good  seat  in  the  saddle,  but  may  also 
prove  of  value  in  times  of  danger. 

Before  concluding  I  would  again  urge  upon 
my  readers  the  importance  of  out-of-door  exer- 
cise, which  can  hardly  be  taken  in  a  more  agree- 
able form  than  that  of  horseback  riding,  —  a 
great  panacea,  giving  rest  and  refreshment  to 
the  overworked  brain  of  the  student,  counter- 
acting many  of  the  pernicious  effects  of  the  lux- 
urious lives  of  the  wealthy,  and  acting  upon  the 
workers  of  the  world  as  a  tonic,  and  as  a  stimu- 
lus to  greater  exertion. 


THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 


CHAPTER  I. 

THE   HOKSE. 

"Look,  when  a  painter  would  surpass  the  life, 
In  limning  out  a  well-proportioned  steed, 
His  art  with  Nature's  workmanship  at  strife, 
As  if  the  dead  the  living  should  exceed; 
So  did  this  horse  excel  a  common  one, 
In  shape,  in  courage,  color,  pace,  and  bone." 

—  "  what  a  horse  should  have  he  did  not  lack, 
Save  a  proud  rider  on  so  proud  a  back." 

Venus  and  Adonis. 

IT  is  supposed  that  the  original  home  of  the 
horse  was  central  Asia,  and  that  all  the  wild 
horses  that  range  over  the  steppes  of  Tartary, 
the  pampas  of  South  America,  and  the  prairies 
of  North  America,  are  descendants  of  this  Asi- 
atic stock.1  There  is,  in  the  history  of  the 

1  A  very  interesting  work,  by  C.  A.  Pietrement,  has  recently 
been  issued  in  France,  entitled  Les  chevaux  dans  les  temps  pre- 
historique  et  kistorique.  The  author  shows  that  wild  horses  were 
hunted  and  eaten  by  man  in  the  rough  stone  age.  He  also  deter- 
mines in  what  European  and  Asiatic  regions  the  eight  extant 
horse  families  were  domesticated,  and  traces  their  various  wan- 


14  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

world,  no  accurate  statement  of  the  time  when 
the  horse  was  first  subjugated  by  man,  but  so 
far  back  as  his  career  can  be  traced  in  the  dim 
and  shadowy  past,  he  seems  to  have  been  man's 
servant  and  companion.  We  find  him,  on  the 
mysterious  ruins  of  ancient  Egypt,  represented 
with  his  badge  of  servitude,  the  bridle ;  he  fig- 
ures in  myth  and  fable  as  the  companion  of 
man  and  gods ;  he  is  a  prominent  figure  in  the 
pictured  battle  scenes  of  the  ancient  world ;  and 
has  always  been  a  favorite  theme  with  poet,  his- 
torian, and  philosopher  in  all  ages. 

The  first  written  record,  known  to  us,  of  the 
subjection  of  the  horse  to  man  is  found  in  the 
Bible,  where  in  Genesis  (xlvii.  17)  it  is  stated 
that  Joseph  gave  the  Egyptians  bread  in  ex- 
change for  their  horses,  and  in  1.  9,  we  read 
that  when  Joseph  went  to  bury  his  father  Ja- 
cob, there  went  with  him  the  servants  of  the 
house  of  Pharaoh,  the  elders  of  the  land  of 
Egypt,  together  with  "  chariots  and  horsemen  " 
in  numbers.  Jeremiah  compares  the  speed  of 
the  horse  with  the  swiftness  of  the  eagle  ;  and 
Job's  description  of  the  war  charger  has  never 
been  surpassed. 

Ancient  Home  paid  homage  to  the  horse  by  a 

derings  over  the  earth,  deducing  many  interesting  facts  from  the 
history  of  their  migrations. 


THE  HORSE.  15 

yearly  festival,  when  every  one  abstained  from 
labor,  and  the  day  was  made  one  of  feasting  and 
frolic.  The  horse,  decked  with  garlands,  and 
with  gay  and  costly  trappings,  was  led  in  tri- 
umph through  the  streets,  followed  by  a  multi- 
tude who  loudly  proclaimed  in  verse  and  song 
his  many  good  services  to  man. 

This  adulation  of  the  horse  sometimes  went 
beyond  the  bounds  of  reason,  as  in  the  case  of 
Caligula,  who  carried  his  love  for  his  horse,  In- 
citatus,  to  an  insane  degree.  He  had  a  marble 
palace  erected  for  a  stable,  furnished  it  with 
mangers  of  ivory  and  gold,  and  had  sentinels 
guard  it  at  night  that  the  repose  of  his  favorite 
might  not  be  disturbed.  Another  elegant  pal- 
ace was  fitted  up  in  the  most  splendid  and  costly 
style,  and  here  the  animal's  visitors  were  enter- 
tained. Caligula  required  all  who  called  upon 
himself  to  visit  Incitatus  also,  and  to  treat  the 
animal  with  the  same  respect  and  reverence  as 
that  observed  towards  a  royal  host.  This  horse 
was  frequently  introduced  at  Caligula's  banquets, 
where  he  was  presented  with  gilded  oats,  and 
with  wine  from  a  golden  cup.  Historians  state 
that  Caligula  would  even  have  made  his  steed 
consul  of  Korne,  had  not  the  tyrant  been  oppor- 
tunely assassinated,  and  the  world  freed  from 
an  insane  fiend. 


16  THE  AMERICAN   HORSEWOMAN. 

In  the  legends  of  the  Middle  Ages  the  knight- 
errant  and  his  gallant  steed  were  inseparable, 
and  together  performed  doughty  deeds  of  valor 
and  chivalry.  In  our  present  more  prosaic  age, 
the  horse  has  been  trained  to  such  a  degree  of 
perfection  in  speed  and  motion  as  was  never 
dreamed  of  by  the  ancients  or  by  the  knights  of 
the  crusades ;  and  there  has  been  given  to  the 
world  an  animal  that  is  a  marvel  of  courage, 
swiftness,  and  endurance,  while,  at  the  same 
time,  so  docile,  that  the  delicate  hand  of  woman 
can  completely  control  him. 

The  Arabian  is  the  patrician  among  horses; 
he  is  the  most  intelligent,  the  most  beautifully 
formed,  and,  when  kindly  treated,  the  gentlest 
of  his  race.  He  is  especially  noted  for  his  keen- 
ness of  perception,  his  retentive  memory,  his 
powers  of  endurance,  and,  when  harshly  or  cru- 
elly treated,  for  his  fierce  resentment  and  fero- 
ciousness, which  nothing  but  death  can  conquer. 
In  his  Arabian  home  he  is  guarded  as  a  treas- 
ure, is  made  one  of  the  family  and  treated  with 
the  most  loving  care.  This  close  companion- 
ship creates  an  affection  and  confidence  between 
the  horse  and  his  master  which  is  almost  un- 
bounded ;  while  the  kindness  with  which  the 
animal  is  treated  seems  to  brighten  his  intelli- 
gence as  well  as  to  render  him  gentle. 


THE  HORSE.  17 

When  these  horses  were  first  introduced  into 
Europe  they  seemed,  after  a  short  stay  in  civil- 
ization, to  have  completely  changed  their  na- 
ture, and,  instead  of  gentleness  and  docility, 
exhibited  an  almost  tiger-like  ferocity.  This 
change  was  at  first  attributed  to  difference  of 
climate  and  high  feeding,  but,  after  several 
grooms  had  been  injured  or  killed  by  their 
charges,  it  began  to  be  suspected  that  there 
was  something  wrong  in  the  treatment.  The 
experiment  of  introducing  native  grooms  was 
therefore  tried,  and  the  results  proved  most  sat- 
isfactory, the  animals  once  more  becoming  gen- 
tle and  docile.1  Since  then  the  nature  of  the 
Arabian  has  become  better  understood,  and, 

1  "  The  Bedouin  (and  every  other  race  of  Orientals  that  I  am 
acquainted  with  seems  to  possess  somewhat  the  same  quality)  ex- 
hibits a  patience  towards  his  horse  as  remarkable  as  is  the  impa- 
tience and  roughness  of  the  Englishman.  ...  In  his  (the  Ori- 
ental's) mental  organization  some  screw  is  tight  which  in  the 
English  mind  is  loose;  he  is  sane  on  a  point  where  the  English- 
man is  slightly  cracked,  and  he  rides  on  serene  and  contented 
where  the  latter  would  go  into  a  paroxysm  of  swearing  and  spur- 
ring. I  have  seen  an  Arab  horse,  broken  loose  at  a  moment  when 
our  camp  was  thronged  with  horses  brought  for  sale,  turn  the 
whole  concern  topsy-turvy,  and  reduce  it  to  one  tumult  of  pawing 
and  snorting  and  belligerent  screeching;  and  I  never  yet  saw  the 
captor  when  he  finally  got  hold  of  the  halter  show  the  least  trace 
of  anger,  or  do  otherwise  than  lead  the  animal  back  to  his  picket 
with  perfect  calmness.  Contrast  this  with  the  'job'  in  the 
mouth  and  the  kick  in  the  ribs  and  the  curse  that  the  English 
groom  would  bestow  under  similar  circumstances,  and  you  have, 
2 


18    '        THE  AMERICAN   HORSEWOMAN. 

both  in  this  country  and  in  Europe,  he  shows, 
at  the  present  day,  a  decided  improvement  upon 
the  original  native  of  the  desert.  He  is  larger 
and  swifter,  yet  still  retains  all  the  spirit  as 
well  as  docility  of  his  ancestors.  In  America 
his  descendants  are  called  "  thorough-breds," 
and  Americans  may  well  be  proud  of  this  race 
of  horses,  which  is  rapidly  becoming  world  re- 
nowned. 

Before  purchasing  a  saddle  -  horse,  several 
points  should  be  considered.  First,  the  style 
of  the  rider's  figure ;  for  a  horse  which  would 
be  suitable  for  a  large,  stout  person  would  not 
be  at  all  desirable  for  one  having  a  small,  slen- 
der figure.  A  large,  majestic  looking  woman 
would  present  a  very  absurd  spectacle  when 
mounted  upon  a  slightly  built,  slender  horse ; 
his  narrow  back  in  contrast  with  that  of  his 
rider  would  cause  hers  to  appear  even  larger 
and  wider  than  usual,  and  thus  give  her  a  heavy 
and  ridiculous  appearance,  while  the  little  horse 
would  look  overburdened  and  miserable,  and 
his  step,  being  too  short  for  his  rider,  would 
cause  her  to  experience  an  unpleasant  sensation 
of  embarrassment  and  restraint.  On  the  other 
hand,  a  short,  light,  slender  rider,  seated  upon  a 

in  a  great  measure,  the  secret  of  the  good  temper  of  the  Arab 
horse  in  Arab  hands."  —  Blackwood's  Magazine,  1859. 


THE  HORSE.  19 

tall  broad-backed  animal,  would  appear  equally 
out  of  place  ;  the  step  of  the  horse  being,  in  her 
case,  too  long,  would  make  her  seat  unsteady 
and  insecure,  so  that  instead  of  a  sense  of  en- 
joyment, exhilaration,  and  benefit  from  the  ride, 
she  would  experience  only  fatigue  and  dissatis- 
faction. 

If  the  rider  be  tall  and  rather  plump,  the 
horse  should  be  fifteen  hands  and  three  inches 
in  height,  and  have  a  somewhat  broad  back. 
A  lady  below  the  medium  height,  and  of  slen- 
der proportions,  will  look  equally  well  when 
riding  a  pony  fourteen  hands  high,  or  a  horse 
fifteen  hands.  An  animal  fifteen  hands,  or  fif- 
teen hands  and  two  inches  in  height,  will  gen- 
erally be  found  suitable  for  all  ladies  who  are 
not  excessively  large  and  tall,  or  very  short 
and  slender.  In  all  cases,  however,  the  back 
of  the  horse  should  be  long  enough  to  appear 
well  under,  the  side-saddle,  for  a  horse  with  a 
short  back  never  presents  a  fine  aspect  when 
carrying  a  woman.  In  such  cases,  the  side-sad- 
dle extends  from  his  withers  nearly,  if  not  quite, 
to  his  hips,  and  as  the  riding  skirt  covers  his 
left  side,  little  is  seen  of  the  horse  except  his 
head  and  tail.  Horses  with  very  short  backs 
are  usually  good  weight-carriers,  but  their  gaits 
are  apt  to  be  rough  and  uneasy. 


20  THE  AMERICAN   HORSEWOMAN. 

Another  point  to  be  considered  in  the  selec- 
tion of  a  horse  is,  what  gait  or  gaits  are  best 
suited  to  the  rider,  and  here  again  the  lady 
should  take  her  figure  into  consideration.  The 
walk,  trot,  canter,  and  gallop  are  the  only  gaits 
recognized  by  English  horsewomen,  but  in 
America  the  walk,  rack,  pace,  and  canter  are 
the  favorite  gaits.  If  the  lady's  figure  be  slen- 
der and  elegant,  any  of  the  above  named  gaits 
will  suit  her,  but  should  she  be  large  or  stout, 
a  brisk  walk  or  easy  canter  should  be  selected. 
The  rapid  gallop  and  all  fast  gaits  should  be 
left  to  light  and  active  riders. 

The  fast  or  running  walk  is  a  very  desirable 
gait  for  any  one,  but  is  especially  so  for  middle- 
aged  or  stout  people,  who  cannot  endure  much 
jolting ;  it  is  also  excellent  for  delicate  women, 
for  poor  riders,  or  for  those  who  have  long  jour- 
neys to  make  which  they  wish  to  accomplish 
speedily  and  without  undue  fatigue  to  them- 
selves or  their  horses.  A  good  sound  horse 
who  has  been  trained  to  this  walk  can  readily 
travel  thirty  or  forty  miles  a  day,  or  even  more. 
This  gait  is  adapted  equally  well  to  the  street, 
the  park,  and  the  country  road  ;  but  it  must  be 
acknowledged  that  horses  possessing  it  rarely 
have  any  other  that  is  desirable,  and,  indeed, 
any  other  would  be  apt  to  impair  the  ease  and 


THE  HORSE.  21 

harmony  of  the  animal's  movements  in  this 
walk. 

The  French  or  cavalry  trot  (see  page  203) 
should  never  be  ridden  on  the  road  by  a  woman, 
as  the  movements  of  the  horse  in  this  gait 
are  so  very  rough  that  the  most  accomplished 
rider  cannot  keep  a  firm,  steady  seat.  The 
body  is  jolted  in  a  peculiar  and  very  unpleasant 
manner,  occasioning  a  sense  of  fatigue  that  is 
readily  appreciated,  though  difficult  to  describe. 

The  country  jog-trot  is  another  very  fatigu- 
ing gait,  although  farmers,  who  ride  it  a  good 
deal,  state  that  "  after  one  gets  used  to  it,  it  is 
not  at  all  tiresome."  But  a  lady's  seat  in  the 
saddle  is  so  different  from  that  of  a  gentleman's 
that  she  can  never  ride  this  gait  without  exces- 
sive fatigue. 

A  rough  racker  or  pacer  will  prove  almost 
as  wearisome  as  the  jog-trotter.  Indeed,  if  she 
wishes  to  gain  any  pleasure  or  benefit  from 
riding,  a  lady  should  never  mount  a  horse  that 
is  at  all  stiff  or  uneven  in  his  movements,  no 
matter  what  may  be  his  gait. 

The  easiest  of  all  gaits  to  ride,  although  the 
most  difficult  to  learn,  is  the  English  trot.  This 
is  especially  adapted  to  short  persons,  who  can 
ride  it  to  perfection.  A  tall  woman  will  be  apt 
to  lean  too  far  forward  when  rising  in  it,  and 


22  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

her  specialties,  therefore,  should  be  the  canter 
and  the  gallop,  in  which  she  can  appear  to  the 
greatest  advantage.  The  rack,  and  the  pace  of 
a  horse  that  has  easy  movements  are  not  at  all 
difficult  to  learn  to  ride,  and  are,  consequently, 
the  favorite  gaits  of  poor  riders. 

In  selecting  a  horse  his  temperament  must 
also  be  considered.  A  high-spirited,  nervous 
animal,  full  of  vitality,  highly  satisfactory  as  he 
might  prove  to  some,  would  be  only  a  source 
of  misery  to  others  of  less  courageous  disposi- 
tions. First  lessons  in  riding  should  be  taken 
upon  a  horse  of  cold  temperament  and  kindly 
disposition  who  will  resent  neither  mistakes  nor 
awkwardness.  Having  learned  to  ride  and  to 
manage  a  horse  properly,  no  steed  can  then  be 
too  mettlesome  for  the  healthy  and  active  lady 
pupil,  provided  he  has  no  vices  and  possesses 
the  good  manners  that  should  always  belong 
to  every  lady's  horse. 

It  is  a  great  mistake  to  believe,  as  many  do, 
that  a  weak,  slightly  built  horse  is  yet  capable 
of  carrying  a  woman.  On  the  contrary,  a  lady's 
horse  should  be  the  soundest  and  best  that  can 
be  procured,  and  should  be  able  to  carry  with 
perfect  ease  a  weight  much  greater  than  hers. 
A  slight,  weak  animal,  if  ridden  much  by  a 
woman,  will  be  certain  to  "get  out  of  condi- 


THE  HORSE.  23 

tion,"  will  become  unsound  in  the  limbs  of  one 
side,  usually  the  left,  and  will  soon  wear  out. 

Before  buying  a  horse,  the  lady  who  is  to  ride 
him  should  be  weighed,  and  should  then  have 
some  one  who  is  considerably  heavier  than  her- 
self ride  the  animal,  that  she  may  be  sure  that 
her  own  weight  will  not  be  too  great  for  him. 
If  he  carries  the  heavier  weight  with  ease,  he 
can,  of  course,  carry  her. 

In  selecting  a  horse  great  care  should  be 
taken  to  ascertain  whether  there  is  the  least 
trace  of  unsoundness  in  his  feet  and  legs,  and 
especially  that  variety  of  unsoundness  which  oc- 
casions stumbling.  The  best  of  horses,  when 
going  over  rough  places  or  when  very  tired 
may  stumble,  and  so  will  indolent  horses  that 
are  too  lazy  when  traveling  to  lift  their  feet 
up  fully  ;  but  when  this  fault  is  due  to  disease, 
or  becomes  a  habit  with  a  lazy  animal,  he 
should  never  be  used  under  the  side-saddle. 

If  the  reader  will  glance  at  Figs.  1  and  2,  she 
will  observe  the  difference  between  the  head  of 
the  low-bred  horse  and  that  of  the  best  bred  of 
the  race.  Fig.  1  represents  the  head  of  an  Ara- 
bian horse ;  the  brain  is  wide  between  the  eyes, 
the  brow  high  and  prominent,  and  the  expres- 
sion of  the  face  high-bred  and  intelligent.  Fig. 
2  shows  the  head  of  a  low-bred  horse,  whose 


24 


THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 


stupid  aspect  and  small  brain  are  very  manifest. 
The  one  horse  will  be  quick  to  comprehend 
what  is  required  of  him,  and  will  appreciate  any 
efforts  made  to  brighten  his  intelligence,  while 
the  other  will  be  slow  to  understand,  almost  in- 
different to  the  kindness  of  his  master,  and  apt, 
when  too  much  indulged,  to  return  treachery 


Fig.  1.  —  Head  of  Arabian  Steed.         Fig.  2.  —  Head  of  Low-Bred  Horse. 

for  good  treatment.  The  whip,  when  applied  to 
the  latter  as  a  means  of  punishment,  will  proba- 
bly cow  him,  but,  if  used  for  the  same  purpose 
on  the  former,  will  rouse  in  him  all  the  hot 
temper  derived  from  his  ancestors,  and  in  the 
contest  which  ensues  between  his  master  and 
himself,  he  will  conquer,  or  terminate  the  strife 
by  his  own  death,  or  that  of  his  master. 


THE  HORSE.  25 

Another  noticeable  feature  in  the  Arab  horse, 
and  one  usually  considered  significant  of  an  ac- 
tive and  wide-awake  temperament,  is  the  width 
and  expansiveness  of  the  nostrils.  These,  upon 
the  least  excitement,  will  quiver  and  expand, 
and  in  a  rapid  gallop  will  stand  out  freely,  giv- 
ing a  singularly  spirited  look  to  the  animal's 
face. 

The  shape  and  size  of  the  ears  are  also  indica- 
tions of  high  or  low  birth.  In  the  high-bred 
horse  they  are  generally  small,  thin,  and  deli- 
cate on  their  outer  margins,  with  the  tips  in- 
clined somewhat  towards  one  another.  By 
means  of  these  organs  the  animal  expresses  his 
different  emotions  of  anger,  fear,  dislike,  or  gay- 
ety.  They  may  be  termed  his  language,  and 
their  various  movements  can  readily  be  under- 
stood when  one  takes  a  little  trouble  to  study 
their  indications.  The  ears  of  a  low-bred  horse 
are  large,  thick,  and  covered  with  coarse  hair ; 
they  sometimes  lop  or  droop  horizontally,  pro- 
truding from  the  sides  of  the  head  and  giving 
a  very  sheepish  look  to  the  face ;  they  rarely 
move,  and  express  very  little  emotion  of  any 
kind. 

The  eye  of  the  desert  steed  is  very  beautiful, 
possessing  all  the  brilliancy  and  gentleness  so 
much  admired  in  that  of  the  gazelle.  Its  ex- 


26  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

pression  in  repose  is  one  of  mildness  and  amia- 
bility, but,  under  the  influence  of  excitement,  it 
dilates  widely  and  sparkles.  A  horse  which  has 
small  eyes  set  close  together,  no  matter  what 
excellences  he  may  possess  in  other  respects,  is 
sure  to  have  some  taint  of  inferior  blood.  Some 
of  the  coarser  breeds  have  the  large  eye  of  the 
Arabian,  but  it  will  usually  be  found  that  they 
have  some  thorough-bred  among  their  ancestors. 
Width  between  the  sides  or  branches  of  the 

lower  jaw  is  anoth- 
er distinctive  fea- 
ture of  the  horse  of 
pure  descent.  (Fig. 
3.)  A  wide  furrow 

Fig.  3.  —  Width  of  lower  jaw  m  the 

thorough-bred.  or  channel  between 

the  points  mentioned  is  necessary  for  speed,  in 
order  to  allow  room  for  free  respiration  when 
the  animal  is  in  rapid  motion.  The  coarser 
breeds  have  very  small,  narrow  channels  (Fig. 
4),  and  very  rapid  motion  soon  distresses  them. 
The  mouth  of  the  well-bred  horse  is  large,  al- 
lowing ample  room 
for  the  bit,  and  giv- 
ing him  a  deter- 
mined and  ener- 

Fig.  4. -Width  of  lower  jaw  in  the  &etic>     but      at      til6 

low-bred.  same  time  pleasant, 


THE  HORSE. 


27 


amiable  expression.  The  mouth  of  the  low- 
"bred  horse  is  small  and  covered  with  coarse 
hair,  and  gives  the  animal  a  sulky,  dejected  ap- 
pearance. 

The  light,  elegant  head  of  the  Arabian  is  well 
set  on  his  neck  ;  a  slight  convexity  at  the  up- 
per part  of  the  throat  gives  freedom  to  the 
functions  of  this  organ,  as  well  as  elasticity  to 
the  movements  of  the  head  and  neck  ;  and 
the  encolure,  or  crest  of  the  neck,  is  arched  with 
a  graceful  curve.  But  it  is  especially  in  the 
shape  of  the  shoulders  that  this  horse  excels  all 
others,  and  this  is  the  secret  of  those  easy  move- 
ments which  make  him  so  desirable  for  the  sad- 
dle. These  shoulders  are  deep,  and  placed  ob- 
liquely at  an  angle  of  about 
45°  ;  they  act  like  the  springs 
of  a  well-made  carriage,  di- 
minishing the  shock  or  jar  of 
his  movements.  They  are  al- 
ways accompanied  by  a  deep 
chest,  high  withers,  and  fore- 
legs set  well  forward,  qualities 

whiVh    rrmkp    fhp     horqp    rrmoh 

wnicn  maiie  me 

safer  for  riding.     (Fig.  5.) 

The  animal  with  straight  shoulders,  no  mat- 
ter how  well  shaped  in  other  respects,  can  never 
make  a  good  saddle-horse,  and  should  be  at 


£-  5-  —  Oblique  shoulder. 

The  angle  at  the  joint 


28  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

once  rejected.  These  shoulders  are  usually  ac- 
companied by  low  withers,  and  fore-legs  placed 
too  far  under  the  body, 
which  arrangement  causes 
the  rider  an  unpleasant  jar 
every  time  a  fore-foot  touches 
~sW/  the  ground.  Moreover,  the 

gait    of    the    horse   is    con- 
Fig.  6.— straight  or  upright  strained     and     not     always 

shoulder.     The  angle  at  the 

joint  being  more  than  45°.  safe,  and  if  he  be  used  much 
under  the  saddle  his  fore-feet  will  soon  become 
unsound.  This  straight,  upright  shoulder  is 
characteristic  of  the  coarser  breeds  of  horses, 
and  is  frequently  associated  with  a  short,  thick 
neck.  Such  horses  are  not  only  unfit  for  the 
saddle,  but,  when  any  speed  is  desired,  are  un- 
suitable even  for  a  pleasure  carriage.  (Fig.  6.) 
The  haunch  of  the  low-bred  horse  is  gener- 
ally large,  but  not  so  well  formed  as  that  of  the 
thorough-bred.  This  portion  of  the  Arabian 
courser  is  wide,  indicating  strength,  and  force 
to  propel  himself  forward,  while  his  tail,  stand- 
ing out  gayly  when  he  is  in  motion,  projects  in 
a  line  with  his  back-bone.  His  forearm  is  large, 
long,  and  muscular,1  his  knees  broad  and  firm, 

1  "There  is,  however,  a  medium  in  this,  and  the  advantage 
of  length  in  the  arm  will  depend  on  the  use  to  which  the  horse  is 
applied.  The  lady's  horse,  the  cavalry  horse,  every  horse  in  which 


THE  HORSE.  29 

his  hocks  of  considerable  size,  while  his  cannon- 
bone,  situated  between  the  knee  and  the  fet- 
lock, is  short,  although  presenting  a  broad  ap- 
pearance when  viewed  laterally. 

On  each  front  leg,  at  the  back  of  the  knee, 
there  is  a  bony  projection,  giving  attachments 
to  the  flexor  muscles,  and  affording  protection 
to  certain  tendons.  The  Orientals  set  a  great 
value  upon  the  presence  of  this  bone,  believing 
that  it  favors  muscular  action,  and  the  larger 
this  prominence  is  the  more  highly  do  they 
prize  the  animal  that  possesses  it.  The  pasterns 
of  the  high-bred  horse  are  of  medium  length, 
and  very  elastic,  while  the  foot  is  circular  and 
of  moderate  size. 

In  the  preceding  description,  the  author  has 
endeavored  to  make  plain  to  the  reader  the 
most  important  points  to  be  observed  in  both 
the  high-bred  and  the  low-bred  horse,  and  has 
given  the  most  pronounced  characteristics  of 
each. 

prancing  action  is  esteemed  a  beauty,  and  in  which  utility  is,  to  a 
certain  degree,  sacrificed  to  appearance,  must  not  be  too  long  in 
the  arm.  If  he  is  long  there,  he  will  be  proportionally  short  in 
the  leg;  and  although  this  is  an  undoubted  excellence,  whether 
speed  or  continuance  is  regarded,  the  short  leg  will  not  give  the 
grand  and  imposing  action  which  fashion  may  require.  In  addi- 
tion to  this,  a  horse  with  short  legs  may  not  have  quite  so  easy  an 
action  as  another  whose  length  is  in  the  shank  rather  than  in  the 
arms."—  W.  Youatt. 


30  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

Between  these  extremes,  however,  there  are 
many  varieties  of  horses,  possessing  more  or 
less  of  the  Arabian  characteristics  mingled  with 
those  of  other  races.  Some  of  the  best  American 
horses  are  numbered  among  these  mixed  races, 
and,  by  many,  are  considered  an  improvement 
upon  the  Arabian,  as  they  are  excellent  for 
light  carriages  and  buggies.  The  more  they 
resemble  the  Oriental  steed,  the  better  they  are 
for  the  saddle. 

The  lady  who,  in  this  country,  cannot  find  a 
horse  to  suit  her,  will,  indeed,  be  difficult  to 
please.  It  will  be  best  for  her  to  tell  some 
gentleman  what  sort  of  horse  she  wishes,  and 
let  him  select  for  her ;  but,  at  the  same  time, 
it  can  do  no  harm,  and  may  prove  a  great  ad- 
vantage to  her  to  know  all  the  requisite  points 
of  a  good  saddle-horse.  It  will  not  take  long 
to  learn  them,  and  the  knowledge  gained  will 
prevent  her  from  being  imposed  upon  by  the 
ignorant  or  unscrupulous.  Gentlemen,  even 
those  who  consider  themselves  good  judges  of 
horse-flesh,  are  sometimes  guilty  of  very  serious 
blunders  in  selecting  a  horse  for  a  lady's  use  ; 
and  should  the  lady  be  obliged  to  negotiate  di- 
rectly with  a  horse-dealer,  she  must  bear  in 
mind  constantly  the  fact  that,  although  there 
are  reliable  and  honorable  dealers  to  be  found, 


THE  HORSE.  31 

there  are  many  who  would  not  scruple  to  cheat 
even  a  woman.  A  careful  perusal  of  the  pres- 
ent work,  together  with  the  •  advice  of  an  up- 
right and  trustworthy  veterinary  surgeon,  or  a 
skilled  riding-master,  will  aid  her  in  protecting 
herself  from  the  impositions  of  unprincipled 
horse-jockeys  and  self-styled  "  veterinary  doc- 
tors." 

In  any  case,  whatever  be  the  other  character- 
istics of  the  animal  selected,  be  sure  that  he  has 
the  oblique  shoulder,  as  well  as  depth  of  shoul- 
der, and  hind-legs  well  bent.  Without  these 
characteristics  he  will  be  unfit  for  a  lady's  use, 
as  his  movements  will  be  rough  and  unsafe,  and 
the  saddle  will  be  apt  to  turn. 

If  it  be  desired  to  purchase  a  horse  for  a  mod- 
erate price,  certain  points  which  might  be  in- 
sisted on  in  a  high-priced  animal  will  have  to 
be  dispensed  with ;  for  instance,  his  color  may 
not  be  satisfactory ;  he  may  not  have  a  pretty 
head,  or  a  well-set  tail,  etc.,  but  these  deficien- 
cies may  be  overlooked  if  he  be  sound,  have 
good  action,  and  no  vices.  He  may  be  hand- 
some, well-actioned,  and  thoroughly  trained, 
but  have  a  slight  defect  in  his  wind,  noticeable 
only  when  he  is  urged  into  a  rapid  trot,  or  a 
gallop.  If  wanted  for  street  and  park  service 
only,  and  if  the  purchaser  does  not  care  for  fast 


32  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

riding,  a  horse  of  this  sort  will  suit  her  very 
well.  Sometimes  a  horse  of  good  breed,  as  well 
as  of  good  form,  has  never  had  the  advantages 
of  a  thorough  training,  or  he  may  be  worn  out 
by  excessive  work.  Should  he  be  comparatively 
young,  rest  and  proper  training  may  still  make 
a  good  horse  of  him,  but  great  care  should  be 
taken  to  assure  one's  self  that  no  permanent 
disease  or  injury  exists.  The  Orientals  have  a 
proverb,  that  it  is  well  to  bear  in  mind  when 
buying  an  animal  of  the  kind  just  described  :  — 
"  Euin,  son  of  ruin,  is  he  who  buys  to  cure." 

Always  examine  with  great  care  a  horse's 
mouth.  A  hard-mouthed  animal  is  a  very  un- 
pleasant one  for  a  lady  to  ride,  and  is  apt  to 
degenerate  into  a  runaway.  Scars  at  the  angles 
of  the  mouth  are  good  indications  of  a  "  bolter," 
or  runaway,  or  at  least  of  cruel  treatment,  and 
harsh  usage  is  by  no  means  a  good  instructor. 

While  a  very  short-backed  horse  does  not  ap- 
pear to  great  advantage  under  a  side-saddle,  he 
may,  nevertheless,  have  many  good  qualities 
that  will  compensate  for  this  defect,  and  it  may 
be  overlooked  provided  the  price  asked  for  him 
be  reasonable ;  but  horses  of  this  kind  fre- 
quently command  a  high  price  when  their  ac- 
tion is  exceptionally  good.  Corns  on  the  feet 
generally  depreciate  the  value  of  a  horse,  al- 


THE  HORSE.  33 

though  they  may  sometimes  be  cured  by  remov- 
ing the  shoes,  and  giving  him  a  free  run  of  six 
or  eight  months  in  a  pasture  of  soft  ground ;  if 
he  be  then  properly  shod,  and  used  on  country 
roads  only,  he  may  become  permanently  ser- 
viceable. There  is,  however,  considerable  risk 
in  buying  a  horse,  that  has  corns,  and  the  pur- 
chaser should  remember  the  Oriental  proverb 
just  referred  to,  and  not  forget  the  veterinary 
surgeon. 

Before  paying  for  a  horse,  the  lady  should 
insist  upon  having  him  on  trial  for  at  least  a 
month,  that  she  may  have  an  opportunity  of 
discovering  his  vices  or  defects,  if  any  such  ex- 
ist. She  must  be  careful  not  to  condemn  him 
too  hastily,  and  should,  when  trying  him,  make 
due  allowance  for  his  change  of  quarters  and 
also  for  the  novelty  of  carrying  a  new  rider,  as 
some  horses  are  very  nervous  until  they  become 
well  acquainted  with  their  riders.  Should  the 
horse's  movements  prove  rough,  should  he  be 
found  hard-mouthed,  or  should  any  indications 
of  unsoundness  or  viciousness  be  detected,  he 
should  be  immediately  returned  to  his  owner. 
It  must  be  remembered,  however,  that  very  few 
horses  are  perfect,  and  that  minor  defects  may, 
in  most  instances,  be  overlooked  if  the  essen- 
tials are  secured.  Before  rejecting  the  horse, 

3 


34  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

the  lady  should  also  be  very  sure  that  the  faults 
to  which  she  objects  are  not  due  to  her  own 
mismanagement  of  him.  But  if  she  decides 
that  she  is  not  at  fault,  no  amount  of  persua- 
sion should  induce  her  to  purchase.  In  justice 
to  the  owner  of  the  horse,  he  ought  to  be  rea- 
sonably paid  for  the  time  and  services  of  his 
rejected  animal ;  but  if  it  be  decided  to  keep 
the  horse,  then  only  the  purchase-money  orig- 
inally agreed  upon  should  be  paid. 

The  surest  and  best  way  of  securing  a  good 
saddle-horse  is  to  purchase,  from  one  of  the  cele- 
brated breeding  farms,  a  well-shaped  four-year- 
old  colt  of  good  breed,  and  have  him  taught 
the  gaits  and  style  of  movement  required. 
Great  care  should  be  taken  in  the  selection  of 
his  teacher,  for  if  the  colt's  temner  be  spoiled 
by  injudicious  treatment,  he  will  be  completely 
ruined  for  a  lady's  use.  A  riding-school  teacher 
will  generally  understand  all  the  requirements 
necessary  for  a  lady's  saddle-horse,  and  may  be 
safely  intrusted  with  the  animal's  education. 
If  no  riding-school  master  of  established  reputa- 
tion as  a  trainer  can  be  had,  it  may  be  possible 
to  secure  the  services  of  some  one  near  the 
lady's  home,  as  she  can  then  superintend  the 
colt's  education  herself  and  be  sure  that  he  is 
treated  neither  rashly  nor  cruelly. 


THE  HORSE.  35 

The  ideas  concerning  the  education  of  the  horse 
have  completely  changed  within  the  last  twenty- 
five  years.  The  whip  as  a  means  of  punish- 
ment is  entirely  dispensed  with  in  the  best 
training  schools  of  the  present  day,  and,  instead 
of  rough  and  brutal  measures,  kindness,  firm- 
ness, and  patience  are  now  the  only  means  em- 
ployed to  train  and  govern  him.  The  theory 
of  this  modern  system  of  training  may  be  found 
in  the  following  explanation  of  a  celebrated 
English  trainer,  who  subdued  his  horses  by  ex- 
hibiting towards  them  a  wonderful  degree  of 
patience  :  —  "  If  I  enter  into  a  contest  with  the 
horse,  he  will  fling  and  prance,  and  there  will 
be  no  knowing  which  will  be  master ;  whereas 
if  I  remain  quiet  and  determined,  I  have  the 
best  of  it." 

The  following  is  an  example  of  the  patience 
with  which  this  man  carried  out  his  theory :  — 

Being  once  mounted  on  a  very  obstinate  colt 
that  refused  to  move  in  the  direction  desired, 
he  declined  all  suggestions  of  severe  measures, 
and  after  one  or  two  gentle  but  fruitless  at- 
tempts to  make  the  animal  move,  he  desisted, 
and  having  called  for  his  pipe,  sat  there  quietly 
for  a  couple  of  hours  enjoying  a  good  smoke, 
and  chatting  gayly  with  passing  friends.  Then 
after  another  quiet  but  unsuccessful  attempt 


36  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

to  induce  the  colt  to  move,  he  sent  for  some 
dinner  which  he  ate  while  still  on  the  animal's 
back.  As  night  approached  and  the  air  became 
cool,  he  sent  for  his  overcoat  and  more  tobacco, 
and  proceeded  to  make  a  night  of  it.  About 
this  time  the  colt  became  uneasy,  but  not  until 
midnight  did  he  show  any  disposition  to  move 
in  the  required  direction.  Now  was  the  time 
for  the  master  to  assert  himself.  "  Whoa  !  "  he 
cried,  "  you  have  stayed  here  so  long  to  please 
yourself,  now  you  will  stay  a  little  longer  to 
please  me."  He  then  kept  the  colt  standing 
in  the  same  place  an  hour  longer,  and  when 
he  finally  allowed  him  to  move,  it  was  in  a 
direction  opposite  to  that  which  the  colt  seemed 
disposed  to  take.  He  walked  the  animal  slowly 
for  five  miles,  then  allowed  him  to  trot  back  to 
his  stable,  and  finally  —  as  if  he  had  been  a 
disobedient  child  —  sent  him  supperless  to  bed, 
giving  him  the  rest  of  the  night  in  which  to 
meditate  upon  the  effects  of  his  obstinacy. 

To  some  this  may  seem  a  great  deal  of  use- 
less trouble  to  take  with  a  colt  that  might  have 
been  compelled  to  move  more  promptly  by 
means  of  whip  or  spur ;  but  that  day's  expe- 
rience completely  subdued  the  colt's  stubborn 
spirit,  and  all  idea  of  rebellion  to  human  au- 
thority was  banished  from  his  mind  forever. 


THE  HORSE.  37 

Had  a  contrary  course  been  pursued,  it  would 
probably  have  made  the  creature  headstrong, 
balky,  and  unreliable ;  he  would  have  yielded 
to  the  whip  and  spur  at  one  time  only  to  battle 
the  more  fiercely  against  them  at  the  first  favor- 
able opportunity,  and  his  master  would  never 
have  known  at  what  minute  he  might  have  to 
enter  into  a  contest  with  him.  That  a  horse 
trained  by  violent  means  can  never  be  trusted 
is  a  fact  which  is  every  day  becoming  better 
recognized  and  appreciated. 

"  A  great  many  accidents  might  be  avoided/' 
says  a  well-known  authority  upon  the  education 
of  the  horse,  "  could  the  populace  be  instructed 
to  think  a  horse  was  endowed  with  senses,  was 
gifted  with  feelings,  and  was  able  in  some  de- 
gree to  appreciate  motives."  ..."  The  strong- 
est man  cannot  physically  contend  against  the 
weakest  horse.  Man's  power  reposes  in  better 
attributes  than  any  which  reside  in  thews  and 
muscles.  Reason  alone  should  dictate  and  con- 
trol his  conduct.  Thus  guided,  mortals  have 
subdued  the  elements.  For  power,  when  men- 
tal, is  without  limit :  by  savage  violence  noth- 
ing is  attained  and  man  is  often  humbled." 

The  lady  who  has  the  good  fortune  to  live  in 
the  country  where  she  can  have  so  many  op- 
portunities for  studying  the  disposition  and 


38  THE   AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

character  of  her  animals,  and  can,  if  she  chooses, 
watch  and  superintend  the  education  of  her 
horse  from  the  time  he  is  a  colt,  has  undoubt- 
edly a  better  chance  of  securing  a  fine  saddle- 
horse  than  she  who  lives  in  the  city  and  is 
obliged  to  depend  almost  entirely  upon  others 
for  the  training  of  her  horse.  Indeed,  very  lit- 
tle formal  training  will  be  necessary  for  a  horse 
that  has  been  brought  up  under  the  eye  of  a 
kind  and  judicious  mistress,  for  he  will  soon 
learn  to  understand  and  obey  the  wishes  of  one 
whom  he  loves  and  trusts,  and  if  she  be  an  ac- 
complished rider  she  can  do  the  greater  part  of 
the  training  herself. 

The  best  and  most  trustworthy  horse  the  au- 
thor ever  had  was  one  that  was  trained  almost 
from  his  birth.  Fay's  advent  was  a  welcome 
event  to  the  children  of  the  family,  by  whom 
he  was  immediately  claimed  and  used  as  a  play- 
fellow. By  the  older  members  of  the  family  he 
was  always  regarded  as  part  of  the  household, 
—  an  honored  servant,  to  be  well  cared  for,  — 
and  he  was  petted  and  fondled  by  all,  from 
paterfamilias  down  to  Bridget  in  the  kitchen. 
He  was  taught,  among  other  tricks,  to  bow 
politely  when  anything  nice  was  given  him, 
and  many  were  the  journeys  he  made  around 
to  the  kitchen  window,  where  he  would  make 


THE  HORSE.  39 

his  obeisance  in  such  an  irresistible  manner  that 
Bridget  would  be  completely  captivated;  and 
the  dainty  bits  were  passed  through  the  win- 
dow in  such  quantities  and  were  swallowed  with 
such  avidity  that  the  lady  of  the  house  had  to 
interfere  and  restrict  the  donations  to  two  cakes 
daily. 

Fay  had  been  taught  to  shake  hands  with 
his  admirers,  and  this  trick  was  called  his  "  word 
of  honor ; "  he  had  his  likes  and  dislikes,  and 
would  positively  refuse  to  honor  some  people 
with  a  hand-shake.  If  these  slighted  individ- 
uals insisted  upon  riding  him,  he  made  them 
so  uncomfortable  by  the  roughness  of  his  gaits 
that  they  never  cared  to  repeat  the  experiment. 
But  the  favored  ones,  whom  he  had  received 
into  his  good  graces  and  to  whom  he  had  given 
his  "  word  of  honor,"  he  would  carry  safely 
anywhere,  at  his  lightest  and  easiest  gait.  Fay 
never  went  back  on  his  word,  which  is  more 
than  can  be  said  of  some  human  beings. 

The  great  difficulty  in  training  a  horse  for  a 
lady's  use  is  to  get  him  well  placed  on  his 
haunches.  In  Fay's  case  this  was  accomplished 
by  teaching  him  to  place  his  fore-feet  upon  a 
stout  inverted  tub,  about  two  feet  high.  When 
he  offered  his  "  hand  "  for  a  shake,  some  one 
pushed  forward  the  tub,  upon  which  his  "  foot" 


40  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

dropped  and  was  allowed  to  remain  a  short 
time,  when  the  other  foot  was  treated  in  the 
same  manner.  After  half  a  dozen  lessons  of  this 
sort,  he  learned  to  pat  up  his  feet  without  as- 
sistance ;  first  one,  and  then  the  other,  and, 
finally,  both  at  once.  These  performances  were 
always  rewarded  by  a  piece  of  apple  or  cake, 
together  with  expressions  of  pleasure  from  the 
by-standers.  Fay  had  a  weakness  for  flattery, 
and  no  actor  called  before  the  curtain  ever  ex- 
pressed more  pleasure  at  an  encore  than  did  Fay 
when  applauded  for  his  efforts  to  please.  That 
the  tub  trick  would  prove  equally  effectual  with 
other  horses  in  teaching  them  to  place  them- 
selves well  on  their  haunches  cannot  be  posi- 
tively stated.  It  might  prove  more  trouble- 
some to  teach  most  horses  this  trick  than  to 
have  them  placed  upon  their  haunches  in  the 
usual  way  by  means  of  a  strong  curb,  or  by 
lessons  with  the  lunge  line.  It  proved  entirely 
successful  in  Fay's  case,  and  a  horse  lighter  in 
hand  or  easier  in  gait  was  never  ridden  by  a 
woman. 

• 

Fay's  training  began  when  he  was  only  a  few 
w^eks  old :  a  light  halter  and  a  loose  calico  sur- 
cingle were  placed  on  him  for  a  short  time  each 
day,  during  which  time  he  was  carefully  watched 
lest  he  should  do  himself  some  injury.  When 


THE  HORSE.  41 

he  was  about  eight  months  old,  a  small  bit,  made 
of  a  smooth  stick  of  licorice,  was  put  into  his 
mouth,  and  to  this  bit  light  leather  reins  were 
fastened  by  pieces  of  elastic  rubber  :  this  rubber 
relieved  his  mouth  from  a  constant  dead  pull, 
and  tended  to  preserve  its  delicate  sensibility. 
Thus  harnessed  he  was  led  around  the  lawn, 
followed  by  a  crowd  of  youthful  admirers  and 
playmates,  who  formed  a  sort  of  triumphal  pro- 
cession, with  which  the  colt  was  as  well  pleased 
as  the  spectators.  Every  attempt  on  his  part 
to  indulge  in  horse-play,  such  as  biting,  kicking, 
etc.,  was  always  quickly  checked,  and  no  one 
was  allowed  to  tease  or  strike  him. 

Nothing  heavier  than  a  dumb  jockey  was  put 
on  his  back  until  he  was  four  years  old,  when 
his  education  began  in  sober  earnest.  After  a 
few  lessons  with  the  lunge  line,  given  by  a  reg- 
ular trainer,  a  saddle  was  put  on  his  back, 
and  for  the  first  time  in  his  life  he  carried  a 
human  being. 

When  learning  his  different  riding  gaits  on 
thp  road,  he  was  always  accompanied  by  a  well- 
trained  saddle-horse,  aided  by  whose  example 
as  well  as  by  the  efforts  of  his  rider  he  was  soon 
trained  in  three  different  styles  of  movement, 
namely,  a  good  walk,  trot,  and  hand  gallop. 
Fear  seemed  unknown  to  this  horse,  for  he  had 


42  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

always  been  allowed  as  a  colt  to  follow  his  dam 
on  the  road,  and  had  thus  become  so  accus- 
tomed to  all  such  alarming  objects  as  steam  en- 
gines, hay  carts,  etc.,  that  they  had  ceased  to 
occasion  him  the  least  uneasiness.  This  high 
spirited  and  courageous  animal  had  perfect  con- 
fidence in  the  world  and  looked  upon  all  man- 
kind as  friendly.  His  constant  companionship 
with  human  beings  had  sharpened  his  percep- 
tive faculties,  and  made  him  quick  to  under- 
stand whatever  was  required  of  him.  The 
kindness  shown  him  was  never  allowed  to  de- 
generate into  weakness  or  over-indulgence,  and 
whenever  anything  was  required  of  him  it  was 
insisted  upon  until  complete  obedience  was  ob- 
tained. In  this  way  he  was  taught  to  under- 
stand that  man  was  his  master  and  superior. 

Although  it  is  not  absolutely  essential  that  a 
lady's  horse  should  learn  the  tricks  of  bowing, 
hand-shaking,  etc.,  yet  the  lady  who  will  take 
the  pains  to  teach  her  horse  some  of  them  will 
find  that  she  not  only  gets  a  great  deal  of  pleas- 
ure from  the  lessons,  but  that  they  enable  her 
to  gain  more  complete  control  over  him,  for  the 
horse,  like  some  other  animals,  gives  affection 
and  entire  obedience  to  the  person  who  makes 
an  effort  to  increase  his  intelligence. 

Lessons  with  the  lunge  line  should  always  be 


THE  HORSE.  43 

short,  as  they  are  very  fatiguing  to  a  young 
colt,  and  when  given  too  often  or  for  too  great 
a  length  of  time  they  make  him  giddy  from 
rush  of  blood  to  the  head ;  not  a  few  instances, 
indeed,  have  occurred  where  a  persistence  in 
such  lessons  has  occasioned  complete  blindness. 

A  lady's  horse  should  be  taught  to  disregard 
the  flapping  of  the  riding-skirt,  and  it  is  also 
well  for  him  to  become  accustomed  to  having 
articles  of  various  kinds,  such  as  pieces  of  cloth, 
paper,  etc.,  fluttering  about  him,  as  he  will  not 
then  be  likely  to  take  fright  should  any  part 
of  the  rider's  costume  become  disarranged  and 
blow  about  him. 

He  should  also  be  so  trained  that  he  will  not 
mind  having  the  saddle  moved  from  side  to  side 
on  his  back.  The  best  of  riders  may  have  her 
saddle  turn,  and  if  the  horse  be  thus  trained  he 
will  neither  kick  nor  run  away  should  such  an 
accident  occur. 

It  is  also  very  important  that  the  horse  should 
be  taught  to  stop,  and  stand  as  firm  as  a  rock 
at  the  word  of  command  given  in  a  low,  firm 
tone.  This  habit  is  not  only  important  in 
mounting  and  dismounting,  —  feats  which  it  is 
difficult,  if  not  impossible,  for  the  lady  to  per- 
form unless  the  horse  be  perfectly  still,  — but 
the  rider  will  also  find  this  prompt  obedience  of 


44  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

great  assistance  in  checking  her  horse  when  he 
becomes  frightened  and  tries  to  break  away  ; 
for  he  will  stop  instinctively  when  he  hears  the 
familiar  order  given  in  the  voice  to  which  he  is 
accustomed. 

A  lady  should  not  fail  to  visit  her  horse's 
stable  from  time  to  time,  in  order  to  assure  her- 
self that  he  is  well  treated  and  properly  cared 
for  by  the  groom.  Viciousness  and  restlessness 
on  the  road  can  often  be  traced  to  annoyances 
and  ill-treatment  in  the  stable.  Grooms  and 
stable  boys  sometimes  like  to  see  the  horse  kick 
out  and  attempt  to  bite,  and  will  while  away 
their  idle  hours  in  harassing  him,  tickling  his 
ears  with  straws,  or  touching  him  up  with  the 
whip  in  order  to  make  him  prance  and  strike 
out.  The  result  of  these  annoyances  will  be 
that,  if  the  lady  during  her  ride  accidentally 
touches  her  horse  with  the  whip,  he  will  begin 
prancing  and  kicking ;  or,  if  it  is  summer  time, 
the  gnats  and  flies  swarming  about  his  ears 
will  make  him  unmanageable.  In  the  latter 
case,  ear-tips  will  only  make  the  matter  worse, 
especially  if  they  have  dangling  tassels.  When 
such  signs  of  nervousness  are  noticeable,  espe- 
cially in  a  horse  that  has  been  hitherto  gentle, 
they  may  usually  be  attributed  to  the  treatment 
of  the  groom  or  his  assistants. 


THE  HORSE.  45 

Most  grooms  delight  in  currying  their  charges 
with  combs  having  teeth  like  small  spikes  and 
in  laying  on  the  polishing  brush  with  a  hand  as 
heavy  as  the  blows  of  misfortune.  Some  ani- 
mals, it  is  true,  like  this  kind  of  rubbing,  but 
there  are  many,  who  have  thin,  delicate  skins, 
to  whom  such  treatment  is  almost  unmitigated 
torture.  Should  the  lady  hear  any  contest 
going  on  between  the  horse  and  groom  during 
the  former's  morning  toilette,  she  should  order 
a  blunt  curry-comb  to  be  used  ;  or  even  dis- 
pense with  a  comb  altogether,  and  let  the  brush 
only  be  applied  with  a  light  hand.  Grooms 
sometimes  take  pleasure  in  throwing  cold  water 
over  their  horses.  In  very  warm  weather,  and 
when  the  animal  is  not  overheated,  this  treat- 
ment may  prove  refreshing  to  him,  but,  as  a 
general  rule  it  is  objectionable,  as  it  is  apt  to 
occasion  a  sudden  chill  which  may  result  in 
serious  consequences. 

The  stable  man  may  grumble  at  the  lady's 
interference  and  supervision,  but  she  must  not 
allow  this  to  prevent  her  from  attending  care- 
fully to  the  welfare  of  the  animal  whose  faith- 
ful services  contribute  so  largely  to  her  pleasure. 
When  she  buys  a  horse  she  introduces  a  new 
member  into  her  household,  who  should  be  as 
well  looked  after  and  cared  for  as  any  other 


46  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

faithful  servant  or  friend.  Indeed,  the  horse  is 
the  more  entitled  to  consideration  in  that  he  is 
entirely  helpless,  and  his  lot  for  good  or  evil 
lies  wholly  in  her  power.  If  the  mistress  is 
careless  or  neglects  her  duty,  the  servants  in 
whose  charge  the  horse  is  placed  will  be  very 
apt  to  follow  her  example,  and  the  poor  animal 
will  suffer  accordingly. 

Perhaps  the  lady,  however,  may  object  to 
entering  the  stable,  and  agree  with  the  groom 
in  thinking  it  "  no  place  for  a  woman."  Or 
she  may  fear  that  in  carrying  out  the  ideas 
suggested  above  she  will  expose  herself  to  the 
ridicule  of  thoughtless  acquaintances  who  can 
never  do  anything  until  it  has  received  the 
sanction  of  fashion. 

For  the  benefit  of  this  fastidious  individual 
and  her  timid  friends  we  will  quote  the  example 
of  the  Empress  of  Austria,  who,  although  occu- 
pying an  exalted  position  at  a  court  where  eti- 
quette is  carried  to  the  extremes  of  formality, 
yet  does  not  hesitate  to  visit  the  stable  of  her 
favorite  steeds  and  personally  to  supervise  their 
welfare  ;  and  woe  to  the  perverse  groom  who 
in  the  least  particular  disobeys  her  commands. 

Many  other  examples  might  be  given  of 
high-born  ladies,  such  as  Queen  Victoria,  the 
Princess  of  Wales,  the  Princess  of  Prussia,  and 


THE  HORSE.  47 

others,  who  do  not  seem  to  consider  it  at  all  un- 
feminine  or  coarse  for  a  woman  to  give  some 
personal  care  and  supervision  to  her  horses. 
But  to  enter  into  more  details  would  prove  tire- 
some, and  the  example  given  is  enough  to  si- 
lence the  scruples  of  the  followers  of  fashion. 

Like  all  herbivorous  creatures  that  love  to 
roam  in  herds,  the  horse  is  naturally  of  a  rest- 
less temperament.  Activity  is  the  delight  of 
his  existence,  and  when  left  to  nature  and  a 
free  life  he  is  seldom  quiet.  Man  takes  this 
creature  of  buoyant  nature  from  the  freedom  of 
its  natural  life,  and  confines  the  active  body  in 
a  prison  house  where  its  movements  are  even 
more  circumscribed  than  are  those  of  the  wild 
beasts  in  the  menagerie  ;  they  can  at  least  turn 
around  and  walk  from  side  to  side  in  their  cages, 
but  the  horse  in  his  narrow  stall  is  able  only  to 
move  his  head  from  side  to  side,  to  paw  a  little 
with  his  fore-feet,  and  to  move  backwards  and 
forwards  a  short  distance,  varying  with  the 
length  of  his  halter ;  when  he  lies  down  to  sleep 
he  is  compelled  to  keep  in  one  position,  and 
runs  the  risk  of  meeting  with  some  serious  acci- 
dent. In  some  stables  where  the  grooms  de- 
light in  general  stagnation,  the  horses  under 
their  charge  are  not  allowed  to  indulge  in  even 
the  smallest  liberty.  The  slightest  movement 


48  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

is  punished  by  the  lash  of  these  silence-loving 
tyrants,  in  whose  opinion  the  horse  has  enough 
occupation  and  excitement  in  gazing  at  the 
blank  boards  directly  in  front  of  his  head.  If 
these  boards  should  happen  to  be  whitewashed, 
as  is  often  the  case  in  the  country,  constant 
gazing  at  them  will  be  almost  sure  to  give  rise 
to  shying,  or  even  to  occasion  blindness.  If  the 
reader  will,  for  several  minutes,  gaze  steadily 
at  a  white  wall,  she  will  be  able  to  get  some 
idea  of  the  poor  horse's  sensations. 

Is  it  then  to  be  wondered  at,  that  an  animal 
of  an  excitable  nature  like  the  horse  should, 
when  released  from  the  oppressive  quiescence 
of  his  prison-house,  act  as  if  bereft  of  reason, 
and  perform  strange  antics  and  caperings  in 
his  insane  delight  at  once  more  breathing  the 
fresh  air,  and  seeing  the  outside  world.  But, 
while  the  horse  is  thus  expressing  his  pleas- 
ure and  recovering  the  use  of  limbs  by  vig- 
orous kicks,  or  is  expending  his  superfluous 
energy  by  bounding  out  of  the  road  at  every 
strange  object  he  encounters,  the  saddle  will  be 
neither  a  safe  nor  pleasant  place  for  the  lady 
rider.  To  avoid  such  danger,  and  to  compen- 
sate, in  some  degree,  the  liberty-loving  animal 
for  depriving  him  of  his  natural  life  and  placing 
him  in  bondage,  he  should  be  given,  instead  of 


THE  HORSE.  49 

the  usual  narrow  stall,  a  box  stall,  measuring 
about  sixteen  or  eighteen  feet  square.  In  this 
box  the  horse  should  be  left  entirely  free,  with- 
out even  a  halter,  as  this  appendage  has  some- 
times been  the  cause  of  fearful  accidents,  by 
becoming  entangled  with  the  horse's  feet. 

The  groom  may  grumble  again  at  this  inno- 
vation, because  a  box  stall  means  more  work 
for  him,  but  if  he  really  cares  for  the  horses 
under  his  charge  he  will  soon  become  reconciled 
to  the  small  amount  of  extra  work  required  by 
the  use  of  a  box  stall.  Every  one  who  knows 
anything  about  a  horse  in  the  stable  is  well 
aware  of  the  injury  done  to  this  animal's  feet 
and  limbs  by  compelling  him  to  stand  always 
confined  to  one  spot  in  a  narrow  stall.  A  box 
will  prevent  the  occurrence  of  these  injuries, 
besides  giving  the  horse  a  little  freedom  and 
enabling  him  to  get  more  rest  and  benefit  from 
his  sleep. 

Some  horses  are  fond  of  looking  through  a 
window  or  over  a  half  door.  The  glimpse  they 
thus  get  of  the  outside  life  seems  to  amuse  and 
interest  them,  and  it  can  do  no  harm  to  gratify 
this  desire.  Others,  however,  seem  to  be  wor- 
ried and  excited  by  such  outlooks  ;  they  become 
restless  and  even  make  attempts  to  leap  over 
the  half  door  or  through  the  window.  In  such 


50  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

cases  there  should,  of  course,  be  no  out-of-door 
scenery  visible  from  the  box. 

The  groom  should  exercise  the  horse  daily, 
in  a  gentle  and  regular  manner ;  an  hour  or 
two  of  walking,  varied  occasionally  by  a  short 
trot,  will  generally  be  found  sufficient.  Being 
self-taught  in  the  art  of  riding,  grooms  nearly 
always  have  a  very  heavy  bridle  hand,  and,  if 
allowed  to  use  the  curb  bit,  will  soon  destroy 
that  sensitiveness  of  the  horse's  mouth  which 
adds  so  much  to  the  pleasure  of  riding  him. 
The  man  who  exercises  the  horse  should  not  be 
permitted  to  wear  spurs ;  a  lady's  horse  should 
be  guided  wholly  by  the  whip  and  reins,  —  as 
will  be  explained  hereafter,  —  and  in  no  case 
whatever  should  the  spur  be  used.  If  the  lady 
wishes  to  keep  her  horse  in  good  health  and 
temper  she  must  insist  upon  his  being  exercised 
regularly,  and  must  assure  herself  that  the 
groom  executes  her  orders  faithfully ;  for  some 
men,  while  professing  to  obey,  have  been  known 
to  stop  at  the  nearest  public  house,  and,  after 
spending  an  hour  or  two  in  drinking  beer  and 
gossiping  with  acquaintances,  to  ride  back  com- 
placently to  the  stable,  leaving  the  horse  to 
suffer  from  want  of  exercise.  Other  grooms 
have  gone  to  the  opposite  extreme,  and  have 
ridden  so  hard  and  fast  that  the  horse  on  his 


THE  HORSE.  51 

return  was  completely  tired  out,  so  that  when 
there  was  occasion  to  use  him  the  same  day  it 
was  an  effort  for  him  to  maintain  his  usual 
light  gait.  Grooms  who  are  always  doctoring 
a  horse,  giving  him  nostrums  that  do  no  good 
but  often  much  harm,  are  also  to  be  avoided.  In 
short,  the  owner  of  a  horse  must  be  prepared 
for  tricks  of  all  kinds  on  the  part  of  these  stable 
servants ;  although,  in  justice  to  them,  it  must 
be  said  that  there  are  many  who  endeavor  to 
perform  all  their  duties  faithfully,  and  can  be 
relied  on  to  treat  with  kindness  any  animals 
committed  to  their  care. 

Should  the  lady  rider  be  obliged  to  get  her 
horse  from  a  livery  stable,  she  should  not  rely 
entirely  upon  what  his  owner  says  of  his  gaits 
or  gentleness,  but  should  have  him  tried  care- 
fully by  some  friend  or  servant,  before  herself 
attempting  to  mount  him.  She  should  also  be 
very  careful  to  see,  or  have  her  escort  see,  that 
the  saddle  is  properly  placed  upon  the  back  of 
the  horse  and  firmly  girthed,  so  that  there  may 
be  no  danger  of  its  turning. 


CHAPTER  II. 

THE    RIDING   HABIT. 

"  Her  dress,  her  shape,  her  matchless  grace, 
Were  all  observed,  as  well  as  heavenly  face." 

DRYDEN. 

A  RIDING  habit  should  be  distinguished  by  its 
perfect  simplicity.  All  attempts  at  display,  such 
as  feathers,  ribbons,  glaring  gilt  buttons,  and 
sparkling  jet,  should  be  carefully  avoided,  and 
the  dress  should  be  noticeable  only  for  the  fine- 
ness of  its  material  and  the  elegance  of  its  fit. 

One  of  the  first  requirements  in  a  riding 
dress  is  that  it  should  fit  smoothly  and  easily. 
The  sleeves  should  be  rather  loose,  especially 
near  the  arm-holes,  so  that  the  arms  may  move 
freely ;  but  should  fit  closely  enough  at  the 
wrist  to  allow  long  gauntlet  gloves  to  pass 
readily  over  them.  It  is  essential  that  ample 
room  should  be  allowed  across  the  chest,  as  the 
shoulders  are  thrown  somewhat  back  in  riding, 
and  the  chest  is,  consequently,  expanded.  The 
neck  of  the  dress  should  fit  very  easily,  espe- 
cially at  the  back  part.  Care  must  be  taken 
not  to  make  the  waist  too  long,  for,  owing  to  a 


THE  RIDING  HABIT.  53 

lady's  position  in  the  saddle,  the  movements  of 
her  horse  will  soon  make  a  long  waist  wrinkle 
and  look  inelegant.  To  secure  ease,  together 
with  a  perfect  fit  without  crease  or  fold,  will  be 
somewhat  difficult,  but  not  impossible.  Some 
tailors,  particularly  in  New  York,  Philadelphia, 
London,  and  Paris,  make  a  specialty  of  ladies' 
riding  costumes,  and  can  generally  be  relied  on 
to  supply  comfortable  and  elegant  habits. 

The  favorite  and  most  appropriate  style  of 
riding  jacket  is  the  "postilion  basque;  "  this 
should  be  cut  short  over  the  hips,  and  is  then 
especially  becoming  to  a  plump  person,  as  it 
diminishes  the  apparent  width  of  the  back  be- 
low the  waist.  The  front  should  have  two 
small  darts,  and  should  extend  about  three 
inches  below  the  waist ;  it  should  then  slope 
gradually  up  to  the  hips,  —  where  it  must  be 
shortest,  —  and  then  downward  so  as  to  form  a 
short,  square  coat-flap  at  the  back,  below  the 
waist.  This  flap  must  be  made  without  gathers 
or  plaits,  and  lined  with  silk,  between  which 
and  the  cloth  some  stiffening  material  should 
be  inserted.  The  middle  searn  of  the  coat-flap 
should  be  left  open  as  far  as  the  waist,  where 
about  one  inch  of  it  must  be  lapped  over  from 
left  to  right ;  the  short  side-form  on  each  side 
must  be  lapped  a  little  toward  the  central  un- 


54  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN.    • 

closed  seam.  The  arm-holes  should  be  cut  rather 
high  on  the  shoulders,  so  that  the  back  may 
look  less  broad.  If  the  lady  lacks  plumpness 
and  roundness,  her  jacket  must  be  made  double- 
breasted,  or  else  have  padding  placed  across  the 
bust,  for  a  hollow  chest  mars  all  the  beauty  of 
the  figure  in  the  saddle,  and  causes  the  rider  to 
look  round-shouldered.  The  edge  of  the  basque 
should  be  trimmed  with  cord-braid,  and  the 
front  fastened  with  crocheted  bullet  buttons; 
similar  buttons  should  be  used  to  fasten  the 
sleeves  closely  at  the  wrist,  and  two  more  should 
be  placed  on  the  back  of  the  basque  just  at  its 
waist  line. 

Great  care  must  be  taken  to  have  the  jacket 
well  lined  and  its  seams  strongly  sewed.  The 
coat-flaps  on  the  back  of  the  basque,  below  the 
waist-line,  should  be  held  down  by  heavy  metal- 
lic buttons,  sewed  underneath  each  flap  at  its 
lower  part,  and  covered  with  the  same  material 
as  that  of  the  dress.  Without  these  weights  this 
part  of  the  dress  will  be  apt  to  be  blown  out  of 
position  by  every  passing  breeze,  and  will  bob 
up  and  down  with  every  motion  of  the  rider's 
body,  presenting  a  most  ridiculous  appearance. 

For  winter  riding  an  extra  jacket  may  be 
worn  over  the  riding  basque.  It  should  be 
made  of  some  heavy,  warm  material,  and  fit  half 


THE  RIDING  HABIT.  55 

tightly.  If  trimmed  with  good  fur,  this  jacket 
makes  a  very  handsome  addition  to  the  riding 
habit. 

Poets  have  expatiated  upon  the  grace  and 
beauty  of  the  long,  flowing  riding  skirt,  with  its 
ample  folds,  but  experience  has  taught  that 
this  long  skirt,  though,  perhaps,  very  poetical, 
is  practically  not  only  inconvenient  but  posi- 
tively dangerous.  In  the  canter  or  gallop  the 
horse  is  very  apt  to  entangle  his  hind-foot  in  it 
and  be  thrown,  when  the  rider  may  consider 
herself  fortunate  if  she  escapes  with  no  worse 
accident  than  a  torn  skirt.  Another  objection  to 
this  poetical  skirt  is,  that  it  gathers  up  the  mud 
and  dust  of  the  road,  and  soon  presents  a  most 
untidy  appearance  ;  while  if  the  day  be  fresh 
and  breezy  its  ample  folds  will  stream  out  like 
a  victorious  banner;  if  made  of  some  light  ma- 
terial the  breeze  will  swell  it  out  like  an  inflated 
balloon ;  and  if  of  heavy  cloth  its  length  will 
envelop  the  rider's  feet,  and  make  her  look  as  if 
tied  in  a  bag. 

To  avoid  all  these  dangers  and  inconveniences 
the  riding  skirt  should  be  cut  rather  short  and 
narrow,  and  be  made  of  some  heavy  material. 
Two  yards  and  a  quarter  will  be  quite  wide 
enough  for  the  bottom  of  the  skirt,  while  the 
length  need  be  only  about  twelve  inches  more 


56  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

than  the  rider's  ordinary  dress*.  The  skirt 
should  be  so  gored  as  to  form  no  gathers  or 
plaits  at  the  waist.  Tailor-made  skirts  are  so 
neatly  gored  as  to  remain  perfectly  smooth 
when  the  rider  is  seated  in  the  saddle.  As  the 
pommels  take  up  a  good  deal  of  room,  the  front 
part  of  the  skirt,  which  passes  over  them,  should 
be  made  a  little  longer  than  the  back,  so  that, 
when  the  rider  is  seated  in  the  saddle,  her  dress 
may  hang  evenly.  If  made  the  same  length  all 
around  it  will,  when  the  lady  is  mounted,  be 
entirely  too  short  in  front,  and,  besides  present- 
ing an  uneven,  trail-like  appearance,  will  be  apt 
to  work  back,  or  to  blow  up  and  expose  the 
right  foot  of  the  wearer. 

The  bottom  of  the  skirt  should  have  a  hem 
about  three  inches  wide,  but  should  never  be 
faced  with  leather,  as  this  will  give  a  stiff,  bun- 
gling effect,  and  if  the  rider  should  be  thrown, 
and  catch  the  hem  of  her  skirt  on  either  pom- 
mel or  stirrup,  the  strength  of  the  leather  lining 
would  prevent  the  cloth  from  tearing  and  thus 
releasing  her.  Shot,  pieces  of  lead,  or  other 
hard  substances  are  also  objectionable,  because 
by  striking  against  the  horse's  side  they  often 
cause  him  to  become  restless  or  even  to  run 
away.  To  keep  the  skirt  down  in  its  proper 
position  a  loop  of  stout  elastic,  or  tape,  should 


THE  RIDING  HABIT.  57 

be  fastened  underneath,  near  the  bottom,  and 
through  this  loop  the  foot  should  be  passed  be- 
fore being  put  into  the  stirrup.  The  point 
where  the  loop  should  be  fastened  must  be  de- 
termined by  the  position  of  the  lady's  foot  when 
she  is  correctly  seated  in  the  saddle.  Some 
riders  use  a  second  elastic  for  the  right  foot,  to 
prevent  the  skirt  from  slipping  back,  but  this 
is  not  absolutely  necessary. 

The  basque  and  skirt  should  be  made  sepa- 
rate, although  it  is  a  very  good  plan  to  have 
strong  hooks  and  eyes  to  fasten  them  together 
at  the  sides  and  back,  as  this  will  prevent  the 
skirt  from  turning,  or  slipping  down  below  the 
waist,  should  the  binding  be  a  little  too  loose. 
The  placket-hole  should  be  on  the  left  side  and 
should  be  buttoned  over,  to  prevent  it  from 
gaping  open ;  it  must  be  only  just  large  enough 
to  allow  the  skirt  to  slip  readily  over  the  shoul- 
ders. 

The  best  material  for  a  riding  habit  is  broad- 
cloth, or  any  strong,  soft  fabric  that  will  adapt 
itself  readily  to  the  figure.  The  color  is,  of 
course,  a  matter  of  taste.  Black  is  always  styl- 
ish, and  is  particularly  becoming  to  a  stout 
person.  Dark  blue,  hunter's  green,  and  dark 
brown  are  also  becoming  colors,  especially  for 
slender,  youthful  figures.  In  the  country,  a  linen 


58  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

jacket  may  be  worn  in  warm  weather,  and  will 
be  found  a  very  agreeable  substitute  for  the 
cloth  basque,  but  the  skirt  should  never  be 
made  of  so  thin  a  material,  as  it  will  be  too 
light  to  hang  well  and  too  slippery  to  sit  upon. 

To  secure  ease  and  freedom  in  the  saddle,  a 
garment  closely  resembling  a  pair  of  pantaloons 
will  have  to  be  worn  under  the  riding  skirt,  and 
be  fastened  down  securely  by  means  of  strong 
leather  or  rubber  straps,  which  pass  under  the 
foot  and  are  buttoned  to  the  bottom  of  the  pan- 
taloons. These  pantaloons  should  be  made  of 
some  soft  cloth  the  color  of  the  dress,  or  else  of 
chamois  skin,  faced  up  to  the  knee  with  cloth 
like  that  of  the  skirt.  Most  people  prefer  the 
chamois  skin  for  winter  use,  as  it  is  very  warm 
and  so  soft  that  it  prevents  much  of  the  chafing 
usually  occasioned  by  the  rubbing  of  the  right 
leg  on  the  pommel. 

No  under  petticoats  are  necessary  where  the 
pantaloons  are  used,  but  if  the  rider  wear  one, 
it  should  be  of  some  dark  color  that  will  not  at- 
tract attention  if  the  riding  skirt  be  blown  back. 
Black  silk  will  be  an  excellent  material  for  such 
a  skirt  in  summer,  something  warmer  being 
used  in  winter.  This  skirt  should  have  no  folds 
or  gathers  in  it,  but  if  the  rider  be  very  thin  a 
little  padding  around  the  hips  and  over  the 


THE  RIDING  HABIT.  59 

back  will  give  her  the  desired  effect  of  plump- 
ness. 

An  important  article  of  every-day  wear  will 
have  to  be  discarded  and  a  riding-habit  shirt 
used  in  its  place.  This  shirt  must  be  made  short, 
that  the  rider  may  not  have  to  sit  upon  its  folds 
and  wrinkles,  which  she  would  find  very  uncom- 
fortable. The  collar  should  be  high  and  stand- 
ing, a  la  militaire,  and  made  of  the  finest,  whit- 
est linen ;  it  should  be  sewed  to  the  shirt  for 
greater  security,  and  should  just  be  seen  above 
the  high  collar  band  of  the  basque. 

The  drawers  must  also  be  made  very  much 
like  those  of  a  gentleman,  and  the  lower  parts 
be  tucked  under  the  hose.  The  garters  should 
be  rather  loose,  or  elastic. 

Buttoned  boots,  or  those  with  elastic  sides, 
should  not  be  worn  when  riding.  For  summer 
use,  the  shoe  laced  at  the  side,  and  having  a  low, 
broad  heel,  is  liked  by  many.  The  ladies'  Wel- 
lington boot,  reaching  nearly  to  the  knee,  is 
also  a  favorite  with  some,  and,  when  made  with- 
out any  seam  in  front,  prevents  the  stirrup-iron 
from  chafing  the  instep.  To  be  comfortable,  it 
should  have  a  broad  sole  and  be  made  a  little 
longer  than  the  foot.  This  boot,  however,  gives 
the  wearer  rather  an  Amazonian  appearance, 
and  has  also  the  great  disadvantage  of  being 


60  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

very  difficult  to  get  off,  the  lady  usually  being 
obliged  to  appropriate  the  gentleman's  bootjack 
for  the  purpose.  The  best  boot  for  riding  pur- 
poses, found  to  be  the  most  comfortable,  and 
one  easy  to  get  on  and  off,  is  made  of  some  light 
leather,  or  kid,  for  summer  use,  and  of  heavier 
leather  for  winter;  it  extends  half  way  to  the 
knee,  laces  up  in  front,  has  broad,  low  heels  and 
wide  soles,  and  is  made  a  little  longer  than  the 
wearer's  foot,  so  that  it  may  be  perfectly  easy, 
as  a  tight  boot  in  riding  is  even  more  distressing 
than  in  walking. 

The  corset  is  indispensable  to  the  elegant  fit 
required  in  a  riding  habit,  but  should  never  be 
laced  tight.  It  should  be  short  on  the  sides  and 
in  the  front  and  back.  If  long  in  front  it  will 
be  almost  impossible  for  the  rider  to  pass  her 
knee  over  the  second  pommel  when  she  at- 
tempts to  mount  her  horse,  and  will  cause  her, 
when  riding,  to  incline  her  body  too  far  back  ; 
when  long  at  the  sides  it  will  be  even  more  in- 
convenient, for,  if  at  all  tight,  it  will  make  the 
rider,  when  in  the  saddle,  feel  as  if  her  hips  were 
compressed  in  a  vise ;  when  too  long  behind,  it 
will  interfere  with  that  curving  or  hollowing  in 
of  the  back  that  is  so  necessary  to  an  erect  posi- 
tion ;  it  will  also  tend  to  throw  the  body  too  far 
forward.  If  the  rider  have  any  tendency  to 


THE  RIDING  HABIT.  61 

stoutness  all  these  discomforts  will  be  exagger- 
ated. The  C.  P.  or  the  Parisian  la  Sirene  is  un- 
doubtedly the  best  corset  for  riding  purposes, 
for  it  is  short,  light,  and  flexible,  and  not  preju- 
dicial to  the  ease  and  elegance  of  good  riding, 
as  is  the  case  with  the  stiff,  long-bodied  corset. 

The  hair  should  be  so  arranged  that  it  can- 
not possibly  come  down  during  the  ride.  To 
effect  this,  it  must  be  made  into  one  long  braid, 
which  must  be  coiled  upon  the  back  of  the  head, 
and  fastened  firmly,  but  not  too  tightly,  by 
means  of  a  few  long  hairpins.  The  coil  may 
be  put  on  the  top  of  the  head,  but  this  arrange- 
ment will  be  found  very  inconvenient,  especially 
where  the  hair  is  thick,  for  it  will  make  the  hat 
sit  very  awkwardly  on  the  head.  The  hair 
should  never  be  worn  in  ringlets,  as  these  will 
be  blown  about  by  the  wind,  or  by  the  move- 
ments of  the  rider,  and  will  soon  become  so  tan- 
gled as  to  look  like  anything  but  the  "  smooth 
flowing  ringlets  "  of  the  poet.  Nor  should  the 
hair  be  allowed  to  stream  down  the  back  in  long 
peasant-braids,  a  style  mistakenly  adopted  by 
some  young  misses,  but  which  gives  the  rider 
a  wild  and  untidy  appearance.  When  the  horse 
is  in  motion  these  braids  will  stream  out  on  the 
breeze,  and  an  observer  at  a  short  distance  will 
be  puzzled  to  know  what  it  is  that  seems  to  be 


62  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

in  such  an  extraordinary  state  of  agitation.  It 
is  also  a  mistake  to  draw  the  hair  back  tightly 
from  the  forehead,  as  this  gives  a  constrained 
look  to  the  features ;  it  should,  on  the  contrary, 
be  arranged  in  rather  a  loose,  unstudied  man- 
ner, which  will  tend  to  soften  the  expression  of 
the  face.  It  is  the  extreme  of  bad  taste  to  bang 
or  frizz  the  hair  across  the  forehead,  or  to  wear 
the  hat  somewhat  on  the  back  of  the  head. 
These  things  are  sometimes  done  by  very  young 
girls,  but  give  to  the  prettiest  and  most  modest 
face  an  air  of  boldness  and  vulgarity. 

The  riding  hat  at  present  fashionable,  and 
most  suitable  for  city  or  park,  is  made  of  black 
silk  plush  with  a  Stanley  curved  brim,  and  bell- 
crown,  and  is  trimmed  with  a  narrow  band 
around  the  crown,  directly  above  the  brim. 
Another  favorite  is  a  jockey-cap,  made  of  the 
same  cloth  as  that  of  the  habit.  Either  of  these 
may  be  obtained  at  the  hat  stores.  For  riding 
in  the  country,  where  one  does  not  care  to  be 
so  dressy,  the  English  Derby,  or  some  other 
fashionable  style  of  young  gentleman's  felt  hat, 
may  be  used  ;  with  a  short  plume  or  bird's  wing 
fastened  at  the  side,  a  hat  of  this  description 
has  a  very  charming  and  coquettish  air.  There 
is  another  style  of  silk  hat  manufactured  ex- 
pressly for  ladies,  which  may  also  be  obtained  at 


THE  RIDING  HABIT.  63 

any  hatter's ;  it  has  a  lower  crown  than  a  gentle- 
man's silk  hat,  and  looks  very  pretty  with  a 
short  black  net-veil  fastened  around  the  crown, 
as  this  relieves  the  stiff  look  it  otherwise  pre- 
sents. This  style  of  hat  is  very  appropriate  for 
a  middle-aged  person.  Care  must  be  taken  to 
have  the  hat  neither  too  loose  nor  too  tight ;  if 
too  tight,  it  will  be  apt  to  occasion  a  headache, 
and  if  too  loose  will  be  easily  displaced. 

Long  veils,  long  plumes,  hats  with  very  broad 
brims,  or  very  high  crowns,  as  well  as  those 
which  are  worn  perched  on  the  top  of  the 
head,  should  be  especially  avoided.  The  hat 
must  always  be  made  secure  on  the  head  by 
means  of  stout  elastic  sewn  on  strongly,  and  so 
adjusted  that  it  can  pass  below  the  braid  or  coil 
of  hair  at  the  back  of  the  head.  An  ordinary 
back-comb  firmly  fastened  on  the  top  of  the 
head  will  prevent  the  hat  from  gradually  slip- 
ping backwards. 

These  apparently  trifling  details  must  be  at- 
tended to,  or  some  prankish  breeze  will  suddenly 
carry  off  the  rider's  hat,  and  she  will  be  sub- 
jected to  the  mortification  of  having  it  handed 
back  to  her,  with  an  ill-concealed  smile,  by  some 
obliging  pedestrian.  Many  little  particulars 
which  seem  insignificant  when  in  the  dressing- 
room  will  become  causes  of  much  discomfort  and 


64  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

suffering  when  in  the  saddle.  The  pleasure 
of  many  a  ride  has  been  marred  by  a  displaced 
pin,  a  lost  button,  too  tight  a  garter,  a  glove 
that  cramped  the  hand,  or  a  ring  that  occa- 
sioned swelling  and  pain  in  the  finger.  These 
details,  unimportant  as  they  may  seem,  must  be 
carefully  attended  to  before  starting  for  a  ride. 
Pins  should  be  used  sparingly.  If  a  watch  is 
worn,  it  should  be  well  secured  in  its  pocket, 
and  the  chain  carefully  fastened  to  a  button  of 
the  jacket. 

The  riding  gauntlets  should  be  made  of 
thick,  soft,  undressed  kid,  or  chamois  skin,  be 
long  wristed,  and  somewhat  loose  across  the 
hands,  so  that  the  reins  may  be  firmly  grasped. 
With  the  exception  of  the  watch,  the  chain  of 
which  should  be  as  unostentatious  as  possible,  it 
will  not  be  in  good  taste  to  wear  jewelry.  A 
cravat  or  small  bow  of  ribbon  will  be  in  much 
better  taste  than  a  breast-pin  for  fastening  the 
collar,  and  may  be  of  any  color  that  suits  the 
fancy  or  complexion  of  the  wearer.  The  cos- 
tume may  be  much  brightened  by  a  small  bou- 
tonniere  of  natural  flowers ;  these  placed  at  the 
throat  or  waist  in  an  apparently  careless  manner 
give  an  air  of  daintiness  and  refinement  to  the 
whole  costume. 

There  is  one  accomplishment  often  neglected, 


THE  RIDING   HABIT.  65 

or  overlooked,  even  by  the  most  skillful  lady 
riders,  and  that  is,  expertness  in  holding  the 
riding  skirt  easily  and  gracefully  when  not  in 
the  saddle.  In  this  attainment  the  Parisian 
horsewoman  far  excels  all  others ;  her  manner 
of  gathering  up  the  folds  of  her  riding  skirt, 
while  waiting  for  her  horse,  forms  a  picture  of 
such  unaffected  elegance,  that  it  would  be  well 
for  other  riders  to  study  and  imitate  it.  She 
does  not  grab  her  skirt  with  one  hand,  twist  it 
round  to  one  side,  allow  it  to  trail  upon  the 
ground,  nor  does  she  collect  the  folds  in  one  un- 
wieldy bunch  and  throw  it  brusquely  over  her 
arm.  Instead  of  any  of  these  ungraceful  acts, 
she  quietly  extends  her  arms  down  to  their  full 
length  at  her  sides,  inclines  her  body  slightly 
forward,  and  gathers  up  the  front  of  her  skirt, 
raising  her  hands  just  far  enough  to  allow  the 
long  part  in  front  and  at  the  sides  to  escape  the 
ground ;  then  by  bringing  her  hands  slightly 
forward,  one  being  held  a  little  higher  than  the 
other,  the  back  part  of  the  skirt  is  raised. 
While  accomplishing  these  movements  her  whip 
will  be  held  carelessly  in  her  right  hand,  at  a 
very  short  distance  below  the  handle,  the  point 
being  directed  downwards,  and  somewhat  ob- 
liquely backwards.  The  whole  of  this  graceful 
manoeuvring  will  be  effected  readily  and  art- 


66  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

lessly,  in  an  apparently  unstudied  manner.  In 
reality,  however,  all  the  Parisian's  ease  and 
grace  are  the  results  of  careful  training,  but  so 
perfect  is  the  instruction  that  art  is  made  to 
appear  like  nature. 

In  selecting  a  riding  whip  care  should  be 
taken  to  secure  one  that  is  straight  and  stiff  ; 
if  it  be  curved,  it  may  accidentally  touch  the 
horse  and  make  him  restless ;  if  flexible  it  will 
be  of  no  use  in  managing  him.  The  handle  of 
the  whip  may  be  very  plain,  or  the  lady  may 
indulge  her  taste  for  the  ornamental  by  having 
it  very  elaborate  and  rich,  but  she  should  be 
careful  never  to  sacrifice  strength  to  appear- 
ances. Any  projecting  points  that  might  catch 
on  the  dress  and  tear  it  must  be  dispensed  with. 
That  the  whip  may  not  be  lost  if  the  hand  should 
unwittingly  lose  its  hold  upon  it,  a  loop  of  silk 
cord  should  be  fastened  firmly  to  the  handle, 
and  the  hand  passed  through  this  loop.  When 
riding,  the  whip  should  always  be  held  in  the 
right  hand  with  a  grasp  sufficient  to  retain  it, 
but  not  as  if  in  a  vise  ;  the  point  should  be  di- 
rected downward,  or  toward  the  hind-leg  of  the 
horse,  care  being  taken  not  to  touch  him  with 
it  except  when  necessary. 


CHAPTER  III. 

THE    SADDLE   AND   BRIDLE. 

"  Form  by  mild  bits  his  mouth,  nor  harshly  wound, 
Till  summer  rolls  her  fourth-revolving  round. 
Then  wheel  in  graceful  orbs  his  paced  career, 
Let  step  by  step  in  cadence  strike  the  ear, 
The  flexile  limbs  in  curves  alternate  prance, 
And  seem  to  labor  as  they  slow  advance : 
Then  give,  uncheck'd,  to  fly  with  loosen'd  rein, 
Challenge  the  winds,  and  wing  th'  unprinted  plain." 

VIRGIL,  Sotheby's  Translation. 

IN  ye  ancient  times,  the  damsel  who  wished 
to  enjoy  horseback  riding  did  not,  like  her  suc- 
cessor of  to-day,  trust  to  her  own  ability  to  ride 
and  manage  her  horse,  but,  seated  upon  a  pad 
or  cushion,  called  a  "  pillion,"  which  was  fas- 
tened behind  a  man's  saddle,  rode  without  a 
stirrup  and  without  troubling  herself  with  the 
reins,  preserving  her  balance  by  holding  to  the 
belt  of  a  trusty  page,  or  masculine  admirer, 
whose  duty  it  was  to  attend  to  the  management 
of  the  horse.  We  learn  that  as  late  as  A.  D. 
1700,  George  III.  made  his  entry  into  London 
with  his  wife,  Charlotte,  thus  seated  behind  him. 
Gradually,  however,  as  women  became  more 
confident,  they  rode  alone  upon  a  sort  of  side- 


68  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

saddle,  on  which  by  means  of  the  reins  and  by 
bracing  her  feet  against  a  board,  called  a  "  plan- 
chette,"  which  was  fastened  to  the  front  of  the 
saddle,  the  rider  managed  to  keep  her  seat. 
Such  was  the  English  horsewoman  of  the  seven- 
teenth century,  in  the  time  of  Charles  II., — 
"  the  height  of  fashion  and  the  cream  of  style." 

To  the  much  quoted  "  vanity  of  the  fair  sex  " 
do  we  owe  the  invention  of  the  side-saddle  of 
our  grandmothers.  About  the  middle  of  the 
sixteenth  century  Catherine  de  Medici,  wife  of 
Henry  II.  of  France,  having  a  very  symmetri- 
cal figure  which  she  wished  to  display  to  advan- 
tage, invented  the  second  pommel  of  the  saddle, 
and  thus,  while  gratifying  her  own  vanity,  was 
unconsciously  the  means  of  greatly  benefiting 
her  sex  by  enabling  them  to  ride  with  more 
ease  and  freedom.  To  this  saddle  there  was 
added,  about  1830,  a  third  pommel,  the  inven- 
tion of  which  is  due  to  the  late  M.  Pellier,  Sr., 
an  eminent  riding  teacher  in  Paris,  France. 
This  three-pommeled  saddle  is  now  called  the 
English  saddle,  and  is  the  one  generally  used 
by  the  best  lady  riders  of  the  present  day. 

This  so-called  "  English  saddle  "  was  promptly 
appreciated,  and  wherever  introduced  soon  sup- 
planted the  old-fashioned  one  with  only  two 
pommels.  (Fig.  7.) 


THE  SADDLE  AND  BRIDLE. 


69 


A  lady  who  has  once  ridden  one  of  these 
three-pommeled  saddles  will  never  care  to  use 
any  other  kind.  It  renders  horseback  riding 
almost  perfectly  safe,  for,  if  the  rider  has  learned 
to  use  it  properly,  it  will  be  nearly  impossible 


Fig.  7.  —  English  Saddle. 

1,  second  pommel ;  2,  third  pommel ;  3,  shield ;  4,  saddle-flap ;  5,  cantle ;  6,  stir- 
rup-leather ;  7,  stirrup ;  8,  girths  ;  9,  platform. 

for  a  horse  to  throw  her.  It  gives  her  a  much 
firmer  seat  even  than  that  of  a  gentleman  in  his 
saddle,  and  at  the  same  time,  if  rightly  used, 
does  not  interfere  with  that  easy  grace  so  essen- 
tial to  good  riding.  In  many  of  our  large  cities 
where  this  saddle  is  employed  twenty  lady  rid- 
ers may  now  be  seen  in  the  park  or  on  the  road 
where  formerly  there  was  one ;  and  this  is 


70  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

wholly  due  to  the  sense  of  security  it  gives,  es- 
pecially to  a  timid  rider,  a  feeling  never  attain- 
able in  the  two-pommeled  saddle,  where  the  seat 
is  maintained  chiefly  by  the  balance,  or  by  using 
the  reins  as  a  means  of  support. 

By  sitting  erect,  taking  a  firm  hold  upon  the 
second  pommel  with  the  right  knee,  and  press- 
ing the  left  knee  up  against  the  third  pommel, 
a  perfectly  secure  seat  is  obtained,  from  which 
the  rider  cannot  be  shaken,  provided  the  saddle 
is  well  girthed  and  the  horse  does  not  fall,  while 
her  hands  are  left  free  to  manage  the  reins,  a 
very  important  point  where  the  horse  is  spirited 
or  restless.  To  insure  the  greatest  safety  and 
comfort  for  both  horse  and  rider,  it  is  very  im- 
portant that  the  saddle  should  be  accurately 
constructed.  If  possible,  it  should  be  made 
especially  for  the  horse  that  is  to  carry  it,  so 
that  it  may  suit  his  particular  shape.  If  it  does 
not  fit  him  well,  it  will  be  likely  to  turn,  or  may 
gall  his  back  severely,  and  make  him  for  a  long 
time  unfit  for  service.  It  may  even,  in  time, 
give  rise  to  fistulous  withers,  will  certainly 
make  the  horse  restless  and  uneasy  on  the  road, 
and  the  pain  he  suffers  will  interfere  with  the 
ease  and  harmony  of  his  gaits.  Many  a  horse 
has  been  rendered  unfit  for  a  lady's  use  solely 
because  the  saddle  did  not  fit  well. 


THE  SADDLE  AND  BRIDLE.  71 

The  under  surface  of  the  arch  of  the  saddle- 
tree, in  front,  should  never  come  in  contact 
with  the  animal's  withers,  nor  should  the  points 
of  the  saddle-tree  be  so  tightly  fitted  as  to  in- 
terfere with  the  movements  of  his  shoulders.  On 
the  other  hand,  they  should  not  be  so  far  apart 
as  to  allow  the  central  furrowed  line  of  the  un- 
der surface  of  the  saddle  (the  chamber)  to  rest 
upon  the  animal's  back.  The  saddle  should  be 
so  fitted  and  padded  that  this  central  chamber 
will  lie  directly  over  the  spinal  column  of  the 
horse  without  touching  it,  while  the  padded  sur- 
faces, just  below  the  chamber,  should  rest  closely 
on  the  sides  of  the  back,  and  be  supported  at  as 
many  points  as  is  possible  without  making  the 
animal  uncomfortable. 

When  a  horse  has  very  high  withers,  a  breast- 
plate, similar  to  that  employed  in  military  ser- 
vice, may  be  used,  to  prevent  the  saddle  from 
slipping  backwards.  This  contrivance  consists 
of  a  piece  of  leather  passing  round  the  neck 
like  a  collar,  to  the  lowest  part  of  which  is  fast- 
ened a  strap  that  passes  between  the  fore-legs 
of  the  horse  and  is  attached  to  the  saddle  girth. 
Two  other  straps,  one  on  each  side,  connect  the 
upper  part  of  the  collar  piece  with  the  upper 
part  of  the  saddle.  The  under  strap  should 
never  be  very  loose,  for  should  the  saddle  slip 


72  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

back  and  this  strap  not  be  tight  enough  to  hold 
down  the  collar  piece,  the  latter  will  be  pulled 
up  by  the  upper  straps  so  as  to  press  against  the 
windpipe  of  the  horse  and  choke  him.  Should 
the  horse  have  low  withers  and  a  round,  barrel- 
like  body,  false  pannels  or  padded  pieces  may 
be  used ;  but  an  animal  of  this  shape  is  not  suit- 
able for  a  lady,  for  it  will  be  almost  impossible 
to  keep  the  saddle  from  turning,  no  matter  how 
carefully  it  may  be  girthed. 

A  sufficiently  spacious  seat  or  platform  to  the 
saddle  is  much  more  comfortable  for  both  horse 
and  rider  than  a  narrow  one.  It  gives  the  rider 
a  firmer  seat,  and  does  not  bring  so  much  strain 
upon  the  girths.  This  platform  should  also  be 
made  as  nearly  level  as  possible,  and  be  covered 
with  quilted  buckskin.  Leather,  now  so  often 
used  for  this  purpose,  becomes  after  a  time  so 
slippery  that  it  is  difficult  to  retain  one's  seat, 
and  the  pommels  when  covered  with  it  are  apt 
to  chafe  the  limbs  severely. 

To  secure  a  thoroughly  comfortable  saddle  it 
is  necessary  that  not  only  the  horse,  but  also 
the  rider,  should  be  measured  for  it ;  for  a  sad- 
dle suitable  for  a  slender  person  could  hardly 
be  used  with  any  comfort  by  a  stout  one,  and  it 
is  almost  as  bad  to  have  a  saddle  too  large  as 
too  small.  Care  must  be  taken  to  have  suffi- 


THE  SADDLE  AND  BRIDLE.  73 

cient  length  from  the  front  of  the  second  pom- 
mel to  the  cantle.  In  the  ready-made  saddles 
this  distance  is  usually  too  short,  and  the  rider 
is  obliged  to  sit  upon  the  back  edge  of  the  seat, 
thereby  injuring  both  herself  and  her  horse. 
It  is  much  better  to  err  in  the  other  direction 
and  have  the  seat  too  long  rather  than  too  short. 
The  third  pommel  should  be  so  placed  that  it 
will  just  span  the  knee  when  the  stirrup-leather 
is  of  the  right  length.  It  should  be  rather 
short,  slightly  curved,  and  blunt.  If  it  be  too 
long  and  have  too  much  of  a  curve,  it  will,  in 
the  English  trot,  interfere  with  the  free  action 
of  the  rider's  left  leg,  and  if  the  horse  should 
fall,  it  would  be  almost  impossible  for  her  to  dis- 
engage her  leg  and  free  herself  in  time  to  es- 
cape injury.  The  third  pommel  must  be  so 
placed  as  not  to  interfere  with  the  position  of 
the  right  leg  when  this  is  placed  around  the 
second  pommel  with  the  right  heel  drawn  back- 
wards. To  get  the  proper  proportions  for  her 
saddle,  the  lady  must,  when  seated,  take  her 
measure  from  the  under  side  of  the  knee  joint 
to  the  lower  extremity  of  her  back,  and  also  — 
to  secure  the  proper  width  for  the  seat  —  from 
thigh  to  thigh.  If  these  two  measurements  are 
given  to  the  saddle-maker  he  will,  if  he  under- 
stands his  business,  be  able  to  construct  the 
saddle  properly. 


74  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

The  saddle  recommended  by  the  author,  one 
which  she  has  used  for  several  years,  and  still 
continues  to  use,  is  represented  in  Fig.  7.  The 
third  pommel  of  this  saddle  is  of  medium  size, 
and  instead  of  being  close  to  the  second  one  is 
placed  a  short  distance  below  it,  thus  enabling 
the  rider  to  use  a  longer  stirrup  than  she  other- 
wise could  ;  for  if  the  two  pommels  be  very 
close  together,  the  rider  will  be  obliged  to  use 
a  very  short  stirrup  in  order  to  make  this  third 
pommel  of  any  use.  The  disadvantage  of  a 
short  stirrup  is  that,  in  a  long  ride,  it  is  apt  to 
occasion  cramp  in  the  left  leg.  It  also  inter- 
feres with  an  easy  and  steady  position  in  the 
saddle.  But  with  a  stirrup  of  the  right  length, 
and  the  arrangement  of  the  pommels  such  as  we 
have  described,  a  steadiness  is  given  to  the  left 
leg  that  can  never  be  obtained  with  the  old- 
fashioned  two-pommeled  saddle. 

The  third  pommel  must  be  screwed  securely 
into  the  saddle-tree,  and  once  fixed  in  its  proper 
place,  should  not  again  be  moved,  as  if  fre- 
quently turned  it  will  soon  get  loose,  and  the 
rider  will  not  be  able  to  rely  upon  its  assistance 
to  retain  her  balance.  It  should  be  screwed 
into  place  inversely,  that  is,  instead  of  being 
turned  to  the  right  it  must  be  turned  to  the  left, 
so  that  the  pressure  of  the  knee  may  make  it 


THE  SADDLE  AND  BRIDLE.  75 

firmer  and  more  secure,  instead  of  loosening  it, 
as  would  be  the  case  if  it  were  screwed  to  the 
right.  This  pommel  should  be  well  padded,  so 
that  the  knee  may  not  be  bruised  by  it. 

The  second  pommel  should  also  be  well  padded, 
and  should  always  be  curved  slightly  so  as  to 
suit  the  form  of  the  right  leg.  It  must  not  be 
so  high  as  to  render  it  difficult,  in  mounting  and 
dismounting,  to  pass  the  right  knee  over  it. 
The  off-pommel,  since  the  English  saddle  has 
come  into  vogue,  has  almost  disappeared,  being 
reduced  to  a  mere  vestige  of  its  former  size. 
This  is  a  great  improvement  to  the  rider's  ap- 
pearance, as  she  now  no  longer  has  that  con- 
fined, cribbed-up  look  which  the  high  pommeled 
saddle  of  twenty  years  ago  gave  her. 

The  distance  between  the  off-pommel  and  the 
second  one  should  be  adapted  to  the  size  of  the 
rider's  leg,  being  wide  enough  to  allow  the  leg 
to  rest  easily  between  the  two ;  but  no  wider 
than  this,  as  too  much  space  will  be  apt  to  lead 
her  to  sit  sideways  upon  the  saddle. 

A  saddle  should  be  well  padded,  but  not  so 
much  so  as  to  lift  the  rider  too  high  above  the 
horse's  back.  The  shield  in  front  should  not 
press  upon  the  neck  of  the  horse,  but  should 
barely  touch  it.  The  saddle  flaps  must  be  well 
strapped  down,  for  if  they  stand  out  stiffly,  the 


76  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

correct  position  of  the  stirrup  leg  will  be  inter- 
fered with.  A  side-saddle  should  never  be  too 
light  in  weight,  for  this  will  make  the  back  of 
the  horse  sore,  especially  if  he  be  ridden  by  a 
heavy  woman. 

The  tacks  or  nails  in  the  under  part  of  the 
saddle  should  be  firmly  driven  in,  as  they  may 
otherwise  become  loose  and  either  injure  the 
horse,  or  make  him  nervous  and  uneasy.  To 
avoid  trouble  of  this  kind,  some  people  advocate 
the  use  of  false  pannels,  which  are  fastened  to 
the  saddle-tree  by  rods  or  loops,  and  can  be  re- 
moved and  replaced  at  will.  It  is  said  that  by 
using  them,  the  same  saddle  can  be  made  to  fit 
different  horses.  The  author  has  no  personal 
knowledge  of  this  invention,  but  it  has  been 
strongly  recommended  to  her  by  several  excel- 
lent horsemen.  A  felt  or  flannel  saddle  cloth, 
of  the  same  color  as  the  rider's  habit,  should  al- 
ways be  placed  under  the  saddle,  as  it  helps  to 
protect  the  horse's  back,  as  well  as  to  prevent 
the  saddle  from  getting  soiled. 

Every  finished  side-saddle  has  three  girths. 
Two  of  these  are  made  of  felt  cloth,  or  strong 
webbing,  and  are  designed  to  fasten  it  firmly 
upon  the  horse's  back.  The  third  one,  made  of 
leather,  is  intended  to  keep  the  flaps  down. 
There  should  always  be,  on  each  side,  three 


THE  SADDLE  AND  BRIDLE. 


77 


straps  fastened  to  the  saddle-tree  under  the 
leather  flaps ;  upon  two  of  these  the  girths  are 
to  be  buckled,  while  the  third  is  an  extra  one, 
to  be  used  as  a  substitute  in  case  of  any  accident 
to  either  of  the  others.  Between  the  outside 
leather  flaps  and  the  horse's  body  there  should 
be  an  under  flap  of  flannel  or  cloth,  which 


Fig.  8.  —  Stokes'  mode  of  girthing  the  saddle. 

should  be  well  padded  on  the  side  next  the 
horse,  because,  when  tightly  girthed,  the  girth- 
buckles  press  directly  upon  the  outside  of  this 
flap,  and  if  its  padding  be  thin,  or  worn,  the 
animal  will  suffer  great  pain.  This  is  a  cause 
of  restlessness  which  is  seldom  noticed,  and 
many  a  horse  has  been  thought  to  be  bad  tem- 
pered when  he  was  only  wild  with  pain  from 


78  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

the  pressure  of  the  girth-buckles  against  his 
side. 

The  credit  of  introducing  a  new  method  of 
tightening  girths  belongs,  so  far  as  we  know,  to 
Mr.  Stokes,  formerly  a  riding-teacher  in  Cincin- 
nati. This  method  enables  one  to  girth  the 
horse  tightly,  without  using  so  much  muscular 
effort  as  is  usually  required,  so  that  by  its 
means,  a  lady  can,  if  she  wish,  saddle  her  own 
horse.  (Fig.  8.) 

The  following  is  a  description  of  Mr.  Stokes' 
manner  of  girthing :  At  the  end  of  each  of 
the  leather  girth  straps,  which  hang  down  be- 
tween the  flaps  on  the  off-side  of  the  saddle,  is 
fastened  a  strong  iron  buckle  without  any 
tongue,  but  with  a  thin  steel  roller  or  revolving 
cylinder  on  its  lower  edge.  On  the  near  side 
of  the  saddle  the  girths  are  strapped  in  the 
usual  manner,  but,  on  the  outer  end  of  each 
cloth  girth  there  is,  in  addition  to  an  ordinary 
buckle,  with  a  roller  on  the  upper  side  of  it,  a 
long  strap,  which  is  fastened  to  the  under  side 
of  the  girth,  the  buckle  being  on  the  upper  side. 
This  strap,  when  the  saddle  is  girthed,  is  passed 
up  through  the  tongueless  buckle,  moving  easily 
over  the  steel  roller,  and  is  then  brought  down 
to  the  buckle  with  tongue  on  the  end  of  the 
girth,  and  there  fastened  in  the  usual  manner. 


THE  SADDLE  AND  BRIDLE.  79 

The  slipper  stirrup,  when  first  introduced,  was 
a  great  favorite,  for  in  addition  to  furnishing  an 
excellent  support,  it  was  believed  that  it  would 
release  the  foot  instantly  should  the  rider  be 
thrown.  This  latter  merit,  however,  it  was 
found  that  it  did  not  possess,  as  many  severe 
accidents  occurred  where  this  stirrup  was  used, 
especially  with  the  two-pommeled  saddle.  In- 
stead of  releasing  the  rider  in  these  cases,  as  it 


Fig.  9.  —  Victoria  stirrup.  Fig.  10.  —  Spring-bar  for  stirrup 

leather. 

was  supposed  it  would,  the  stirrup  tilted  up  and 
held  her  foot  so  firmly  grasped  that  she  was 
dragged  some  distance  before  she  could  be  re- 
leased. This  stirrup,  therefore,  gradually  fell 
into  disfavor,  and  is  now  no  longer  used  by  the 
best  riders. 

There  are,  at  the  present  time,  three  kinds  of 
stirrups  which  are  favorites  among  finished  rid- 
ers. The  first  is  called  the  "  Victoria  "  because 


80 


THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 


it  is  the  one  used  by  the  Queen  of  England. 
(Fig.  9.)  In  this  stirrup  the  platform  on  which 
the  foot  rests  is  broad  and  comfortable,  and 
is  slightly  roughened  to  prevent  the  foot  from 
slipping.  A  spring-bar  attachment  (Fig.  10)  is 
placed  at  the  top  of  the  stirrup-leather  under 
the  saddle-flap,  and  at  the  end  of  this  bar  there 
is  a  spring,  so  that,  if  the  rider  be  thrown,  the 
stirrup-leather  becomes  instantly  detached  from 
the  saddle. 

The  second  variety  of  stirrup,  known  as  "  Len- 

nan's  safety  stirrup," 
has  all  the  merit  of 
the  preceding  one.  If 
kept  well  oiled  and 
free  from  mud,  it  will 
release  the  foot  at 
once,  when  an  acci- 
dent occurs.  It  may, 
if  desired,  be  accom- 

Fig.  11. -Lennan's  safety  stirrup.  panied  by  the  Spring- 
bar  attachment,  and  thus  rendered  doubly  se- 
cure. (Fig.  11.)  Some  people,  however,  dislike 
the  spring-bar  attachment,  and  prefer  to  rely 
entirely  upon  the  spring  of  the  stirrup  to  re- 
lease the  foot. 

The  third  stirrup,  called  "  Latchford's  safety 
stirrup,"  consists  of  a  stirrup  within  a  stirrup, 


THE  SADDLE  AND  BRIDLE.  81 

and  is  so  arranged  that,  when  a  rider  is  thrown, 

the     inner     stirrup     springs 

open  and  releases  the  foot. 

(Fig.    12.)     Either  of   these 

stirrups  can  be  procured  in 

London,   England,    or    from 

the    best    saddle-makers    in 

this  country. 

A  stirrup-iron  should  never 
be  made  of  cast  metal,  but  in- 
variably Of  the  best  Wrought  Fig.  12. -Latchford's  safety 

steel :  it  should  be  adapted  to  stirrup* 

the  size  of  the  rider's  foot,  and  should,  if  possible, 
have  an  instep  pad  at  the  top,  while  the  bottom 
platform,  upon  which  the  foot  rests,  should  be 
broad,  and  roughened  on  its  upper  surface. 

The  stirrup-leather  should  be  of  the  very 
best  material,  and  should  have  neither  fissures 
nor  cracks  in  any  part  of  it.  It  is  very  impor- 
tant to  examine  this  leather  frequently,  and  see 
that  it  is  neither  wearing  thin,  nor  breaking  at 
its  upper  part  at  the  bar,  nor  at  the  lower  part 
where  it  is  fastened  to  the  stirrup. 

A  novel  arrangement  of  the  stirrup-leather, 
by  means  of  the  so-called  "  balance- strap,"  has 
of  late  years  been  used  by  some  riders.  The 
stirrup  is,  in  this  case,  fastened  to  the  balance- 
strap,  which  consists  of  a  single  strap  passing  up 


82  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

through  the  ring-bar,  and  then  brought  down 
to  within  two  or  three  inches  of  the  lower  edge 
of  the  saddle-flap ;  here  it  is  passed  through  a 
slit  in  the  flap,  then  carried  under  the  horse  to 
the  other  side  and  buckled  to  another  strap, 
which  is  fastened,  for  this  purpose,  just  below 
the  off-pommel.  By  this  arrangement  the  sad- 
dle-flaps on  both  sides  are  held  down,  and  the 
rider,  without  dismounting,  can  change  the 
length  of  her  stirrup  by  merely  tightening  or 
loosening  this  strap.  Although  highly  recom- 
mended by  some  riders,  this  balance  strap  has 
one  objectionable  feature,  which  is  that,  as  the 
measurement  of  the  horse's  girth  is  not  con- 
stant during  a  long  ride,  it  will  be  necessary  to 
tighten  the  strap  frequently  in  order  to  keep 
the  stirrup  of  the  proper  length.  The  old  way 
of  fastening  is  much  better,  for  too  much  com- 
plication in  the  saddle  and  bridle  is  apt  to  annoy 
and  confuse  the  rider,  especially  if  a  novice. 
The  golden  rule  in  riding  on  horseback  is  to 
have  everything  accurate,  simple,  safe,  and 
made  of  the  very  best  material  that  can  be  pro- 
cured. 

The  bridle  should  be  neatly  and  plainly 
made,  with  no  large  rosettes  at  the  sides,  nor 
highly  colored  bands  across  the  forehead.  The 
reins  and  the  head-piece  should  never  be  made 


THE  SADDLE  AND  BRIDLE.  83 

of  rounded  straps,  but  always  of  flat  ones,  and 
should  be  of  the  best  and  strongest  leather,  es- 
pecially the  reins.  These  should  be  carefully 
examined  from  time  to  time,  in  order  to  be  sure 
that  there  are  no  imperfections  in  them.  Any 
roughness  or  hardness  is  an  indication  of  defec- 
tiveness,  and  may  be  detected  by  dexterously 
passing  the  fingers  to  and  fro  over  the  flat  sur- 
faces, which  should  be  smooth,  soft,  and  flexible. 
There  can  hardly  be  too  much  care  taken  about 
this  matter,  for  the  snapping  of  a  rein  always 
alarms  a  horse  ;  and,  feeling  himself  free  from 
all  control,  he  will  be  almost  certain  to  run 
away,  while  the  rider,  if  she  has  no  other  reins, 
will  be  powerless  to  protect  herself,  or  to  check 
him  in  his  purpose. 

Martingales  are  rarely  used  by  riders,  as 
they  are  troublesome,  and  can  very  well  be  dis- 
pensed with,  unless  the  horse  has  the  disagree- 
able trick  of  raising  his  head  suddenly,  from 
time  to  time,  when  a  martingale  will  become 
necessary  in  order  to  correct  this  fault.  The 
French  martingale  is  the  best.  This  consists  of 
a  single  strap,  fastened  either  to  the  under  part 
of  a  nose-band  at  its  centre  under  the  jaw,  or 
by  branches  to  each  side  of  the  snaffle-bit  at  the 
corners  of  the  horse's  mouth  and  then  carried 
between  the  fore-legs  and  fastened  to  the  girth, 


84  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

When  the  horse  raises  his  head  too  high  this 
strap  pulls  upon  the  nose  -  band,  compresses 
his  nostrils,  interferes  with  his  breathing,  arid 
causes  him  to  lower  his  head  promptly.  The 
horse  should  not  be  too  much  confined  by  the 
martingale,  for  the  object  is  simply  to  prevent 
him  from  lifting  his  head  too  high,  and  all  other 
ordinary  movements  should  be  left  free. 

Among  the  many  bits  which  have  been  used, 
that  known  as  the  "  Pel- 
ham "  has  been  highly 
praised,  although,  at  the 
present  time,  it  is  almost, 
if  not  entirely,  out  of  use. 
It  might,  however,  from 
the  severity  of  its  curb 
prove  of  service  in  con- 
trolling a  hard-mouthed 

horse,  although  such  a  one  should  never  be 
ridden  by  a  lady.  The  Chifney  bit  is  another 
very  severe  one,  and  is  very  useful  in  managing 
a  horse  that  pulls  hard.  But  if  the  animal  have 
a  tender  mouth,  this  bit  should  be  used  with 
great  caution,  and  not  at  all  by  an  inexperi- 
enced rider.  (Fig.  13.) 

The  bit  known  as  the  "  snaffle,"  when  made 
plain  and  not  twisted,  is  the  mildest  of  all  bits, 
and  some  horses  will  move  readily  only  when 


THE  SADDLE  AND  BRIDLE.  85 

this  is  used,  the  curb  instantly  rousing  their 
temper.  Others,  again,  do  best  with  a  combi- 
nation of  the  curb  and  the  snaffle,  and  although 
the  former  may  seldom  require  to  be  used,  its 
mere  presence  in  the  mouth  of  the  horse  will 
prove  a  sufficient  check  to  prevent  him  from 
running  away.  Most  horses,  however,  especially 
those  ridden  by  ladies,  require  a  light  use  of  the 
curb  to  bring  them  to  their  best  gait. 

The  bit  used  and  recommended  by  many,  but 
not  by  the  author,  is  a 
curb  so  arranged  as  to 
form  a  combination  bit  in 
one  piece.  It  consists  of 
a  curb  (Fig.  14),  to  each 
side  of  which,  at  the  an- 
gles of  the  horse's  mouth, 
a  ring  is  attached,  and  to 

i         />    ,  i  .  •      f      i     Fig.  14.  —  The  Combination  Bit. 

each  of  these  rings  is  last- 

a,  a,  rings  fastened  on  each   side 

o-norl    o    roin  ThlQ    QMVP<3   fl         to  small  bar,  at  right  angles  to  and 

eiiea   a   rein.          iniS   glVeb   d,        directed  backward  of  the  cheek; 
-i  •  f  •  j        b,  b.  rings  for  the  curb-reins. 

second  pair  01   reins  and 

converts  the  curb  into  a  kind  of  snaffle.  In 
this  way  it  answers  the  purpose  of  both  curb 
and  snaffle  without  crowding  the  horse's  mouth 
with  two  separate  bits. 

If  two  bits  should  be  used  —  the  curb  and 
bridoon  —  instead  of  the  above  combination  bit, 
the  bridoon  should  be  placed  in  the  horse's 


86 


THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 


mouth  in  such  a  way  as  not  to  interfere  with 
the  action  of  the  curb  ;  it  must,  therefore,  be 
neither  too  thick  nor  too  long,  and  so  fitted  into 
the  angles  of  the  mouth  as  to  neither  wrinkle 
nor  draw  back  the  lips. 

The  bit  should  always  be  made  of  the  best 
steel,  be  well  rounded,  and  perfectly  smooth. 
Above  all  it  should  be  accurately  fitted  to  the 
horse's  mouth  :  if  it  be  too  narrow  it  will  com- 
press his  lips  against  the  bars  of  his  mouth,  and 
the  pain  thereby  occasioned  will  render  him 
very  restive.  The  mouth-piece  should  be  just 
long  enough  to  have  the  cheeks  of  the  bit  fit 
closely  to  the  outer  surface  of  the  lips  with- 
out compressing  them,  and 
must  not  be  so  long  as  to 
become  displaced  obliquely 
when  a  rein  is  pulled. 

According  to  Major 
D  w  y  e  r  ,  who   is   a  high 
authority  on   the   subject 
of  bits,  —  and  whose  little 
Fig.  15.—  Dwyer's  Curb-Bit,     work  should  be  carefully 
i,  i,  upper  bars  or  cheeks  ;  2,  2,  studied  by  all  bit-makers, 

lower  bars  ;  3,  the  port  ;  4,  4,  the 

t0    b 


•ings;  9,  9,  head-stall  rings. 


bar  or  cheek  of  the  curb-bit  twice  as  long  as  the 
upper  one  ;   but,  as  there  is  no  standard  meas- 


THE  SADDLE  AND  BRIDLE.  87 

ure  for  the  upper  one  the  other  is  frequently 
made  too  long.  Major  Dwyer  states  that  the 
mouth  -  piece,  for  any  horse  of  ordinary  size, 
should  be  one  and  three  fourths  inches  for  the 
upper  bar,  and  three  and  a  half  inches  for  the 
lower  one.  This  makes  five  and  one  fourth 
inches  for  the  entire  length  of  the  two  bars, 
from  the  point  at  which  the  curb-hook  acts 
above  to  that  where  the  lower  ring  acts  below. 
(Fig.  15.)  For  ordinary  ponies  the  upper  bar 
may  be  one  and  a  half  inches,  and  the  lower 
one  three,  making  a  total  length  of  four  and  a 
half  inches. 

Every  lady  rider  should  know  that  the  longer 
the  lower  bar,  the  thinner  the  mouth-piece,  and 
the  higher  the  "port,"  the  more  severe  and 
painful  will  be  the  action  of  the  bit  upon  the 
horse's  mouth.  For  a  horse  of  ordinary  size, 
the  width  of  the  port  should  be  one  and  one 
third  inches  ;  for  a  pony,  one  inch.  The  height 
will  vary  according  to  the  degree  of  severity 
required. 

The  curb-chain,  for  a  horse  that  has  a  chin- 
groove  of  medium  size,  should  be  about  four 
fifths  of  an  inch  wide,  as  a  chain  that  is  rather 
broad  and  flat  is  less  painful  for  the  horse  than 
a  thin,  sharp  one.  If  the  chin-groove  be  very 
narrow,  a  curb-chain  of  less  width  will  have  to 


88  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

be  used,  and  should  be  covered  with  cloth ;  or, 
instead  of  a  chain,  a  narrow  strap  of  leather 
may  be  used,  which  should  be  kept  soft  and 
pliable.  The  proper  length  for  the  curb-chain, 
not  including  the  curb-hooks,  is  about  one  fourth 
more  than  the  width  of  the  animal's  mouth. 
The  hooks  should  be  exactly  alike,  and  about 
an  inch  and  a  quarter  long. 

Some  horses  are  very  expert  in  the  trick  of 
catching  the  cheek  of  the  bit  between  their 
teeth.  To  remedy  this  vice  a  lip-strap  may  be 
used  ;  but  it  will  be  found  much  better  to  have 
each  cheek  or  bar  bent  into  the  form  of  the  let- 
ter S,  remembering,  however,  that  the  measure- 
ment of  the  length,  referred  to  above,  must  in 
the  case  of  curved  bars  be  made  in  a  straight 
line.  Sometimes  the  upper  bar  of  the  curb-bit 
will,  on  account  of  the  peculiar  form  of  the 
horse's  head,  press  against  and  gall  his  cheeks. 
When  this  is  noticed,  most  people  change  the 
bit,  and  get  one  with  a  longer  mouth-piece ; 
but  where  the  mouth-piece  is  of  the  same 
length  as  the  width  of  the  mouth,  the  proper 
remedy  for  this  difficulty  will  be  to  have  the 
upper  bar  bent  out  enough  to  free  the  cheeks 
from  its  pressure. 

The  curb-bit  once  made  and  properly  ad- 
justed to  the  head-stall,  the  next  step  will  be  to 


THE  SADDLE  AND  BRIDLE.  89 

fit  it  accurately  to  the  horse's  mouth.  Every 
rider  should  thoroughly  understand  not  only 
how  to  do  this,  but  also  how  to  place  the  saddle 
correctly  upon  the  horse.  Upon  these  points 
nearly  all  grooms  require  instruction,  and  very 
few  gentlemen,  even,  know  how  to  arrange  a 
side-saddle  so  as  to  have  it  comfortable  for  both 
horse  and  rider.  Moreover,  should  the  lady  be 
riding  alone,  as  frequently  happens  in  the  coun- 
try, and  meet  with  any  accident  to  saddle  or 
bridle,  or  need  to  have  either  adjusted,  she 
would,  without  knowledge  on  these  subjects,  be 
completely  helpless,  whereas  with  it  she  could 
promptly  remedy  the  difficulty. 

In  order  to  adjust  the  bit  permanently  to  the 
head-stall,  so  that  afterwards  the  horse  can  al- 
ways be  properly  bridled,  one  must  proceed  as 
follows :  having  first  fitted  the  head-stall  to  the 
horse's  head  by  means  of  the  upper  buckles, 
the  bit  must  then  be  adjusted,  by  means  of  the 
lower  ones,  in  such  a  manner  that  the  canons 
of  the  mouth-piece  will  rest  on  the  bars  of  the 
horse's  mouth,  exactly  opposite  the  chin-groove. 
(Fig.  16.)  Should  the  tusks  of  the  horse  be  irreg- 
ularly placed,  the  mouth-piece  must  be  adjusted 
a  little  higher  than  the  projecting  tusks,  so  as 
to  just  avoid-  touching  them.  The  curb-chain 
may  now  be  hooked  into  the  ring  of  the  upper 


90 


THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 


bar  on  the  off-side,  leaving  one  link  loose,  after 
which  the  other  hook  must  be  fastened  to  the 
ring  of  the  bar  on  the  near-side,  leaving  two 
links  loose.  Care  should  be  taken  to  have  the 
curb-chain  rest  with  its  flat  surface  against  the 
chin-groove  in  such  a  way  that  it  will  have  no 


Fig.  16.  —  The  Bit  adjusted. 
1,  1,  snaffle-rein  ;  2,  2,  curb-rein. 

tendency  to  rise  up  when  the  reins  are  pulled 
upon.  The  curb-chain  should  never  be  tight ; 
there  must  always  be  room  enough  between  it 
and  the  chin  to  insert  the  first  and  second  fin- 
gers of  the  right  hand  flatwise  ;  and,  while  the 
fingers  are  thus  placed,  if  the  reins  are  drawn 


THE  SADDLE  AND  BRIDLE.  91 

up,  it  will  be  easy  to  ascertain  whether  the  chain 
pinches.  If,  when  the  reins  are  tightened,  the 
bit  stands  stiff  and  immovable,  it  will  show  that 
the  chain  is  too  short  and  needs  to  be  length- 
ened a  link  or  two.  If  the  horse  gently  yields 
his  head  to  the  tightening  of  the  reins,  without 
suddenly  drawing  back,  or  thrusting  out  his 
nose  as  the  tension  is  increased,  it  will  prove 
that  the  bit  is  correctly  placed.  But  if  the 
lower  bars  of  the  bit  can  be  drawn  back  quite 
a  distance  before  the  horse  will  yield  to  the  pull 
of  the  reins,  then  the  chain  is  too  long,  and 
should  be  shortened.  "  Lightness,  accuracy, 
easy  motion,  a  total  absence  of  stiffness,  con- 
straint, or  painful  action,  are  the  characteristics 
of  good  bitting ;  and  if  these  be  attained, 
ready  obedience  to  the  rider's  hand  will  be  the 
result."  —  F.  Dwyer. 

When  the  bit  has  once  been  correctly  ad- 
justed to  the  head -stall  and  to  the  horse's 
mouth,  there  will  be  little  difficulty  in  bridling 
him  upon  any  subsequent  occasion.  Thus : 
standing  at  the  left  of  the  horse's  head,  the 
head-stall,  held  by  its  upper  part  in  the  right 
hand,  should  be  lifted  up  in  front  of  the  horse's 
head,  while  the  left  hand,  holding  the  bit  by  its 
mouth-piece,  should  put  this  between  the  an- 
imal's lips,  press  it  against  his  teeth,  and  into  his 


92  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

mouth,  which  he  will  generally  open  a  little  in 
order  to  admit  it.  As  soon  as  this  has  been  ac- 
complished, the  upper  part  of  the  head-stall 
must  be  promptly  raised  so  as  to  bring  its  upper 
strap  or  band  across  the  forehead,  while  at  the 
same  time  the  horse's  ears  are  passed  between 
the  forehead  band  and  the  strap  which  forms 
the  upper  part  of  the  head-stall. 

During  these  manoeuvres,  the  curb  -  chain 
must  be  passed  under  the  chin,  so  as  to  rest 
against  the  chin-groove,  and  care  be  taken  to 
keep  the  fingers  of  the  left  hand  out  of  the 
horse's  mouth  while  the  mouth-piece  is  being 
put  in.  The  bit  and  head-stall  having  been 
properly  arranged,  the  whole  should  be  secured 
by  buckling  the  throat-strap  loosely  on  the  left 
side.  If  this  strap  be  buckled  tightly,  the  horse 
will  be  unable  to  bend  his  neck  properly.  The 
mouth-piece  of  the  bit  should  be  washed,  dried, 
and  then  rubbed  with  fresh  olive  or  cotton-seed 
oil,  each  time  after  use,  to  preserve  it  from  rust. 

Neither  a  rusted  bit  nor  a  very  cold  one 
should  ever  be  put  into  a  horse's  mouth.  In 
frosty  winter  weather  the  bit  should  always  be 
warmed.  Many  a  valuable  horse  has  had  his 
mouth  seriously  injured  by  having  an  icy  cold 
mouth-piece  put  into  it,  to  say  nothing  of  the 
pain  and  suffering  it  must  invariably  occasion. 


THE  SADDLE  AND  BRIDLE.  93 

In  order  to  produce  a  neat  and  pleasing  ap- 
pearance, there  should  be  no  unsightly  ends  or 
straps  left  dangling  from  the  loops  of  the  head- 
stall. They  should  be  so  snugly  fitted  into 
their  places  that  they  cannot  work  out  of  their 
loops. 

The  forehead  band  should  never  be  too  tight 
for  the  horse's  comfort,  and  the  small  rosettes 
that  lie  over  his  temples  should  be  well  oiled 
underneath  and  kept  soft. 

A  side-saddle  may  be  made  accurately  accord- 
ing to  all  recognized  rules,  and  yet  lose  nearly 
all  its  good  effects  by  being  improperly  put 
on ;  the  rider  will  be  made  uncomfortable,  the 
horse's  back  will  be  injured,  and  the  saddle  will 
eventually  have  its  padding  so  compressed  in 
the  wrong  direction  that  it  will  be  impossible  to 
put  it  on  in  the  right  way. 

Every  lady  rider  should  know  as  well  how  to 
have  her  saddle  properly  adjusted  as  how  to  sit 
her  horse  or  manage  the  reins.  On  a  well- 
formed  horse,  with  rather  high  withers  and 
sloping  shoulders,  the  centre  of  the  saddle 
should  be  placed  over  the  middle  of  the  back, 
and  be  so  arranged  that  the  front  part  of  the 
saddle-tree  shall  be  a  very  short  distance  back 
of  the  horse's  shoulder-blade,  for  if  allowed  to 
rest  upon  the  shoulder-blade  it  will  interfere 


94  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

very  much  with  the  action  of  the  shoulder  mus- 
cles. It  is  a  common  fault  of  grooms  to  place 
the  saddle  a  little  sideways,  and  too  far  forward 
on  the  withers.  The  well-taught  rider  can, 
however,  easily  decide  whether  the  saddle  is  in 
the  right  position  :  standing  on  the  off-side  of 
the  horse,  she  must  pass  her  right  hand  under 
the  arch  of  the  saddle-tree,  which  should  be  di- 
rectly over  the  withers,  and  see  whether  it  sits 
perfectly  even,  bearing  no  more  to  one  side  than 
to  the  other  ;  then  stepping  behind  the  horse, 
but  at  a  safe  distance  from  his  heels,  she  can 
see  whether  the  long  central  furrow  of  the 
under  surface  of  the  saddle-seat  from  front  to 
rear  (chamber)  is  in  a  direct  line  with  the  an- 
imal's backbone,  and  forms  an  open  space  over 
it.  If  these  conditions  are  fulfilled,  the  saddle 
is  properly  adjusted.  If  the  horse  have  rather 
straight  shoulders,  together  with  a  plump,  round 
body,  the  saddle  will  require  to  be  placed  rather 
farther  forward,  but  with  the  chamber  still  in  a 
line  with  the  backbone.  On  some  horses  of 
this  shape,  the  saddle,  to  be  held  securely,  will 
need  to  be  set  so  far  forward  that  the  girths 
will  have  to  pass  close  to  the  fore-legs.  A 
horse  of  this  description  is  not  suitable  for  the 
side-saddle,  but  as  ladies  in  the  country  and  in 
the  far  West  are  sometimes  obliged  to  ride  such, 


THE  SADDLE  AND  BRIDLE.  95 

it  is  very  important  for  their  safety  to  know 
how  these  ill-formed  animals  should  be  saddled, 
because  should  the  saddle  be  put  too  far  back  on 
such  horses,  it  will  be  sure  to  turn. 

It  not  infrequently  happens  that  after  the 
saddle  has  been  placed  in  the  correct  position, 
it  becomes  slightly  displaced  while  being  fast- 
ened. To  avoid  this,  it  should  always  be 
girthed  on  the  off-side,  and  great  care  be  taken, 
when  fastening  the  girths,  especially  the  first 
one,  that  the  saddle  be  not  jerked  over  to  the 
left ;  and  that  in  pulling  upon  the  short  strap 
on  the  off-side,  to  which  the  girth  is  to  be 
buckled,  the  saddle  be  not  forced  to  the  right. 

When  girthing  the  saddle,  the  lady  may 
place  her  left  hand  on  the  middle  of  the  seat 
and  hold  it  steady  while  she  arranges  the  first 
girth,  and  with  her  right  hand  draws  it  as 
tightly  as  she  can,  without  using  violent  exer- 
tion, or  making  any  sudden  jerk  ;  she  will  then 
be  able,  with  both  hands,  to  tighten  the  girth 
as  much  as  is  necessary,  doing  this  with  an  even, 
regular  pull,  so  that  the  saddle  will  not  be 
moved  out  of  place.  Before  fastening  the  other 
girths,  she  should  step  behind  the  horse  and  as- 
sure herself  that  the  chamber  is  in  a  line  with 
the  horse's  backbone,  as  before  described.  If 
it  is  not,  she  must  loosen  the  girth,  and,  after 


96  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

straightening  the  saddle,  proceed  as  before. 
The  girth  to  be  first  fastened  is  the  one  nearest 
the  horse's  fore-legs ;  the  second  girth  is  the  one 
back  of  the  first,  and  should  be  placed  evenly 
over  the  first  one  and  fastened  equally  tight; 
the  third  is  the  leather  girth  which  is  intended 
to  keep  down  the  saddle-flaps ;  this  must  be 
placed  evenly  over  the  other  two,  but  it  is  not 
essential  to  have  it  drawn  so  tight  as  they,  but 
just  enough  so  to  hold  the  flaps.  Most  horses 
have  a  trick,  when  they  are  being  girthed,  of 
expanding  their  sides  and  abdomen,  for  the  pur- 
pose of  securing  a  loose  girthing ;  and  girths 
that  seem  almost  too  tight  when  they  are  first 
buckled  are  often  found  to  be  too  loose  after 
the  rider  has  mounted.  Too  tight  a  girth  is  in- 
jurious to  the  horse,  but  too  loose  a  one  may 
cause  the  saddle  to  turn.  A  round,  plump  horse 
with  low  withers  will  need  tighter  girthing  than 
a  better  shaped  one.  The  lady  rider  should 
study  the  shape  of  her  horse,  and  use  her  own 
judgment  as  to  how  tight  the  girths  should  be 
drawn,  making  due  allowance  for  the  trick  al- 
luded to  above.  If  there  is  any  second  person 
present  while  the  saddle  is  being  arranged,  mat- 
ters may  be  facilitated  if  this  person  will  hold 
the  saddle  firmly  by  the  off-pommel  while  the 
girthing  is  being  done. 


THE  SADDLE  AND  BRIDLE.  97 

The  author  has  been  thus  particular  in  de- 
scribing the  bit  and  saddle  with  their  proper 
arrangement,  as  well  as  the  girthing  of  the 
horse,  because  so  few  lady  riders  bestow  any  at- 
tention upon  these  very  important  matters ;  and 
yet,  if  one  desires  to  ride  safely  and  well,  a 
knowledge  of  them  is  positively  necessary. 
Grooms  cannot  always  be  depended  upon,  and, 
indeed,  seldom  know  much  about  the  side-sad- 
dle ;  there  is  an  adage  which  is  applicable  to 
many  of  them  :  "  Too  much  must  not  be  ex- 
pected from  the  head  of  him  who  labors  only 
with  his  hands."  In  the  instructions  given  by 
gentlemen  writers,  useful  as  they  may  be  in 
many  respects,  there  is  usually  a  good  deal  of 
practical  information  omitted  which  a  lady  rider 
ought  to  know,  but  the  necessity  of  which  it  is 
perhaps  impossible  for  a  gentleman  fully  to  ap- 
preciate or  understand ;  this  knowledge  the 
lady  will  have  to  gain  either  from  her  own  ex- 
perience or  from  one  of  her  own  sex  who  has 
studied  the  subject  carefully. 

In  preparing  for  horseback  riding,  nothing 
should  be  omitted  that  can  give  greater  security 
to  the  rider,  or  protect  her  more  completely 
from  accident  of  any  sort.  Every  article  should 
be  of  the  very  best  material,  so  that  a  breakage 


98  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

or  casualty  of  any  kind  may  be  only  a  remote 
possibility.  The  knowledge  that  everything  is 
right,  and  firmly  and  properly  placed,  creates  a 
confidence  which  adds  greatly  to  the  pleasure 
of  the  ride. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

MOUNTING  AND   DISMOUNTING. 

"  •  Stand,  Bayard,  stand  ! '  —  the  steed  obeyed, 
With  arching  neck  and  bending  head, 
And  glancing  eye  and  quivering  ear, 
As  if  he  loved  her  voice  to  hear." 

Lady  of  the  Lake. 

A  NOVICE  in  riding  always  experiences  in  a 
greater  or  less  degree,  a  sense  of  trepidation  and 
embarrassment  when,  for  the  first  time,  a  horse 
duly  caparisoned  for  a  lady  rider  is  put  before 
her,  and  she  is  expected  to  seat  herself  in  the 
saddle.  If  she  be  a  timid  person,  the  apparent 
difficulty  of  this  feat  occasions  a  dismay  which 
the  good-natured  champing  of  the  bit  and  im- 
patient head  shakings  of  the  horse  do  not  tend 
to  diminish.  If,  however,  she  be  accustomed  to 
horses  as  pets,  and  understand  their  ways,  she 
will  be  much  less  apprehensive  about  mounting 
than  the  lady  who  has  only  observed  them  at  a 
distance  and  is  entirely  ignorant  of  their  nature. 
The  author  has  known  ladies,  after  their  horses 
had  been  brought  to  the  door,  to  send  them 
back  to  the  stable  because  courage  failed  them 


100          THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

when  it  became  necessary  to  trust  themselves 
on  the  back  of  an  animal  of  which  they  knew 
nothing.  To  overcome  this  timidity  the  lady 
must  become  better  acquainted  with  her  horse, 
and,  to  do  so,  should  visit  him  occasionally  in 
his  stable,  feed  him  with  choice  morsels,  and 
lead  him  about  the  yard  from  time  to  time.  By 
these  means  a  mutual  friendship  and  confidence 
will  be  created,  and  the  lady  will  gradually  gain 
enough  courage  to  place  herself  in  the  saddle. 

The  first  attempt  at  mounting  should  be  made 
from  a  high  horse-block  with  some  one  to  hold 
the  head  of  the  horse  and  keep  him  still.  Turn- 
ing her  right  side  somewhat  toward  the  horse's 
left,  and  slightly  raising  the  skirt  of  her  riding 
habit,  the  lady  should  spring  from  her  left  foot 
towards  the  saddle,  at  the  same  time  raising  her 
right  leg  so  that  it  will  pass  directly  over  the 
second  and  third  pommels.  This  accomplished, 
the  left  foot  may  be  placed  in  the  stirrup. 

Another  method  of  mounting  from  a  rather 
high  horse-block,  when  the  pommels  are  high,  is 
for  the  lady  to  face  the  horse's  left  side,  and, 
seizing  the  off-pommel  with  the  right  hand  and 
the  second  one  with  the  left,  to  spring  towards 
the  saddle  from  her  left  foot,  and  seat  herself 
sidewise.  She  can  then  turn  her  body  so  as  to 
face  the  horse's  head,  place  her  right  leg  over 


MOUNTING  AND  DISMOUNTING.          101 

the  second  pommel,  —  adjusting  her  skirt  at  the 
same  time,  —  and  slip  her  left  foot  into  the  stir- 
rup and  her  left  knee  under  the  third  pommel. 

Should  the  horse-block  be  low  and  the  lady 
short,  she  will  be  obliged  to  mount  somewhat 
after  a  man's  fashion,  thus :  Placing  her  left 
foot  in  the  stirrup,  and  grasping  the  second 
pommel  with  her  left  hand,  she  should  spring 
from  her  right  foot,  and,  as  she  rises,  grasp  the 
off-pommel  with  her  right  hand ;  by  means  of 
this  spring,  aided  by  the  pommels  and  stirrup, 
she  can  seat  herself  sideways  in  the  saddle,  turn- 
ing her  body  for  this  purpose  just  before  gain- 
ing the  seat.  In  the  absence  of  a  horse-block, 
from  which  to  mount,  the  assistance  of  a  chair 
or  stool  should  never  be  resorted  to  unless  there 
is  some  one  to  hold  it  firm  and  steady. 

When  the  rider  is  obliged  to  mount  without 
assistance  and  from  the  ground,  if  the  balance- 
strap,  before  referred  to,  be  used  with  her  stir- 
rup, she  can  let  this  strap  down  far  enough  to 
enable  her  to  put  her  foot  in  the  stirrup  easily, 
and  to  use  it  as  a  sort  of  stepping-stone  by 
means  of  which,  and  a  spring  from  her  right 
foot,  she  can  reach  the  saddle  sideways.  In  do- 
ing this  she  must  grasp  the  second  pommel 
firmly  with  her  left  hand,  in  which  she  also 
should  hold  her  whip  and  the  reins ;  on  rising 


102          THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

she  must  aid  herself  by  grasping  with  the  right 
hand  the  off-pommel  as  soon  as  she  can  reach  it. 
When  she  is  seated,  the  stirrup  can  be  adjusted 
from  the  off-side  by  means  of  the  balance-strap. 

If,  however,  she  uses  the  old-fashioned  stir- 
rup-leather, and  there  is  no  assistance  of  any 
kind  at  hand,  neither  horse-block,  chair,  nor 
stool,  not  even  a  fence  or  steep  bank  from  which 
to  mount,  —  a  situation  in  which  a  rider  might 
possibly  be  placed,  —  then  reaching  the  saddle 
becomes  a  very  puzzling  affair,  unless  the  lady 
be  so  active  that  she  can  spring  from  the  ground 
to  her  saddle.  To  try  the  plan  of  lengthening 
the  stirrup-leather  will  be  dangerous,  because, 
in  order  to  readjust  it  after  mounting,  she  will 
*  have  to  sit  on  the  back  part  of  the  saddle,  bend 
over  the  horse's  left  side,  and  pull  up  the  stirrup- 
leather  in  order  to  shorten  and  buckle  it;  while 
in  this  position,  if  the  horse  should  start,  she 
would  probably  be  thrown  instantly.  Her 
safest  course  would  be  to  lead  the  horse  until  a 
place  is  found  where  she  can  mount.  If  she 
should  have  to  use  a  fence  for  this  purpose  let 
her  be  sure  that  the  posts  are  firmly  fixed  in 
the  ground,  and  that  the  boards  are  neither 
loose  nor  easily  broken. 

When  mounting,  the  whip  and  reins  should 
be  held  in  the  left  hand,  the  former  with  the 


MOUNTING  AND  DISMOUNTING.  103 

point  down,  so  that  it  ;may  not  hit  the  horse, 
and  the  latter  grasped  just  tightly  enough  to 
feel  the  horse's  mouth  without  pulling  on  it. 
In  order  to  arrange  the  folds  of  the  riding  skirt 
after  mounting,  the  reins  and  whip  must  be 
transferred  to  the  right  hand ;  then,  resting 
this  hand  upon  the  off-pommel,  the  rider  should 
raise  herself  free  from  the  saddle  by  straighten- 
ing her  left  knee  and  standing  on  the  stirrup, 
also  aiding  herself  by  means  of  the  right  hand 
on  the  pommel.  While  thus  standing  she  can 
quickly  arrange  the  skirt  with  her  left  hand. 

None  of  the  methods  of  mounting  just  de- 
scribed —  with  the  exception  of  the  first  one  — 
are  at  all  graceful,  and  they  should  never  be 
used  except  in  case  of  absolute  necessity.  The 
most  graceful  way  for  a  lady  to  reach  the  sad- 
dle, and  the  one  that  is  taught  in  the  best  riding 
schools,  is  by  the  assistance  of  a  gentleman. 
The  rider's  education  will  not  be  complete  until 
she  has  learned  this  method  of  mounting,  which, 
when  accomplished  easily  and  gracefully,  is  de- 
lightful to  witness.  It  should  be  learned  after 
the  preliminary  lessons  at  the  horse-block  have 
been  taken.  In  using  this  simple  manner  of 
reaching  the  saddle,  the  rider  will  have  three 
distinct  points  of  support,  namely,  the  shoulder 
of  the  gentleman  who  assists  her,  the  united 


104 


THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 


palms  of  his  hands,  and  her  own  hold  upon  the 
pommel. 


Fig.  17.  —  Lady  ready  to  mount  her  horse. 

The  stirrup  having  been  placed  across  the 
shield  of  the  saddle  in  front  of  the  pommels, 
the  lady,  holding  the  reins  and  the  whip  with 
its  point  down  in  her  right  hand,  —  which 
must  rest  upon  the  second  pommel,  —  should 
stand  with  her  right  side  toward  the  horse's 
left,  about  four  or  five  inches  from  it,  her  left 
shoulder  being  slightly  turned  back.  Then, 
taking  a  firm  hold  upon  the  second  pommel 


MOUNTING  AND  DISMOUNTING.  105 

with  her  right  hand,  she  should  with  the  left 
lift  her  riding  skirt  enough  to  enable  her  to 
place  her  left  foot  fairly  and  squarely  into  the 
gentleman's  palms,  which  should  be  clasped 
firmly  together.  This  done,  she  should  drop 
the  skirt,  place  her  left  hand  upon  his  right 
shoulder,  bend  her  knee,  or  give  the  word 
"ready,"  as  a  signal,  and  at  once  spring  from 
her  right  foot  up  and  a  little  towards  the  horse. 
The  gentleman,  at  the  same  moment,  must  raise 
his  hands,  and  move  them  toward  the  horse. 
The  lady  must,  when  rising,  press  or  bear  lightly 
upon  his  shoulder,  and  also  keep  a  firm  hold 
upon  the  second  pommel,  which  she  must  not 
relinquish  until  she  is  seated.  If  correctly  per- 
formed, this  manoeuvre  will  place  the  rider  in 
the  saddle  sideways.  The  gentleman  should 
then  remove  the  stirrup  from  the  front  of  the 
saddle,  while  the  lady  transfers  the  reins  to  her 
left  hand,  passes  her  right  knee  over  the  second 
pommel  and  her  left  under  the  third.  She  will 
then  be  ready  to  have  her  foot  placed  in  the 
stirrup.  (Fig.  17.) 

It  will,  however,  be  found  very  difficult  to 
mount  in  this  manner,  gracefully,  unless  the 
gentleman  who  assists  thoroughly  understands 
his  duties ;  should  he  be  awkward  about  help- 
ing her,  the  lady  will  find  it  much  better  to 


106  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

depend  upon  the  horse-block.  If,  for  instance, 
he  should  raise  his  hands  too  high,  or  with  too 
much  energy,  when  she  makes  her  spring,  he 
may  push  her  too  far  over,  or  even  —  if  she 
should  loosen  her  grasp  of  the  second  pommel, 
—  cause  her  to  fall  from  the  off-side  of  the 
horse.  This  is  a  dangerous  accident,  and  al- 
most certain  to  occasion  severe  injuries.  On 
the  other  hand,  if  he  does  not  use  energy 
enough,  or  neglects  to  carry  his  hands  toward 
the  body  of  the  horse  as  the  lady  rises,  she  may 
not  reach  the  saddle  at  all,  and  will  be  apt  to 
fall  to  the  ground  on  the  left  side  of  the  horse, 
especially  if  she  relinquishes  her  hold  on  the 
second  pommel.  The  gentleman  must  also  be 
careful  not  to  let  his  foot  rest  on  the  lady's  skirt, 
as  this  will  pull  her  back,  and  perhaps  tear  the 
dress,  as  she  makes  her  spring.  « 

In  assisting  a  lady  to  mount,  the  gentleman 
should  first  arrange  the  snaffle-reins  evenly  and 
of  the  proper  length,  and  place  them  in  her 
right  hand,  leaving  the  curb-reins  to  lie  loosely 
on  the  neck  of  the  horse.  Then,  after  putting 
the  stirrup  out  of  the  way,  as  described  above, 
he  should  take  a  position  facing  her,  with  his 
left  shoulder  toward  the  left  shoulder  of  the 
horse.  Clasping  his  hands  together  with  the 
palms  turned  up,  he  should  stoop  sufficiently  to 


MOUNTING  AND  DISMOUNTING.  107 

enable  her  to  put  her  left  foot  upon  them,  and, 
in  raising  them  as  she  springs,  he  must  grad- 
ually assume  the  erect  posture.  When  the  lady 
is  seated,  he  should  return  the  stirrup  to  its 
proper  position  and  place  her  foot  in  it,  after 
first,  with  his  left  hand,  adjusting  her  skirt  so 
that  it  will  fall  evenly ;  he  should  then  place 
the  curb-reins  in  her  left  hand,  with  the  others. 
No  gentleman  is  a  finished  equestrian,  nor  a  de- 
sirable companion  for  a  lady  on  horseback,  who 
does  not  know  how  to  assist  her  dexterously 
and  gracefully  to  mount  and  dismount. 

A  lady  who  is  not  very  nimble  in  her  move- 
ments, or  who  is  very  heavy,  should  be  ex- 
tremely careful  in  mounting  not  to  accept  as- 
sistance from  a  gentleman  who  is  not  strong 
enough  to  support  her  weight  easily  and  firmly. 
It  will  be  much  better  for  her  to  use  a  horse- 
block or  something  of  the  kind.  But  if  she  does 
accept  the  aid  of  a  gentleman,  the  following 
changes  in  the  methods  described  above  have 
been  recommended  :  instead  of  facing  her,  he 
should  stand  close  to  her  side,  with  his  face 
turned  in  the  same  direction  as  hers :  she  should 
then  place  her  left  foot  in  his  united  hands,  and 
in  order  to  do  so  must  pass  her  left  leg  between 
his  right  arm  and  his  body.  He  will  thus  be 
enabled  to  support  and  lift  her  with  greater 


108  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

ease,  and,  as  she  rises,  her  left  leg  will  readily 
escape  from,  under  his  right  arm,  and  she  will 
be  able  to  seat  herself  sideways  in  the  saddle,  as 
by  the  former  method.  During  this  manoeuvre 
she  must  sustain  herself  by  the  second  pommel, 
as  in  the  preceding  instance. 

If  a  horse  is  restless  and  uneasy  when  being 
mounted,  he  should  be  held  by  a  third  person, 
who  must  stand  in  front  of  his  head  and  take 
a  firm  hold  of  the  curb-bit  on  each  side,  but 
without  touching  the  reins,  which  should  always 
be  held  and  managed  by  the  rider  only.  It  is 
always  a  better  plan,  when  mounting,  to  have 
the  horse  held,  although  a  well-trained  horse 
will  stand  quietly  without  such  control. 

Mounting  is  a  part  of  the  rider's  education 
which  should  be  carefully  studied  and  practiced, 
for  when  properly  and  gracefully  accomplished 
it  is  the  very  poetry  of  motion,  and  will  enable 
her  to  display  more  pliancy  and  lightness  than 
she  can  even  in  the  ball-room.  There  is  an- 
other branch  of  the  rider's  education  which 
also  requires  careful  study,  as  it  is  rarely  accom- 
plished satisfactorily,  and  is  apt  to  occasion  as 
much  embarrassment  and  dismay  to  a  beginner 
as  mounting.  This  is  dismounting.  To  alight 
from  a  horse  easily  and  well,  without  disarrang- 
ing the  dress,  and  without  being  awkwardly 


MOUNTING  AND  DISMOUNTING.          109 

precipitated  into  the  arms  of  the  gentleman 
who  assists,  is  by  no  means  an  easy  task,  and 
very  few  lady  riders  accomplish  it  with  skill  and 
address. 

When  assisting  his  companion  from  the  sad- 
dle, the  gentleman  should  stand  about  a  foot 
from  her  with  his  face  toward  the  horse,  while 
she,  after  taking  her  foot  from  the  stirrup  and 
disengaging  her  right  leg  from  the  pommel, 
must  turn  her  body  so  as  to  face  him.  After 
putting  the  stirrup  over  the  shield  of  the  saddle, 
as  in  mounting,  he  should  then  extend  his  hands 
so  as  to  support  her  by  the  elbows,  while  she 
rests  a  hand  upon  each  of  his  shoulders.  Then, 
by  giving  a  gentle  spring,  she  will  glide  lightly 
to  the  ground,  he  meanwhile  supporting  her 
with  his  hands,  and,  as  she  descends,  bending 
his  body,  and  moving  his  right  side  slightly 
backward.  She  can  also  assist  him  to  lessen 
the  shock  as  she  touches  the  ground  by  bending 
her  knees  a  little,  as  if  courtesying. 

Another  way  of  assisting  the  lady,  especially 
if  she  be  rather  stout  and  not  very  active,  is 
for  the  gentleman  to  clasp  her  waist  with  both 
hands,  instead  of  holding  her  by  the  elbows. 
He  should,  in  this  case,  stand  as  far  from  her  as 
he  can  while  still  supporting  her,  and,  as  she 
descends,  should  make  a  step  backward  with  his 


110 


THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 


right  foot,  and  turn  a  little  away  from  the  horse, 
which  should  be  held  by  a  third  person,  in  the 
manner  described  before,  in  mounting. 


Fig.  18.  —  Lady  ready  to  dismount. 

Another,  and  more  graceful  way  of  dismount- 
ing is  the  following:  The  gentleman,  standing 
about  a  foot  from  his  companion  and  directly 
facing  her,  takes  in  his  left  hand  her  bridle,  — 
as  near  as  he  can  to  the  horse's  mouth,  that  he 
may  hold  him  as  firmly  and  securely  as  possible, 
—  the  lady  now  drops  the  reins  on  the  horse's 
neck,  disengages  her  foot  from  the  stirrup,  and 


MOUNTING  AND  DISMOUNTING.          Ill 

her  leg  from  the  second  pommel,  and  then  seats 
herself  sideways  in  the  saddle,  so  as  to  face  her 
assistant,  who  now  places  the  stirrup  on  the 
front  of  the  saddle  with  his  right  hand  ;  he  then 
offers  his  right  shoulder  to  the  lady  for  her  sup- 
port. She,  after  gathering  up  in 'her  left  hand 
a  few  folds  of  her  riding  skirt,  in  order  to  have 
her  feet  free  when  she  alights,  places  upon  his 
shoulder  the  hand  which  holds  the  skirt,  and 
with  the  other,  in  which  she  holds  her  whip 
point  downward,  grasps  the  second  pommel  and 
springs  lightly  from  the  saddle,  the  gentleman 
bending  over  a  little  as  she  descends.  On  reach- 
ing the  ground,  she  should,  as  before  described, 
bend  her  knees  slightly  to  lessen  the  shock  of 
the  descent.  (Fig.  18.) 

In  all  these  modes  of  dismounting,  the  lady, 
before  attempting  to  alight,  should  be  sure  that 
her  skirt  is  quite  free  from  the  pommels,  espe- 
cially from  the  second  one,  and  that  it  is  so  ad- 
justed that  it  will  not  be  trodden  upon  when  she 
reaches  the  ground,  but  will  fall  evenly  about 
her,  without  being  in  any  way  disarranged. 

It  happens  not  infrequently  that  a  lady  is 
obliged  to  dismount  without  any  one  to  assist 
her,  and  in  this  case  she  should  ride  up  to  a 
horse-block  so  as  to  bring  the  left  side  of  her 
horse  close  to  it,  let  the  curb  reins  fall  upon  his 


112  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

neck,  retaining,  however,  the  whip  and  snaffle- 
reins  in  her  left  hand,  and  then,  removing  her 
foot  from  the  stirrup  and  her  right  leg  from 
the  pommel,  she  should  seat  herself  a  little  side- 
ways upon  the  saddle.  Now,  with  a  slight  turn 
of  her  shoulders  to  the  right,  she  should  place 
her  left  hand  —  still  holding  the  whip  and 
reins  —  upon  the  second  pommel,  and  her  right 
hand  upon  the  off  one,  and  thus  alight  sideways 
with  her  face  toward  the  horse's  head.  In  ef- 
fecting this  manoeuvre,  she  must  be  careful  to 
retain  her  hold  upon  the  snaffle-reins  and  also 
upon  the  second  pommel  until  she  is  safe  upon 
the  horse-block ;  she  must  also  remember  the 
caution  given  before,  in  regard  to  having  her 
skirts  free  from  the  pommels. 

To  dismount  upon  the  ground,  or  upon  a 
very  low  horse-block,  without  assistance,  is  a 
difficult  feat  to  execute  gracefully,  but  some 
young  ladies  in  the  country,  who  are  active  and 
light,  accomplish  it  so  easily  and  quickly  that 
they  do  not  appear  awkward.  The  manner  in 
which  this  is  to  be  done  is  nearly  the  same  as 
that  just  explained,  the  only  difference  being, 
that  the  gliding  down  must  be  effected  quickly 
and  lightly,  and  the  rider,  as  she  passes  down, 
must  release  her  hold  upon  the  off-pommel,  but 
retain  that  upon  the  second,  also  taking  care  to 


MOUNTING  AND  DISMOUNTING.  113 

have  the  reins  quite  loose.  This  mode  of  alight- 
ing is,  however,  entirely  out  of  place  except  in 
the  country,  where  assistance  cannot  always  be 
had  readily,  or  in  cases  where  the  lady  is  obliged 
to  dismount  very  quickly. 

If  the  lady  rider,  after  carefully  studying 
these  different  methods  of  mounting  and  dis- 
mounting with  assistance,  will  select  the  one 
she  thinks  suits  her  best,  and  then  practice  it  a 
few  times  with  her  gentleman  escort,  she  will 
soon  find  herself  able  to  perform  with  ease  these 
apparently  difficult  feats,  and  will  have  no  need 
of  resorting  to  a  horse-block,  nor  to  some  se- 
cluded spot,  where  she  can  mount  or  dismount 
unobserved.  A  lady  once  told  the  author  that 
the  pleasure  of  her  daily  ride  was  at  one  time 
almost  spoiled  by  the  knowledge  that  she  must 
mount  and  dismount  in  front  of  a  hotel,  the 
piazza  of  which  was  always  crowded  with  ob- 
servers, for,  not  having  been  properly  taught  to 
execute  these  manoeuvres,  she  was  rather  awk- 
ward at  them.  She,  however,  placed  herself 
under  correct  tuition,  and  soon  overcame  the 
difficulty.  She  can  now  execute  these  move- 
ments with  such  grace  and  elegance  as  to  fasci- 
nate gentlemen,  and  excite  the  envy  of  rival 
belles  who  are  still  obliged  to  seek  the  aid  of  a 
horse-block. 

8 


CHAPTER  V. 

THE    SEAT    ON   HORSEBACK. 

"  Bounded  the  fiery  steed  in  air, 
The  rider  sat  erect  and  fair, 
Then  like  a  bolt  from  steel  cross-bow 
Forth  launched,  along  the  plain  they  go." 

Lady  of  the  Lake. 

A  CORRECT  seat  is  very  seldom  attained  by 
the  self-taught  lady  rider,  for  her  attitude  on 
the  horse  is  so  artificial  that  she  cannot,  like  the 
gentleman  rider,  whose  seat  is  more  easy  and 
natural,  fall  directly  into  the  proper  position. 
Competent  instruction  alone  can  enable  her  to 
gain  the  safe  and  easy  posture  which  will  give 
the  least  possible  fatigue  to  herself  and  to  her 
horse.  It  is  true  that  a  natural  rider,  or  she 
who  professes  to  ride  instinctively,  may  to-day 
accidentally  assume  the  proper  position  in  the 
saddle,  but,  as  she  has  no  rule  by  which  to  guide 
herself,  and  is  entirely  unacquainted  with  the 
"  whys  and  wherefores  "  of  a  correct  seat,  she 
will  to-morrow  assume  the  incorrect  position,  so 
natural  to  a  self-taught  rider,  and  the  pleasant 
ride  of  to-day  will  be  followed  by  a  rough  and 


THE  SEAT  ON  HORSEBACK.  115 

unpleasant  one  to-morrow.  On  the  one  occa- 
sion, the  poor  horse  will  receive  much  praise  for 
his  easy  motion,  and  on  the  next  be  highly  cen- 
sured for  the  roughness  of  his  gait,  for  the  lady 
will  not  suspect  that  the  real  difficulty  lies  in 
her  own  ignorance  of  a  correct  attitude,  and  in 
her  bad  management  of  the  poor  beast. 

Upon  the  position  of  the  upper  part  of  the 
body  depends  not  only  grace  and  pliancy,  and 
that  harmony  between  horse  and  rider  which  is 
so  highly  desirable  and,  indeed,  necessary,  but 
also  the  ability  to  manage  the  reins  properly; 
for,  if  the  rider  be  not  well  balanced,  her  hands 
will  be  unsteady,  and  seldom  in  the  right  posi- 
tion for  controlling  the  animal. 

But  the  proper  position  of  the  body  above 
the  saddle  depends  upon  the  correct  arrange- 
ment of  the  lower  limbs  ;  if  they  are  not  in  the 
right  position,  the  rider  will  lean  too  far  for- 
ward, or  too  far  back,  or  too  much  to  one  side 
or  the  other.  She  will  also  lose  all  firmness  of 
seat,  and,  consequently,  all  safety  in  riding. 
This  faulty  position  of  the  lower  limbs  has  been, 
and  still  is,  the  occasion  of  much  incorrect  rid- 
ing, but  is  a  point  which  is  seldom  regarded  by 
the  gentleman  teacher.  He,  indeed,  cannot 
possibly  know  how  the  legs  are  arranged,  when 
they  are  covered  by  the  riding  skirt,  and  prob- 


116  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

ably  seldom  gives  the  subject  any  thought ;  yet 
he  wonders,  after  carefully  watching  and  cor- 
recting the  position  of  the  body,  why  his  pupil 
does  not  retain  the  erect  position  as  directed. 
A  lady  teacher  of  experience  is,  therefore,  much 
to  be  preferred  to  a  gentleman,  unless  the  lady 
pupil  is  willing  to  wear,  while  taking  her  les- 
sons, trousers  similar  to  those  worn  during  cal- 
isthenic  exercises. 

It  sometimes  happens  that  a  lady,  even  after 
being  carefully  instructed  how  to  sit  in  the  sad- 
dle, and  when  she  seems  to  understand  what  is 
necessary,  will  yet  present  a  very  erect  but  stiff 
appearance,  as  if  she  were  made  of  cast-iron,  or 
some  other  unyielding  material.  This  may  be 
due  to  nervousness,  fear,  tight-lacing,  or  affec- 
tation. Practice  in  riding,  loose  corsets,  and 
less  affectation,  will  soon  remedy  this  stiffness. 

Another  faulty  position  is  one  which  may  be 
termed  "  the  dead  weight  seat,"  which  is  only 
possible  when  riding  on  an  English  saddle.  It 
consists  in  sitting  or  bearing  chiefly  upon  the 
left  side  of  the  saddle,  the  right  leg  firmly 
grasping  the  second  pommel,  and  the  left  leg 
squeezed  tightly  between  the  stirrup  and  the 
third  pommel,  as  if  held  in  a  vise.  In  this  po- 
sition the  rider  will  be  fastened  to  her  horse  as 
closely  as  if  she  were  a  package  of  merchandise 


THE  SEAT  ON  HORSEBACK.  117 

strapped  upon  the  back  of  a  pack-horse.  She 
will  appear  indolent  and  inanimate,  besides  rid- 
ing heavily,  and  thus  distressing  and  discour- 
aging her  horse  ;  for  a  well- trained  horse  will 
always  prefer  to  keep  in  unison  with  the  move- 
ments of  his  rider,  but  will  find  it  impossible  to 
do  so,  when  she  adopts  this  constrained,  un- 
yielding seat.  The  rider  will  also  be  made  mis- 
erable, for  the  constant  effort  to  keep  steady  by 
a  continuous  pressure  of  the  left  knee  against 
the  third  pommel  will  riot  only  prove  weari- 
some, but  wall  be  apt  to  bruise  her  knee,  as  well 
as  strain  the  muscles  of  the  upper  part  of  the 
leg,  and  the  next  day  she  will  feel  very  stiff  and 
lame.  In  addition  to  which  it  will  be  impossi- 
ble for  her  to  rise  in  the  English  trot,  or  to  move 
her  body  to  the  right  in  the  gallop  or  canter 
when  the  horse  leads  with  his  left  leg.  More- 
over, should  the  lady  who  thus  hangs  upon  the 
pommel  be  rather  heavy,  her  horse's  back  will 
be  sure  to  receive  more  or  less  injury,  no  matter 
how  well  the  saddle  may  be  made  and  padded. 
Although  the  second  pommel  should  be  firmly 
grasped  by  the  right  knee,  and  the  left  knee  be 
strongly  pressed  up  against  the  third  one,  when 
the  horse  is  unruly  or  trying  to  unseat  his  rider, 
these  supports  should  not  be  habitually  em- 
ployed, but  kept  for  critical  situations,  and  even 


118  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

then  the  body  must  be  kept  erect,  yet  flexible. 
A  rider  who  depends  entirely  upon  the  pommels 
to  enable  her  to  keep  her  seat  is  a  bad  rider, 
who  will  soon  acquire  all  kinds  of  awkward  and 
ridiculous  positions,  and  expose  herself  to  much 
severe  criticism. 

The  opposite  of  the  "  dead- weight  seat  "  is 
what  may  be  termed  the  "  wabbling  seat." 
This  is  seen  where  the  old-fashioned  saddle  is 
used ;  the  rider,  instead  of  sitting  firm  and 
erect,  bounds  up  and  down  like  a  rubber  ball 
tossed  by  an  unseen  hand.  This  can  be  rem- 
edied by  the  substitution  of  the  English  saddle, 
whose  third  pommel,  when  used  judiciously  and 
aided  by  a  proper  balance  of  the  body,  will  give 
the  required  firmness  of  seat,  which  should  be 
neither  too  rigid  nor  too  yielding. 

The  correct  seat,  universally  adopted  by  fin- 
ished riders,  is  the  following:  The  lady  should 
seat  herself  exactly  on  the  centre  of  the  saddle, 
with  her  body  erect,  and  her  backbone  in  a  di- 
rect line  with  that  of  the  horse,  at  a  right  angle 
with  it.  A  spectator  can  readily  tell  whether 
the  rider  is  in  the  centre  of  the  saddle  by  ob- 
serving whether  the  space  between  the  buttons 
on  the  hind  flaps  of  her  riding-jacket  corre- 
sponds with  the  backbone  of  the  horse,  and  also 
with  the  chamber  of  the  saddle.  (Fig.  19.)  Or 


Fig.  19.  —  Correct  Seat  for  a  Lady. 
Back  View. 


THE  SEAT  ON  HORSEBACK.  121 

the  lady  can  herself  decide  the  question  by 
placing  her  fingers  between  these  two  buttons, 
and  then  carrying  the  former  in  a  straight  line 
directly  down  to  the  chamber  of  the  saddle  ;  if 
these  coincide,  and  if  she  has  placed  herself  far 
enough  back  on  the  saddle  to  be  able  to  grasp 
the  second  pommel  comfortably  with  her  right 
knee,  while  the  left  one  is  just  spanned  by  the 
third  pommel,  then  she  is  in  a  position  to  ride 
with  ease  to  herself  and  horse,  for  she  now  sits 
upon  that  part  of  the  animal  which  is  the  cen- 
tre of  motion  in  his  forward  movement,  and 
in  this  position  can  keep  in  unison  with  the  ca- 
dence of  his  various  gaits.  Again,  her  weight 
being  exactly  upon  the  centre  of  motion,  she 
can  with  difficulty  be  unseated  or  shaken  off 
by  the  most  violent  efforts  of  the  horse,  for, 
whether  he  springs  suddenly  forward,  or  side- 
ways, or  whirls  around,  the  rider  is  in  a  position 
at  once  to  anticipate  his  movement,  to  keep  a 
firm  seat,  and  quickly  to  gain  her  balance. 

When  the  horse  advances  straight  forward, 
the  rider  —  sitting  with  head  erect  and  her 
body  so  placed  that  its  entire  front  is  directed 
toward  the  horse's  head,  or,  in  other  words,  that 
a  straight  line  drawn  from  one  hip  to  the  other 
would  form  a  right  angle  with  one  drawn  along 
the  centre  of  the  horses  head  and  neck  —  must 


122  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

throw  her  shoulders  somewhat  back,  so  as  to  ex- 
pand her  chest,  taking  care,  however,  to  keep  the 
shoulders  in  line,  and  not  to  elevate  one  more 
than  the  other.  There  should  also  be,  at  the 
back  of  the  waist,  a  slight  inward  bend  which 
will  throw  the  front  of  the  waist  a  little  for- 
ward. The  arms,  from  the  shoulders  to  the 
elbows,  must  hang  perpendicularly,  and  the 
elbows  be  held  loosely  but  steadily  and  in  an 
easy  manner,  near  the  rider's  sides,  and  not  be 
allowed  to  flap  up  and  down  with  every  move- 
ment. The  hands  must  be  held  low  and  about 
three  or  four  inches  from  the  body.  The  bear- 
ing of  the  head,  the  backward  throw  of  the 
shoulders,  and  the  curve  at  the  waist,  are  ex- 
actly like  those  assumed  by  a  finished  waltzer, 
and  if  the  reader  is  herself  a  dancer,  or  will 
notice  the  carriage  of  a  good  dancer  gliding 
around  the  ball-room,  she  can  readily  under- 
stand the  attitude  required  for  a  correct  seat  in 
the  saddle. 

The  right  knee  should  grasp  the  second  pom- 
mel firmly,  but  not  hang  upon  it  in  order  to 
help  the  rider  keep  her  seat  and  balance.  The 
right  leg,  from  the  hip  to  the  knee,  must  be 
kept  as  steady  as  possible,  because  from  a 
woman's  position  in  the  saddle,  the  movements 
of  her  horse  tend  to  throw  her  toward  his  left 


THE  SEAT  ON  HORSEBACK.  123 

side,  and  she  must  guard  against  this  by  bear- 
ing slightly  toward  his  right.  From  the  knee 
to  the  foot,  the  right  leg  must  be  in  contact 
with  the  fore-flap  of  the  saddle,  the  heel  being 
inclined  backward  a  little. 

The  left  knee  should  be  placed  just  below  the 
third  pommel,  so  that  this  will  span  it  lightly, 
close  enough  to  assist  in  preserving  a  firm  seat, 
yet  not  so  close  as  to  interfere  with  the  action 
of  the  leg  in  the  English  trot.  From  the  knee 
to  the  foot  this  left  leg  must  be  held  in  a 
straight  line  perpendicular  to  the  ground,  and 
the  knee  be  lightly  pressed  against  the  side-flap 
of  the  saddle.  The  ball  of  the  foot  must  be 
placed  evenly  in  the  stirrup,  the  heel  being  a 
little  lower  than  the  toes,  which  should  be 
pointed  toward  the  shoulder  of  the  horse.  (Fig. 
20.) 

If  the  rider  will  seat  herself  in  the  saddle  in 
the  manner  just  described,  she  will  find  that  she 
has  a  very  firm  seat,  from  which  she  cannot 
easily  be  displaced;  but  in  order  to  appear 
graceful  she  must  be  flexible,  and  adapt  herself 
readily  to  the  motions  of  her  horse.  The  shoul- 
ders, for  example,  although  thrown  back,  must 
not  be  rigid,  and  the  body,  while  erect,  must  be 
supple ;  the  head  be  upright  and  free,  and,  in 
the  leap,  or  when  circling  in  the  gallop,  the  body 


124 


THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 


must  be  pliant,  yielding  and  bending  with  the 
movements  of  the  horse,  but  always  resuming 
afterward  the  easy  erect  position.  But  it  must 


Fig.  20.  —  Correct  seat  for  a  lady.     Side  view. 
1,  third  pommel ;  2,  second  pommel. 

be  borne  in  mind  that  the  above  directions  in 
regard  to  carriage  apply  to  the  times  when  the 
horse  is  moving,  and  need  not  be  observed  in 
full  rigor  at  other  times.  When,  for  instance, 
the  horse  is  standing,  the  rider  may  assume  a 
more  easy  posture,  collecting  herself  and  steed 
simultaneously  when  she  wishes  him  to  move. 


THE  SEAT  ON  HORSEBACK.  125 

The  novice  in  riding  should  never  be  allowed 
to  touch  rein  or  whip  until  she  has  acquired  a 
good  seat,  and  a  correct  balance.  During  her 
first  lessons,  some  one  should  ride  by  her  side 
and  lead  her  horse,  while  she,  folding  her  hands 
in  front  of  her  waist,  should  give  all  her  atten- 
tion to  gaining  a  correct  seat;  or,  she  may 
practice  circling  to  the  right  by  means  of  the 
lunge  line,  which  will  prove  excellent  training, 
and  will  teach  her  to  bear  toward  the  off  or 
right  side,  for  it  has  already  been  stated  that 
the  motion  in  the  side-saddle  has  a  tendency  to 
impel  the  rider  toward  the  left,  and  this  ten- 
dency must  always  be  guarded  against  by  bear- 
ing the  body  a  little  to  the  right.  Circling  to 
the  right,  when  riding  in  the  track  of  the  riding- 
school,  is  also  a  useful  exercise  for  this  purpose, 
but  as  riding-schools  are  not  always  to  be  had 
conveniently,  the  lunge  line  will  be  found  very 
useful,  many  riders,  indeed,  considering  it  even 
better  than  riding  in  the  ring,  as  it  keeps  the 
horse  well  up  to  his  gait. 

During  a  few  of  the  first  lessons,  that  the 
rider  may  not  fall  from  the  saddle,  the  stirrup- 
leather  may  be  somewhat  shortened,  but  as  soon 
as  an  idea  of  the  proper  balance  has  been  ac- 
quired and  the  reins  and  whip  are  placed  in  her 
hands,  the  stirrup  must  be  lengthened,  as  this 


126  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

secures  a  firmer  and  more  easy  seat.  This 
leather  will  be  of  the  correct  length  when,  by  a 
little  pressure  on  it  with  her  foot,  and  a  simul- 
taneous straightening  of  her  knee,  the  rider  can 
spring  upward  about  four  or  five  inches  from 
the  saddle ;  but  it  must  never  be  so  long  as  to 
render  the  third  pommel  nearly,  if  not  quite, 
useless. 

It  is  better  to  have  the  first  lessons  in  riding 
rather  short,  so  that  the  pupil  may  become 
gradually  accustomed  to  the  exercise.  As  soon 
as  she  begins  to  feel  at  all  fatigued,  she  should 
at  once  dismount,  and  not  try  to  ride  again  until 
the  tired  feeling  is  wholly  gone.  These  inter- 
vals of  fatigue  will  gradually  become  less  and 
less  frequent,  until  at  last  the  rider  will  find 
herself  so  strong  and  vigorous  that  riding  will 
no  longer  require  any  fatiguing  effort.  In  the 
case  of  an  active,  healthy  woman,  accustomed 
to  exercise  of  various  kinds,  these  short  prelim- 
inary lessons  may  not  be  necessary ;  her  muscles 
will  be  already  so  well  developed  that  she  will 
not  be  easily  fatigued  by  exercise  of  any  kind. 
But  for  a  lady  who  has  always  been  physically 
inactive,  these  short  lessons  at  first  are  abso- 
lutely necessary.  The  general  system  of  such 
a  person  has  become  enfeebled,  her  muscles  are 
weak  and  flabby,  and  any  sudden  or  long  con- 


THE  SEAT  ON  HORSEBACK.  127 

tinned  exercise  would  tend  to  produce  very  in- 
jurious results,  so  that  riding,  unless  begun 
very  gradually,  would  probably  do  her  more 
harm  than  good. 

But  after  reading  all  the  directions  just  given 
about  riding,  the  reader  may  ask  what  need 
there  is  of  so  much  study  and  circumspection 
to  enable  a  woman  to  mount  a  horse  and  ride 
him,  when  hundreds  of  ladies  ride  every  day, 
and  enjoy  doing  so,  without  knowing  anything 
about  the  make  of  the  saddle,  or  the  position 
they  ought  to  take  when  seated  in  it. 

Although  it  seems  almost  a  pity  to  disturb 
the  serenity  and  self-complacency  of  ignorance, 
we  shall  be  obliged,  in  justice  to  those  who 
really  wish  to  understand  the  principles  of  good 
horsewomanship,  to  point  out  some  of  the  mis- 
takes of  those  who  think  that  riding  is  an  ac- 
complishment which  can  be  acquired  without 
instruction  and  study. 

It  is  not  too  sweeping  an  assertion  to  state 
that,  of  one  hundred  ladies  who  attempt  a  dis- 
play of  what  they  consider  their  excellent  horse- 
womanship in  our  streets  and  parks,  ninety-five 
are  very  imperfect  riders ;  and  the  five  who  do 
ride  well  have  only  learned  to  do  so  by  means 
of  careful  study  and  competent  instruction. 
They  have  fully  appreciated  the  fact  that  na- 


128  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

ture  never  ushered  them  into  the  world  finished 
riders,  any  more  than  accomplished  gramma- 
rians or  Latin  scholars,  and  that  although  one 
may  possess  a  natural  aptitude  for  an  accom- 
plishment, application,  study,  and  practice  are 
positively  necessary  to  enable  her  to  attain  any 
degree  of  perfection  in  it.  Yet  the  idea  un- 
fortunately prevails  very  largely  in  this  country 
that  women  require  very  little  instruction  to 
become  good  riders,  and  the  results  of  this  be- 
lief are  apparent  in  the  ninety-five  faulty  riders 
already  referred  to. 

Let  us  now  watch  some  of  the  fair  Americans 
whom  the  first  balmy  day  of  spring  has  tempted 
out  for  a  horseback  ride,  and  notice  the  faulty 
positions  in  which  they  have  contrived  to  seat 
themselves  in  their  saddles.  With  regard  to 
their  beauty,  elegance  of  form,  and  style  of 
dress,  nothing  more  could  be  desired ;  but,  alas ! 
the  same  cannot  be  said  of  their  manner  of  rid- 
ing. 

Take  Miss  X.  and  Mrs.  Y.,  for  examples. 
These  ladies  have  the  reputation  of  being  fine 
and  fearless  horsewomen,  and  certainly  do  ride 
with  that  dash  and  confidence  which  long  prac- 
tice in  the  saddle  is  sure  to  give,  but  we  regret 
to  say  that  we  can  bestow  no  further  praise 
upon  them.  Miss  X.  has  taken  a  position  that 


n 

Fig.  21.  —  Crooked  Position  in  Saddle.     Miss  X. 


THE  SEAT  ON  HORSEBACK.  131 

is  almost  universal  with  American  horsewomen, 
and  is  exactly  the  one  which  a  rider  nearly  al- 
ways assumes  when  seated  sideways  on  a  horse 
without  a  saddle.  Instead  of  sitting  squarely, 
with  the  entire  front  of  her  body  facing  in  the 
direction  toward  which  the  horse  is  going,  she 
sits  crosswise.  It  will  be  seen  by  looking  at 
Fig.  21,  that  the  central  vertical  line  of  her 
back,  instead  of  being  directly  in  the  centre  of 
the  saddle,  is  placed  toward  the  right  corner  of 
it,  and  that  her  shoulders  are  out  of  line,  the 
left  one  being  thrown  back,  and  the  right  one 
advanced  forward.  This  position  makes  it  im- 
possible for  her  to  keep  in  unison  with  her  horse 
when  he  is  moving  straight  forward  at  an  easy 
pace.  When  he  changes  his  gait  to  a  canter 
the  rider  will,  for  a  short  distance,  appear  to  be 
more  in  harmony  with  him,  because  he  is  now 
turning  himself  slightly  to  the  left  and  leading 
with  his  right  fore-leg,  a  position  which  is  more 
in  unison  with  that  of  his  rider.  But,  after  a 
short  time,  the  horse  gets  tired  of  this  canter, 
turns  to  the  right,  and  leads  with  his  left  fore- 
leg. This  change  entirely  destroys  the  appar- 
ent harmony  which  had  before  existed  between 
the  two. 

The  lady,  knowing  nothing  about  the  posi- 
tion of  a  horse  when  galloping  or  cantering,  is 


132  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

ignorant  of  the  fact  that  he  always  turns  a  little 
to  the  right  or  left  according  to  the  leg  with 
which  he  leads,  and  that  she  ought  to  place  her 
body  in  a  corresponding  position.  She  has  but 
one  position  in  the  saddle,  —  the  crooked  one 
already  described,  —  and  this  she  maintains  im- 
movably through  all  the  changes  of  her  horse's 
gaits. 

Let  us  now  turn  to  Mrs.  Y.,  who  is  even  a 
more  faulty  rider  than  her  companion.  She 
has  likewise  taken  a  crosswise  position  in  the 
saddle ;  but  having  given  a  peculiar  twist  to 
her  body  so  that,  by  turning  her  right  shoulder 
backward,  she  can  look  to  the  right,  she  seems 
to  imagine  that  by  these  means  she  has  placed 
herself  squarely  upon  the  saddle.  (Fig.  22.)  As 
she  is  riding  a  racking  horse  and  seated  on  a  two- 
pommeled  saddle,  she  holds  the  reins  firmly  in  her 
left  hand  and  by  a  steady  pull  on  them  she  bal- 
ances herself  and  keeps  her  horse  up  to  his  gait. 
But  this  steady  pull  will  soon  ruin  the  tender- 
ness and  sensitiveness  of  any  horse's  mouth,  and 
this  is  the  reason  why  racking  horses  generally 
have  very  hard  mouths,  many  of  them  requiring 
to  be  well  held  up  or  supported  in  their  rack  by 
the  reins.  As  this  pulling  upon  the  reins  also 
gives  considerable  support  to  the  rider,  many 
ladies  prefer  a  racking  horse.  Now  notice  Mrs. 


Fig.  22.  —  Crooked  Position  in  Saddle.    Mrs.  Y. 


THE  SEAT  ON  HORSEBACK.  135 

Y.,  who  is  attempting  to  turn  her  hard-mouthed 
racker.  Instead  of  doing  this  by  an  almost 
imperceptible  movement  of  the  hand,  her  left 
hand  and  arm  can  be  distinctly  seen  to  move, 
and  to  fairly  pull  the  animal  around.  Her  right 
hand  —  probably  acting  in  sympathy  with  the 
left,  so  tightly  clasped  over  the  reins  —  holds 
the  whip  as  if  it  were  in  a  vise  intended  to 
crush  it.  In  odd  contrast  with  the  rigidly  held 
hands  is  the  body  with  its  utter  lack  of  firm- 
ness. 

It  can  be  seen  at  a  glance  why  the  lady  will 
only  ride  an  easy  racker,  for  it  is  well  known 
that  on  a  good  racker  or  pacer  the  body  of  a 
rider  in  a  faulty  position  is  not  jolted  so  much 
as  in  other  gaits.  For  this  reason  also  the  rack 
and  pace  are  the  favorite  gaits  of  most  Amer- 
ican horsewomen. 

Nearly  every  lady  who  rides  has  an  ambition 
to  be  considered  a  finished  horsewoman,  but  this 
she  can  never  be  until  she  is  able  to  ride  prop- 
erly the  trot  and  gallop,  can  keep  herself  in 
unison  with  her  horse,  whether  he  leads  with 
the  left  or  right  fore-leg,  and  has  hands  that 
will  "  give  and  take "  with  the  horse's  move- 
ments and  bring  him  up  to  his  best  gait.  Prom 
this  point  of  view,  Miss  X.  and  Mrs.  Y.,  then, 
are  by  no  means  the  "splendid  riders"  that 


136 


THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 


their  friends  suppose  them,  but  having  all  the 
confidence  of  ignorance  they  ride  fast  and  boldly 
and  with  a  certain  abandon  that  is  pleasing ; 


Fig.  23.  —  Incorrect  position  of  legs  and  feet.    Side  view. 

but  by  those  who  understand  what  good  riding 
is,  they  must  always  be  regarded  as  very  faulty 
riders. 

Another  common  fault,  against  which  we  have 
already  warned  the  reader,  is  that  of  riding 
with  too  short  a  stirrup-leather,  thus  pressing 
the  left  knee  up  against  the  third  pommel, 
carrying  the  left  heel  backward  and  slightly 


Fig.  24.  —Incorrect  Position  when  Legs  and  Feet  are 
wrongly  placed. 


THE  SEAT   ON  HORSEBACK.  139 

upward,  and  dropping  the  toes  of  the  left  foot 
more  or  less  down  toward  the  ground,  while 
those  of  the  right  are  raised  and  pointed  toward 
the  horse's  head.  (Fig.  23.)  Although  the 
lower  limbs  are  concealed  by  the  skirt,  it  can 
easily  be  told  whether  they  are  in  the  position 
just  described,  from  the  effect  produced  upon 
the  upper  part  of  the  body,  which  then  leans 
too  far  forward  and  too  much  to  the  right 
(Fig.  24) ;  while  the  rider,  in  her  efforts  to 
balance  herself,  inclines  her  shoulders  to  the 
left.  This  is  a  very  awkward  as  well  as  a  very 
dangerous  attitude,  because,  by  thrusting  her 
leg  backwards,  the  action  of  spurring  is  imi- 
tated, and,  if  the  horse  is  very  high-spirited, 
this  may  cause  him  to  become  restive,  or  even 
to  run  away.  Should  the  leg,  moreover,  as  is 
very  apt  to  be  the  case,  be  firmly  and  steadily 
pressed  against  the  animal's  side,  he  may  sud- 
denly pirouette  or  turn  around  to  the  right, 
especially  if  he  has  been  accustomed  to  carry- 
ing gentlemen  as  well  as  ladies.  This  short  stir- 
rup-leather and  improper  use  of  the  third  pom- 
mel should  be  carefully  avoided. 

The  use  of  too  long  a  stirrup-leather  is  apt  to 
be  the  mistake  of  those  who  ride  upon  the  old- 
fashioned  saddle,  but  is  a  fault  which  has  be- 
come much  less  common  since  the  English 


140          THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

saddle  has  been  more  generally  used.  The  ob- 
jection to  too  long  a  stirrup-leather  is  that, 
when  the  foot  is  pressed  upon  it,  the  leg  at  the 
same  time  is  straightened,  and  extends  down  so 
far  as  to  cause  the  rider  to  sit  too  much  to  the 
left  of  the  saddle.  As  the  pressure  and  weight 
are  thus  thrown  wholly  upon  the  left  side,  the 
saddle  is  very  likely  to  turn,  and  if  this  faulty 
position  be  persisted  in,  it  will  be  certain  to  in- 
jure the  horse's  back  and  may  give  rise  to  fis- 
tulous  withers. 

Besides  looking  very  awkward  and  inelegant, 
when  stooping  forward  in  the  saddle  and  round- 
ing the  back  without  the  slightest  curve  in- 
wardly, the  rider  will  also  run  great  risk,  if  her 
horse  stumbles  or  makes  any  sudden  movement, 
of  being  unseated,  or  at  least  thrown  violently 
against  the  front  of  the  saddle,  as  it  is  almost 
impossible  for  her,  under  such  circumstances, 
to  adapt  herself  to  the  change  in  his  motion 
quickly  enough  to  preserve  her  equilibrium.  In 
all  violent  movements  of  the  horse,  except  rear- 
ing, the  body  must  be  inclined  backward,  so  as 
to  keep  the  balance.  When  he  is  moving  briskly 
in  his  ordinary  gaits,  the  body  must  be  kept 
erect ;  and  when  he  is  turning  a  corner  rapidly, 
it  should  be  inclined  backward  somewhat,  and 
toward  the  inner  bend  of  the  horse's  body ;  or, 


THE  SEAT  ON  HORSEBACK.  141 

in  other  words,  toward  the  centre  of  the  circle, 
of  which  the  turn  forms  a  segment. 

Here  come  two  ladies  who  have  evidently  re- 
ceived very  limited  instructions  in  the  art  of 
riding.  Notice  how  the  head  of  one  is  thrust 
forward,  while  the  other,  though  holding  her 
head  erect  allows  it  to  be  jerked  about  with 
every  motion  of  her  horse.  It  shakes  slowly 
when  the  animal  is  walking,  but  as  he  quick- 
ens his  pace  to  a  canter,  it  rocks  with  his  mo- 
tion, and,  during  his  fast  pace,  the  poor  head 
moves  so  rapidly  as  to  make  one  fear  that  the 
neck  may  become  dislocated,  while  the  arms 
dance  about  simultaneously  with  the  movements 
of  the  head  in  a  way  that  reminds  one  of  the 
toy  dancing-jacks,  pulled  by  an  unseen  hand  for 
the  amusement  of  children.  The  head  should, 
in  riding,  be  kept  firm  and  erect,  without  stiff- 
ness, the  chin  being  drawn  in  slightly,  and  not 
protruding  high  in  the  air,  because  the  latter 
gives  one  a  supercilious  look.  The  head  and 
shoulders  should  adapt  themselves,  in  their  di- 
rection, to  the  movements  of  the  head  and  fore- 
legs of  the  horse,  and  the  arms  should  be  held 
as  steady  as  possible. 

But  here  come  several  ladies  who  have  taken 
lessons  at  the  riding-school  and  may,  therefore, 
reasonably  be  expected  to  be  finished  riders; 


142  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

but  such,  alas !  is  not  the  case.  They  have 
been  trying  "  to  walk  before  they  could  creep/' 
or,  in  other  words,  their  lessons  in  riding  have 
been  conducted  too  hastily.  They  have  begun 
to  try  a  canter  or  a  rapid  gallop  before  they 
knew  how  to  sit  correctly  upon  their  horses,  or 
even  to  manage  them  properly  in  a  walk.  This 
desire  to  make  too  rapid  progress  is  more  fre- 
quently the  fault  of  the  pupil  than  of  the  riding 
teacher.  Most  teachers  have  an  ambition  to 
make  finished  riders  of  their  pupils,  and  take 
much  pride  in  doing  so,  especially  as  such  a  re- 
sult adds  greatly  to  the  prestige  of  their  school. 
This  ambition  is  often  defeated,  however,  by  the 
impatience  of  the  pupils,  who  are  not  satisfied 
to  learn  slowly  and  well,  but  overrule  the 
teacher's  objections  and  undertake  to  gallop  be- 
fore they  have  acquired  even  the  first  principles 
of  horsewomanship.  Moreover,  many  of  these 
ladies  never  take  any  road  lessons,  so  highly 
important  to  all  who  would  become  thoroughly 
accomplished  in  this  art;  nor  do  they  remain 
long  enough  under  instruction  in  the  school, 
but  seem  to  think  that  a  few  short  lessons  are 
enough  to  make  them  finished  riders.  They 
often  refuse  to  learn  the  English  trot,  although 
this  is  a  very  important  accomplishment  for  the 
beginner,  as  it  enables  her  to  gain  a  correct 


THE  SEAT  ON  HORSEBACK.  143 

idea  of  the  balance.  Or,  if  they  do  attempt  to 
learn  it,  they  insist  upon  circling  only  to  the 
right,  as  this  is  easier  than  going  the  other  way. 

Again,  many  pupils  will  insist  upon  riding 
the  same  favorite  horse,  instead  of  leaving  the 
selection  to  the  judgment  of  the  teacher,  who  is 
well  aware  that  it  is  much  better  for  the  lady's 
progress  that  she  should  ride  a  variety  of  horses 
with  different  gaits.  He  is  often  driven  to  his 
wit's  end  when  two  or  three  ladies  who  patron- 
ize his  school,  and  whom  it  is  an  honor  to  have 
as  pupils,  express  a  desire  to  ride  the  same 
horse  on  the  same  occasion.  Should  he  favor 
one  more  than  the  others,  the  latter  will  become 
highly  offended,  and  the  poor  man  in  his  per- 
plexity is  often  obliged  to  resort  to  some  sub- 
terfuge to  pacify  them. 

It  is  not  difficult,  then,  to  understand  why 
some  ladies,  although  they  have  taken  lessons 
at  a  riding-school,  are,  nevertheless,  not  finished 
riders,  their  faults  being  due,  not  to  the  instruc- 
tion but  to  their  own  lack  of  judgment  or 
inattention.  It  is  true  that  occasionally  the 
teacher,  although  he  may  be"  an  excellent  in- 
structor for  gentlemen,  is  not  so  good  a  one  for 
ladies,  or  he  may  become  careless,  believing 
that  if  he  gives  them  well-trained  horses  to  ride 
very  little  else  is  required  of  him.  Or,  again, 


144          THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

he  may  think,  as  many  foreigners  do,  that  very 
few  American  ladies  know  how  a  woman  should 
ride,  and  are  satisfied  with  being  half  taught. 

It  cannot  be  too  strongly  impressed  upon  rid- 
ing teachers  that  in  every  riding-school  where 
ladies  are  to  be  taught  there  should  be  at  least 
one  lady  assistant.  A  gentleman  can  give  all 
the  necessary  instructions  about  the  manage- 
ment of  the  horse  and  the  handling  of  the  reins 
better  than  most  ladies ;  but,  in  giving  the  idea 
of  a  correct  seat  and  the  proper  disposal  of  the 
limbs,  the  presence  of  a  lady  assistant  becomes 
necessary  ;  in  these  matters  she  can  instruct  her 
own  sex  much  better  than  a  man  can. 


CHAPTER  VI. 

TO   HOLD   THE   REINS,  AND   MANAGE   THE   HORSE. 

"What  a  wild  thought  of  triumph,  that  this  girlish  hand 
Such  a  steed  in  the  might  of  his  strength  may  command ! 
What  a  glorious  creature !     Ah !  glance  at  him  now, 
As  I  check  him  awhile  on  this  green  hillock's  brow; 
How  he  tosses  his  mane,  with  a  shrill,  joyous  neigh, 
And  paws  the  firm  earth  in  his  proud,  stately  play !  " 

GRACE  GREENWOOD. 

THE  position  of  the  rider  in  the  saddle  has  a 
decided  influence  upon  the  horse's  mouth,  ren- 
dering his  movements  regular  or  irregular,  ac- 
cording to  the  correctness  and  firmness  of  the 
seat ;  for,  if  the  rider  be  unsteady  or  vacillating 
in  the  saddle,  this  will  exert  an  influence  upon 
the  hand,  rendering  it  correspondingly  unstable, 
and  will  thereby  cause  the  horse's  movements 
to  be  variable.  And  should  she  endeavor  to 
remedy  this  unsteadiness  of  hand  and  seat  by 
supporting  herself  upon  the  reins,  the  horse 
will  defend  himself  against  such  rigid  traction 
by  making  counter-traction  upon  the  reins, 
thrusting  his  head  forward,  throwing  himself 
heavily  upon  his  fore-legs,  thus  forcing  the 

hands  of  the  rider,  and  compelling  her  to  sup- 
10 


146  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

port  the  weight  of  his  neck  and  shoulders.  On 
the  contrary,  if  she  be  firm  in  her  seat,  and  not 
in  the  least  dependent  upon  the  reins,  her  hand 
will  be  light,  and  the  animal  will  yield  a  ready 
obedience  and  advance  in  his  best  pace.  The 
preceding  remarks  explain  why  a  horse  will  go 
lightly  with  one  rider  and  heavily  with  another. 
A  lady  should  have  a  thorough  knowledge  of 
the  management  of  her  horse,  and  of  the  means 
by  which  she  may  command  him  in  every  de- 
gree of  speed,  and  under  all  circumstances ; 
without  this  knowledge  she  can  never  become  a 
safe  and  accomplished  horsewoman.  A  gentle- 
man may  guide  and  control  his  horse,  and  ob- 
tain obedience  from  a  restive  one,  by  a  firm, 
strong  hand,  and  by  his  courage  and  determined 
will ;  but  as  a  rule,  a  lady  cannot  depend  upon 
these  methods  ;  she  will  have  to  rely  entirely 
upon  the  thorough  training  of  her  horse,  a 
properly  arranged  bit,  her  firm,  yet  delicate 
touch,  and  her  skill  in  handling  the  reins. 
The  well-trained  hand  of  a  woman  is  always 
energetic  enough  to  obtain  the  mastery  of 
her  horse,  without  having  to  resort  to  feats 
of  strength  and  acrobatic  movements ;  and 
a  lady  should  never  seek  to  gain  prestige  by 
riding  restless  or  vicious  horses,  in  order  that 
she  may  display  her  skill  in  conquering  them  ; 


MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  HORSE.  147 

though  every  rider  should  be  thoroughly 
taught  how  to  control  her  steed  in  cases  of 
emergency. 

When  one  sees  how  little  skill  most  lady 
riders  exhibit  in  managing  the  reins,  it  seems 
almost  miraculous  that  so  few  accidents  occur 
to  them,  and  is  indeed  a  positive  proof  of 
the  excellent  temper  of  their  horses.  From 
some  mysterious  cause,  most  horses  will  bear 
more  awkwardness  and  absurdity  in  the  han- 
dling of  the  reins  by  a  woman  than  by  a  man, 
and  will  good-naturedly  submit  to  the  indif- 
ferent riding  of  the  gentle  being  in  the  side- 
saddle, while  the  same  character  of  riding  and 
treatment  from  a  man  would  arouse  every  feel- 
ing of  defense  and  rebellion.  The  probable 
cause  of  this  difference  of  action  on  the  part 
of  the  horse  is,  that  a  lady  rider,  with  all  her 
ignorance  of  seat  and  rein,  will  talk  kindly  to 
and  pet  her  steed,  and  will  rarely  lose  her  tem- 
per, no  matter  in  what  eccentricities  he  may 
indulge,  and  her  gentleness  causes  the  animal 
to  remain  gentle. 

On  the  contrary,  when  a  man  throws  his 
weight  upon  the  reins,  jerking  and  pulling 
upon  them,  his  horse,  seeking  to  defend  himself 
against  such  rough  measures,  arouses  the  tem- 
per of  his  rider,  and  this  anger  is  soon  commu- 


148  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

nicated  to  the  animal,  which  then  becomes  ob- 
stinate and  rebellious ;  moreover,  a  man  will 
often  whip  and  spur  for  some  trivial  offense  in 
instances  where  a  woman  would  simply  speak  to 
her  horse,  or  take  no  notice.  Hence,  the  igno- 
rant horsewoman  often  rides  in  safety  under 
circumstances  in  which  the  ignorant  horseman, 
who  has  resorted  to  violent  measures,  meets 
with  an  accident. 

Although  a  horse  may  submit  to  an  awk- 
ward rider  and  carry  her  with  safety,  still  she 
will  have  no  power  to  make  him  move  in  his 
best  and  most  regular  manner,  and  there  will 
exist  no  intelligence  or  harmony  between  the 
two.  Yet  this  same  horse,  when  mounted  by 
a  lady  who  understands  the  management  of 
the  reins,  will  be  all  animation  and  happi- 
ness. There  will  soon  be  established  a  tacit 
understanding  between  the  two,  and  the  grace- 
ful curvetings  and  prancings  of  the  steed  will 
manifest  his  pride  and  joy  in  carrying  and 
obeying  a  gentle  woman,  who  manages  the  reins 
with  spirit  and  resolution,  and  yet  does  not, 
with  the  cruelty  of  ignorance  or  indifference, 
convert  them  into  instruments  of  torture. 

The  reins  should  not  be  employed  until  a 
firm,  steady  position  upon  the  saddle  has  been 
acquired,  and  then,  for  first  lessons,  the  snaffle 


MANAGEMENT  OF   THE  HORSE.  149 

only  should  be  used,  a  rein  in  each  hand. 
It  will  be  better  to  have  the  reins  marked  at 
equal  distances  from  the  bit,  either  by  sewing 
colored  thread  across  each,  or  otherwise;  this 
will  be  useful  because,  with  the  novice,  the 
reins  will  imperceptibly  slip  through  her  hands, 
or  one  rein  will  become  longer  than  the  other, 
and  the  markings  will  enable  her  to  notice 
these  displacements,  and  promptly  to  remedy 
them.  By  holding  the  snaffle-reins  separately, 


Fig.  25.  —  Snaffle-reins ;  one  in  each  hand. 

in  first  lessons,  the  pupil  will  be  aided  in  as- 
suming a  square  position  upon  the  saddle,  and 
will  likewise  be  prevented  from  throwing  back 
her  right  shoulder,  out  of  line  with  the  left,  a 
common  fault  with  beginners,  especially  when 
the  reins  are  held  only  in  the  left  hand.  This 
rein-hold  is  very  simple ;  the  right  rein  of  the 
snaffle  must  be  held  in  the  right  hand,  and  the 
left  rein  in  the  left. 
The  hands  being  closed,  but  not  too  tightly, 


150  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

must  be  held  with  their  backs  toward  the 
horse's  head,  and  each  rein,  as  it  ascends  from 
the  bit,  must  be  passed  between  the  third  and 
fourth  fingers  of  its  appropriate  hand,  carried 
across  the  inner  surface  of  the  third,  second, 
and  first  fingers,  and  then  be  drawn  over  the 
outside  (or  side  next  to  the  thumb)  of  the  first 
finger,  against  which  it  must  be  held  by  firm 
pressure  of  the  thumb.  The  thumbs  must  be 
held  opposite  each  other  and  uppermost,  the  fin- 
ger-nails toward  the  body,  and  the  back  of  the 
wrists  must  be  rounded  a  little  outwardly,  so 
as  to  make  a  slight  bend  of  the  closed  hand 
toward  the  body.  The  little  fingers  must  be 
held  down  and  nearly  in  a  horizontal  line  with 
the  tips  of  the  elbows  ;  and  the  hands  be  kept 
as  low  as  possible,  without  resting  upon  the 
knees,  and  be  about  four  inches  distant  from 
the  body,  and  from  four  to  six  inches  apart. 
(Fig.  25.) 

This  arrangement  of  hands  and  reins  may 
be  termed  the  "  original  position  "  when  a  snaf- 
fle-rein is  held  in  each  hand,  of  which  all  the 
others  are  variations.  In  this  position,  —  the 
reins  being  held  just  short  enough  to  feel  the 
horse's  mouth,  —  if  the  hands  be  now  slightly 
relaxed  by  turning  the  nails  and  thumbs  to- 
ward the  body,  the  latter  being,  at  the  same 


MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  HORSE.  151 

time,  inclined  a  little  forward,  the  horse  will  be 
enabled  to  advance  freely,  and,  as  soon  as  he 
moves  onward,  the  original  position  of  the 
hands  must  be  gently  resumed.  It  is  proper  to 
remark  here,  that  when  using  the  snaffle-reins 
only,  the  curb-bit  should  always  be  in  the 
horse's  mouth,  its  reins  being  tied  and  allowed 
to  rest  upon  his  neck,  although  the  pupil  must 
not  be  allowed  to  meddle  with  it.  The  presence 
of  the  curb  in  the  horse's  mouth,  although  not 
used,  has  a  restraining  influence,  especially  with 
an  animal  accustomed  to  it. 

To  turn  the  horse  to  the  right,  the  right  rein 
must  be  shortened  so  as  to  be  felt  at  the  right 
side  of  his  mouth  ;  to  effect  this,  the  little  finger 
of  the  right  hand  must,  by  a  turn  of  the  wrist, 
be  moved  in  toward  the  body  and  sufficiently 
toward  the  left,  with  the  nails  up  and  the 
knuckles  down,  while,  in  order  to  aid  the  horse, 
the  rider  will  simultaneously  turn  her  face  and 
shoulders  slightly  to  the  right.  The  animal 
having  made  the  turn,  the  hand  must  gently 
return  to  the  original  position,  and  the  body 
again  face  to  the  front. 

To  turn  the  horse  to  the  left,  the  left  rein 
must  be  shortened,  by  a  turn  of  the  left  wrist, 
carrying  the  little  finger  of  the  left  hand  toward 
the  body  and  to  the  right,  nails  upward,  etc., 


152  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

while  the  pupil  will  slightly  turn  her  face  and 
shoulders  to  the  left.  The  turn  having  been 
effected,  the  original  position  must  be  resumed, 
the  pupil,  in  all  these  cases,  taking  great  care 
that  the  markings  on  her  reins  are  even  and  in 
the  correct  position. 

To  stop  the  horse,  both  reins  must  be  short- 
ened evenly;  this  must  be  accomplished  by  a 
turn  of  both  wrists  that  will  bring  the  little 
fingers  toward  the  body  with  the  finger-nails 
uppermost,  the  body  of  the  pupil  being,  at  the 
same  time,  slightly  inclined  backward.  Now, 
by  bending  the  wrists  to  a  still  greater  degree, 
and  bringing  the  hands  in  closer  to  the  body, 
which  must  be  inclined  a  little  forward,  and 
nearly  in  contact  with  each  other,  thus  throwing 
more  strength  upon  the  reins,  the  horse  will  be 
compelled  to  back.  To  make  him  move  on 
again,  the  hands  and  body  must  resume  the 
original  position,  and  the  hands  must  be  re- 
laxed, etc.,  as  stated  above. 

When  the  pupil  becomes  more  advanced,  and 
can  command  her  horse,  in  all  his  gaits,  with 
the  reins  separate,  one  in  each  hand,  she  will 
then  be  prepared  for  lessons  in  handling  both 
reins  with  the  left  hand  only,  still  employing 
the  snaffle,  as  her  touch  may  not  be  delicate 
enough  for  the  curb. 


MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  HORSE. 


153 


Fig.  26.  —  Snaffle-reins  ;  both  in  the  left 
hand. 


For  this  purpose,  the  reins  being  held  for  the 
time  being  in  the 
right  hand,  the 
left,  having  its 
back  toward  the 
horse's  head,  will 
seize  them  as  fol- 
lows :  its  little 
finger  must  be 
passed  directly 
between  the  two  reins,  the  left  rein  being  on 
the  outer  side  of  this  finger  and  the  right  one 
on  its  right  side,  between  it  and  the  third  fin- 
ger. This  done,  the  reins  must  be  drawn  up 
nearly  even  to  the  marks  upon  them,1  so  as  just 
to  feel  the  animal's  mouth,  noticing  that  these 
marks  are  nearly  on  a  line  with  each  other, 
while  that  portion  of  the  reins  lying  within  the 
hand  must  be  carried  across  its  palm  to  the 
index  finger,  to  a  point  between  its  first  and 
second  joints,  against  which  point,  being  placed 
evenly  with  one  overlying  the  other,  they  are 

1  It  is  stated  in  this  paragraph  that  the  marks  on  the  reins 
should  be  "  nearly  even,"  or  "  nearly  on  a  line  with  each  other," 
because,  in  its  passage  under  the  little  finger,  across  the  hand, 
and  on  the  outside  of  the  right  rein,  the  left  one  will  be  shortened 
so  that  its  marking  will  be  about  half  an  inch  nearer  the  bit  than 
that  of  the  right  one ;  consequently,  in  order  to  make  the  pres- 
sure upon  the  horse's  mouth  even,  the  right  rein  will  have  to  be 
shortened  to  the  extent  named. 


154  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

to  be  firmly  held  by  pressure  of  the  thumb ; 
the  right  hand  may  now  quit  its  hold  upon  the 
reins.  (Fig.  26.) 

The  reins  having  been  properly  placed  in  the 
left  hand  according  to  the  directions  just  given, 
this  hand,  being  closed,  but  not  too  tightly, 
must  be  held  at  a  distance  of  about  three  inches 
from  the  front  part  of  the  waist,  with  the  wrist 
slightly  rounded,  the  nails  toward  the  body,  the 
back  of  the  hand  toward  the  horse's  head,  and 
the  little  finger  down  and  a  little  nearer  the 
body  than  the  others.  The  under  surface  of  the 
bridle  arm  and  hand,  from  the  tip  of  the  elbow 
to  the  first  joint  of  the  little  finger,  should  be 
held  nearly  in  a  horizontal  line.  The  elbow 
must  be  held  somewhat  close  to  the  side  but 
not  in  contact  with  it,  and  should  be  kept  steady. 
Care  must  be  taken,  when  the  reins  are  held  in 
the  left  hand,  that  the  right  shoulder  be  not 
thrown  back,  nor  the  left  one  elevated,  faulty 
positions  common  to  beginners  when  not  oth- 
erwise instructed.  The  right  arm  should  be 
allowed  to  hang  easily  and  steadily  at  the  side, 
the  whip  being  lightly  held  in  it,  with  its  point 
downward.  When  the  snaffle-reins  are  held  in 
the  left  hand  as  described,  we  may  term  this 
the  "  original  position,"  of  which  all  the  others 
are  variations. 


MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  HORSE.  155 

In  order  that  the  horse  may  move  onward, 
the  left  hand,  holding  the  reins  as  just  described, 
should  be  relaxed  by  turning  the  thumb  down- 
ward and  toward  the  body  until  the  back  of 
the  hand  is  up  and  the  finger-nails  down;  at 
the  same  time,  the  pupil  should  slightly  incline 
her  body  forward,  being  careful  not  to  round 
the  shoulders,  —  aiding  the  movement  by  the 
voice,  or,  if  necessary,  by  a  gentle  tap  of  the 
whip.  The  horse  having  started  onward,  the 
original  position  must  be  gently  resumed. 

In  order  to  turn  the  horse  to  the  right,  the 
left  wrist  must  be  turned  so  as  to  bring  the  nails 
down  and  the  knuckles  up,  —  the  thumb  being 
toward  the  body,  —  at  the  same  time  carrying 
the  little  finger  slightly  to  the  left,  and  drawing 
the  reins  a  little  upward.  This  movement  will 
effect  the  necessary  shortening  of  the  right  rein, 
without  allowing  any  looseness  of  the  left  one. 
The  turn  having  been  accomplished,  the  hand 
must  resume  the  original  position.  It  must  not 
be  forgotten,  that  while  making  this  turn  the 
face  and  shoulders  must  be  turned  somewhat  to 
the  right,  or  in  the  direction  in  which  the  horse 


is  moving. 


To  turn  to  the  left,  the  bridle-hand  being  in 
the  original  position,  its  wrist  must  be  turned  so 
as  to  carry  the  finger-nails  up,  and  the  knuckles 


156  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

down,  simultaneously  moving  the  little  finger 
toward  the  right  and  pressing  it  against  the  left 
rein,  both  reins  being  drawn  slightly  upward. 
This  manoeuvre  shortens  the  left  rein,  without 
relaxing  the  right.  In  this  turn  the  movements 
of  the  horse  should  be  aided  by  the  rider's  face 
and  shoulders  being  turned  a  little  to  the  left. 
The  turn  having  been  made,  the  original  posi- 
tion must  be  resumed. 

The  horse  may  be  stopped  by  simply  turn- 
ing the  wrist  so  as  to  carry  the  finger-nails  up, 
the  knuckles  down,  and  the  little  finger  toward 
the  body,  which  must  be  slightly  inclined  back- 
ward. Now,  by  bracing  the  muscles  of  the 
hand,  bending  the  wrist  and  carrying  the  hand 
farther  in  toward  the  waist,  at  the  same  time 
advancing  the  body,  the  animal  will  be  made 
to  back ;  though,  in  backing  a  horse,  it  will  be 
better  to  employ  both  hands.  After  having 
stopped,  or  backed  the  horse,  to  make  him 
move  onward,  a  course  should  be  pursued, 
with  both  reins  in  the  bridle-hand,  similar  to 
that  described  for  the  same  purpose  when  a 
rein  is  held  in  each  hand. 

To  change  the  snaffle-reins  from  the  left 
to  the  right  hand,  as  is  sometimes  necessary 
in  order  to  adjust  the  skirt,  to  relieve  the  left 
hand,  etc.,  the  following  course  must  be  pur* 


MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  HORSE.  157 

sued,  whether  the  horse  be  in  rapid  or  slow 
motion :  While  the  left  hand  must  retain  its 
position  and  gentle  pressure  of  the  reins  upon 
the  horse's  mouth,  the  right  must  be  carried  to 
and  over  the  left  hand,  its  forefinger  be  passed 
between  the  two  reins,  so  that  the  left  rein  will 
be  on  the  left  side  of  this  finger,  and  the  right 
on  its  right  side,  between  the  first  and  second 
fingers ;  both  reins  must  now  be  carried  to  the 
right,  across  the  palm,  to  the  little  finger ;  the 
hand  must  then  be  firmly  closed,  and  the  thumb 
be  pressed  against  the  left  rein,  holding  it  in 
contact  with  the  index  finger,  —  the  left  hand 
now  gives  up  the  reins.  In  this  change,  while 
the  right  hand  is  being  carried  over  to  the  left, 
this  latter  must  be  held  stationary,  as  any  move- 
ment of  it  to  meet  the  right  hand  may  cause 
the  animal  to  turn  or  swerve  from  his  course, 
and  will  at  the  same  time  interfere  with  his 
gait. 

To  return  the  reins  to  the  left  hand,  the 
following  course  must  be  pursued  :  While  the 
right  hand  must  remain  steady  and  sustain  the 
gait  of  the  horse,  the  left  must  be  carried  to 
and  over  it,  insert  its  little  finger  between  the 
two  reins,  so  that  the  left  one  will  be  on  the  left 
or  outer  side  of  this  finger,  and  the  right  one 
on  its  right  side,  between  it  and  the  third  fin- 


158  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

ger;  then  the  reins  must  be  drawn  through 
the  left  hand,  and  be  arranged  and  held  in  this 
hand  in  the  same  manner  as  explained  when 
describing  the  original  position  of  both  snaffle- 
reins  in  the  bridle-hand. 

These  various  changes  must  be  made  quickly 
and  expertly,  without  altering  the  degree  of 
pressure  or  pull  upon  the  horse's  mouth.  The 
novice  will  find  it  greatly  to  her  advantage  to 
learn  the  management  of  the  reins  before  mount- 
ing the  horse,  and  can  do  so  by  fastening  the 
bit-end  of  the  reins  to  some  stationary  object, 
and  then  practicing  the  different  changes,  until 
she  can  perform  all  these  manoeuvres  without 
looking  at  her  hands  or  the  reins. 

When  both  the  reins  are  held  in  the  left 
hand,  the  rider  has  not  so  much  command  over 
her  horse  as  when  they  are  held  one  in  each 
hand.  For  this  reason,  unless  her  steed  be  ex- 
ceptionally well-trained  and  obedient,  it  will  be 
better,  when  in  a  crowded  thoroughfare,  where 
quick  turns  have  to  be  made,  to  hold  a  rein  in 
each  hand,  and  this  will  become  absolutely  nec- 
essary if  the  animal  be  hard  mouthed  or  un- 
ruly. 

When  the  horse  is  in  motion  and  the  reins  are 
held  in  the  left  hand,  their  separation  may  be 
quickly  effected  by  carrying  the  right  hand  to 


MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  HORSE.  159 

and  over  the  left,  the  latter  retaining  its  steadi- 
ness all  the  time,  and  then  passing  the  first  three 
fingers  of  the  right  hand  between  the  two  reins, 
so  that  they  may  readily  close  upon  the  right 
rein ;  the  thumb  will  then  keep  this  rein  firm 
by  pressing  it  against  the  first  joint  of  the  index 
finger.  The  position  of  the  hands  and  reins  will 
then,  after  a  movement  of  the  left  little  finger 
to  place  the  rein  between  it  and  the  third,  be 
the  same  as  described  for  the  original  position 
where  a  snaffle-rein  is  held  in  each  hand. 

Should  the  reins  become  too  long  when  held 
separately,  they  can  readily  be  shortened  by 
returning  the  right  rein  to  the  bridle-hand, 
placing  it  directly  over  the  left  rein  between 
the  third  and  little  finger,  and  then,  by  means 
of  the  right  hand,  drawing  the  loose  rein  or 
reins  through  the  bridle-hand  to  the  proper 
length,  after  which  the  right  rein  may  again  be 
taken  in  the  right  hand,  as  already  described. 

When  the  reins  are  held  in  one  hand,  they 
can  be  shortened  or  lengthened  by  simply 
seizing  them  at  their  free,  disengaged  ends  with 
the  right  hand,  and  while  this  holds  them  and 
sustains  the  horse,  the  left  hand  must  be  slipped 
along  the  reins,  up  or  down,  as  may  be  re- 
quired, but  without  changing  their  arrange- 
ment. 


160  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

Another  way  of  holding  the  reins  in  the  bri- 
dle-hand is  to  pass  the  right  rein  to  the  right 
of,  and  underneath,  the  index  finger,  and  then 
carry  it  across  the  palm,  so  as  to  escape  beyond 
the  little  finger;  while  the  left  rein  must  be 
passed  to  the  left  of  the  little  finger  (or  be- 
tween it  and  the  third  finger),  and  then  be 
carried  across  the  palm  to  escape  beyond  the  in- 
dex finger.  The  author  cannot  recommend  this 
manner  of  holding  the  reins  to  ladies  who  desire 
to  become  accomplished  and  graceful  riders,  be- 
cause the  movements  of  the  hands  and  arms, 
when  turning,  or  managing  the  horse,  are  much 
more  conspicuous ;  and  there  is  not  that  deli- 
cate correspondence  with  the  animal's  mouth 
that  can  be  obtained  by  the  other  methods  de- 
scribed. 

After  the  pupil  has  become  expert  in  riding 
with  the  snaffle,  she  will  be  ready  for  the  double 
bridle,  or  the  curb-bit  and  bridoon.  The 
double  bridle  must  be  held  in  the  left  hand  in 
the  following  manner:  The  bridoon  or  snaffle- 
reins  are  first  to  be  taken  up,  evenly,  by  the 
right  hand  and  then  the  second  finger  of  the 
left  hand  be  passed  between  these  reins  (the 
left  rein  being  between  the  second  and  third 
fingers,  and  the  right  rein  between  the  first  and 
second),  the  back  of  the  hand  being  directed 


MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  HORSE.  161 

somewhat  upward,  with  the  knuckles  toward 
the  horse's  head ;  the  reins  should  then  be 
pulled  up  by  the  right  hand  just  enough  to  feel 
the  horse's  mouth,  and  carried  across  the  palm 
to  the  index  finger,  where  they  should  be  held 
in  position  by  firm  pressure  with  the  thumb. 

The  curb-reins  are  now  to  be  taken  evenly 
by  the  right  hand,  and  then  the  little  finger  of 
the  left  hand  be  passed  between  the  two  reins, 
the  left  rein  being  upon  the  left  or  outer  side 
of  the  little  finger,  and  the  right  rein  between 
the  little  and  third  fingers ;  both  curb  -  reins 
should  next  be  drawn  upward  by  the  right 
hand  until  they  are  nearly  the  length  of  the 
snaffle,  and  carried  across  the  palm,  one  rein 
overlying  the  other,  to  the  index  finger,  be- 
tween its  first  and  second  joints,  and  between 
the  snaffle-reins  and  the  thumb,  at  which  point 
all  the  reins  must  be  firmly  held  by  pressure 
of  the  thumb  against  them ;  the  right  hand  will 
now  remove  its  hold.  (Fig.  27.)  The  above 
manoeuvring  of  the  reins  will  give  the  "  orig- 
inal position  "  for  the  double  bridle  in  the  left 
hand.  All  these  reins  should  be  of  nearly  equal 
length,  the  snaffle  being  slightly  the  shortest, 
so  that,  while  riding  with  the  latter,  the  curb 
may  be  ready  for  instant  use ;  this  may  be 
brought  into  play  by  simply  turning  the  wrist 
11 


162  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

so  as  to  carry  the  little  finger  up  and  toward 
the  waist.  And  the  full  power  of  the  curb 
may  be  brought  into  action  by  turning  the 
wrist  so  as  to  carry  the  knuckles  down  and  the 
nails  up,  at  the  same  time  drawing  the  little 
finger  toward  the  waist. 

To  shorten  or  lengthen  both  the  curb  and 
snaffle  reins  evenly  without  abandoning  the 
horse  to  himself  for  a  moment,  or  without  ceas- 
ing to  keep  up  his  action, 
the  following  method  may 
be  pursued  :  The  loose,  dis- 
engaged ends  of  all  the 
reins  that  extend  beyond 

Fig.  27. -Double  bridle;  all       the  indeX  finger  °f  the  left 
reins  in  the  bridle-hand.  hand     mugt     be     taken     be_ 

1,  upper  reins,  snaffle  ;  2,  lower 

reins,  curb.  tween  the  thumb  and  fore- 

finger of  the  right  hand,  care  being  taken  dur- 
ing this  manoeuvre  to  keep  up  the  support  to 
the  horse  with  this  hand  ;  the  grasp  of  the  left 
hand  upon  the  reins  must  now  be  sufficiently 
relaxed  to  allow  this  hand  to  slide  along  the 
reins  downward  to  shorten  them,  or  upward  to 
lengthen  them;  this  must  be  effected  without 
deranging  their  adjustment;  when  the  proper 
range  has  been  obtained,  remove  the  right 
hand. 
To  shorten  the  curb  and  lengthen  the 


MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  HORSE.  163 

snaffle-reins:  The  loose,  disengaged  ends  of 
all  the  reins  must  be  held  in  the  same  manner 
as  stated  in  the  preceding  paragraph,  between 
the  thumb  and  index  finger  of  the  right  hand, 
not  omitting  to  keep  up  a  support  to  the  horse ; 
the  grasp  of  the  left  hand  must  now  be  slightly 
relaxed,  and  this  hand  be  slid  up  along  all  the 
reins,  which  movement  will  lengthen  them  in 
the  left  hand.  The  grasp  of  the  right  hand  upon 
the  snaffle-reins  must  now  be  relaxed,  and  the 
left  hand  be  slid  down  along  the  curb-reins,  car- 
rying the  snaffle-reins  with  it,  until  the  proper 
range  or  distance  has  been  attained,  when  the 
right  hand  may  be  removed.  While  these 
changes  are  being  made,  the  right  hand  must 
sustain  the  horse  by  the  curb-reins  until  the  left 
has  obtained  a  firm  hold  upon  all. 

To  shorten  the  snaffle  and  lengthen  the 
curb  reins,  a  course  similar  to  the  one  just  pre- 
ceding must  be  pursued,  except  that  in  this  case 
the  right  hand  must  retain  the  snaffle-reins,  and 
support  the  horse  by  them,  while  the  left  hand, 
in  sliding  down,  will  carry  those  of  the  curb. 
In  all  these  changes  of  the  various  reins,  it  must 
be  remembered  that  after  each  change  has  been 
effected  the  reins  must  be  held  in  place  by  firm 
pressure  of  the  thumb,  as  already  described. 

When  either  of  the  reins  held  in  the  left 


164  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

hand  becomes  loose,  it  may  be  tightened,  by 
carrying  the  right  hand  to  and  over  the  left 
one,  seizing  the  loose  rein  by  its  disengaged  end 
that  hangs  loosely  from  the  left  index  finger, 
and  drawing  it  up  as  far  as  is  necessary.  While 
this  is  being  done,  the  left  hand  must  not  be 
removed  from  its  position,  and  should  continue 
to  keep  up  a  steady  pressure  upon  the  horse's 
mouth. 

In  requiring  the  horse  to  stop,  to  back,  to 
turn,  or  to  advance,  the  management  of  the 
double  bridle-reins  will  be  exactly  the  same  as 
stated  in  the  directions  given  when  holding  the 
snaffle-reins  in  the  left  hand. 

When  both  the  curb  and  the  snaffle  reins 
are  held  in  the  bridle-hand,  they  may  be  changed 
to  the  right  hand,  when  this  is  desired,  as  fol- 
lows :  The  right  hand  must  be  carried  to  the 
left ;  the  second  finger  of  the  right  hand  must 
be  placed  between  the  snaffle-reins  (already  sep- 
arated by  the  second  finger  of  the  left  hand) ; 
and  the  little  finger  of  the  right  hand  between 
the  curb-reins  (already  separated  by  the  little 
finger  of  the  left  hand) ;  this  done,  the  thumb 
and  fingers  of  the  right  hand  must  be  closed 
upon  the  reins,  which  must,  at  the  same  time, 
be  released  by  the  left  hand. 

To  restore  these  reins  to  the  left  hand,  the 


MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  HORSE.  165 

pupil  must  proceed  as  follows:  Carrying  the 
left  hand  to  the  right,  the  second  finger  of  the 
left  hand  must  be  placed  between  the  snaffle- 
reins,  and  the  little  finger  of  this  hand  between 
the  curb  -  reins ;  this  having  been  done,  the 
thumb  and  fingers  must  be  closed  upon  all  the 
reins,  while  the  right  hand  releases  its  hold. 
These  several  changes  can  be  made  whether 
the  horse  be  moving  slowly  or  rapidly,  care  be- 
ing taken  to  effect  them  so  quietly  that  the 
horse  will  not  be  abandoned  to  himself  from 
want  of  support,  nor  interrupted  in  the  rhythm 
of  his  gait. 

If  when  riding  with  the  double  bridle  in  the 
bridle-hand,  very  quick  turns  have  to  be  made, 
or  when  the  horse  will  not  yield  readily  to  the 
movements  of  the  bridle-hand,  it  will  become 
necessary  to  separate  the  reins  by  taking  that 
of  the  right  snaffle  in  the  right  hand ;  this  can 
be  quickly  effected  by  carrying  the  right  hand  to 
and  over  the  left,  and  seizing  the  right  snaffle- 
rein  with  the  first  three  fingers  of  the  right 
hand ;  this  rein  will  pass  between  the  third  and 
little  fingers  and  across  the  palm,  so  that  the 
loose,  disengaged  end  will  escape  from  between 
the  thumb  and  forefinger. 

In  America,  most  lady  riders  prefer  to  guide 
the  horse  with  the  bridle-hand  only ;  in  doing 


166  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

this,  although  they  may  appear  more  careless 
and  graceful,  they  certainly  lose  much  command 
over  the  animal.  The  method  at  present  em- 
ployed by  the 
best  European 
horsewomen, 
who  seldom  ride 

Fig.  28.  —  Double  bridle  ;  a  snaffle  and  a  curb    /,/,jV7)       /A/, 

rein  in  each  hand.  WM/l 

1, 1,  snaffle-reins ;  2,  2,  curb-reins.  ^    the   left 

alone,  is  as  follows:  The  little  finger  of  the 
right  hand  is  to  be  passed  between  the  right  curb 
and  snaffle  reins  in  such  a  way  that  the  curb- 
rein  will  be  on  the  outer  side  of  this  finger,  and 
the  snaffle  between  it  and  the  third  finger ;  both 
reins  must  then  be  carried  across  the  palm,  and 
be  firmly  held  by  the  thumb  against  the  fore- 
finger. The  little  finger  of  the  left  hand  is 
also  to  be  passed  between  the  left  snaffle  and 
curb  reins,  in  a  similar  manner  to  that  just  de- 
scribed, and  the  reins  must  be  held  firm  by  the 
thumb  and  forefinger  of  this  hand.  (Fig.  28.) 
This  arrangement  may  be  termed  the  "  original 
position"  for  a  curb  and  snaffle  rein  in  each 
hand. 

When  the  reins  are  thus  separated,  the  action 
upon  the  horse's  mouth  will  be  much  more  pow- 
erful than  when  they  are  all  placed  in  the  bri- 
dle-hand. They  should  be  held  nearly  even, 


MANAGEMENT  OF   THE  HORSE.  167 

the  snaffle  being  somewhat  shorter  than  the 
curb,  so  that  the  hold  or  pressure  upon  the  ani- 
mal's mouth  may  be  made  by  the  former ;  but 
should  it  be  required  on  any  occasion  to  employ 
the  curb,  this  can  be  brought  into  instant  use 
by  a  slight  turn  of  the  wrists,  that  will  carry 
the  little  fingers  up  and  toward  the  rider's 
waist.  To  stop,  to  back,  to  turn,  or  to  advance, 
the  reins  must  be  managed  in  the  same  way 
as  when  one  snaffle-rein  alone  is  held  in  each 
hand.  In  all  these  various  ways  of  holding  the 
double  bridle,  the  snaffle-reins  should,  as  they 
pass  upward  from  the  bit,  always  be  placed 
above  those  of  the  curb ;  indeed,  it  would  be 
rather  awkward  to  hold  them  otherwise. 

As  already  stated,  when  the  object  for  which 
any  change  of  hands  and  reins  has  been  made 
is  effected,  the  hands  should  always  resume  the 
original  position,  as  explained  for  the  snaffle- 
reins  when  one  is  held  in  each  hand,  —  thus, 
hands  four  inches  from  the  body,  four  inches 
apart,  etc.  The  arms  and  elbows  must  be  kept 
as  steady  as  possible,  all  movements  of  the  reins 
being  made  with  the  wrists  and  fingers,  unless 
the  horse  be  hard  mouthed  or  badly  trained, 
when  the  arms  will  have  to  be  employed  and 
more  force  will  be  required.  But  a  horse  of 
this  kind  should  never  be  ridden  by  a  woman ; 


168  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

and  the  directions  herein  given  will  be  found 
amply  sufficient  to  control  a  well-trained,  prop- 
erly-bitted animal. 

The  preceding  directions  relative  to  holding 
and  managing  the  reins  may  appear  very  tedi- 
ous and  exceedingly  complicated.  But  if  the 
pupil,  commencing  with  the  snaffle-reins,  one  in 
each  hand,  will  carefully  study  and  practice 
each  method  in  succession,  she  will  soon  find 
that  all  these  apparently  difficult  manoeuvres 
are  very  simple  when  put  into  practice,  and 
can  be  readily  learned  in  half  a  dozen  lessons. 
When  she  has  once  fully  mastered  them,  she 
will  be  astonished  to  find  how  little  management, 
when  it  is  of  the  right  kind  and  based  upon  cor- 
rect principles,  will  be  required  to  make  her 
steed  move  in  an  easy  and  pleasant  manner. 

After  the  rein-hold  has  been  acquired,  and 
the  pupil  properly  seated  in  the  saddle,  she  will, 
if  the  reins  are  held  steady,  observe  with  each 
step  of  the  horse  as  he  advances  in  the  canter 
or  gallop,  a  slight  tug  or  pull  upon  the  reins. 
This  pull  will  also  be  simultaneously  felt  by  the 
horse's  mouth,  between  which  and  the  rider's 
hand  or  hands  there  will  be  what  may  be  termed 
a  correspondence.  This  correspondence  gives 
a  support  to  the  horse,  provided  the  rider,  while 
maintaining  an  equal  degree  of  tension  upon  the 


MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  HORSE.  169 

reins,  will  "  give  and  take,"  or,  in  other  words, 
will  allow  the  movements  of  the  bridle-hand  to 
concur  with  those  of  this  tug  or  pull.  A  dead 
pull  may  be  made  by  bracing  the  muscles  of  the 
hand,  tightly  closing  the  fingers  upon  the  reins, 
and  holding  the  hand  immovable ;  but  this 
should  never  be  done,  except  to  convey  some 
imperative  command  to  the  horse,  or  when  he 
attempts  to  gain  the  ascendency.  This  kind  of 
pull  will  interfere  with  the  natural  movements 
of  the  horse's  head,  making  him  move  in  a  con- 
fined, irregular  manner,  and  will  oblige  him  to 
force  the  rider's  hand  or  hands  ;  that  is,  in  or- 
der to  relieve  himself  from  this  restraint,  he 
will  give  a  sudden  downward  jerk  of  his  head, 
which  may  take  the  reins  from  her  hands,  un- 
less she  be  upon  her  guard ;  or  else  he  will  move 
heavily  upon  his  fore-legs,  and  make  his  rider 
support  the  weight  of  his  head  and  neck. 

Should  the  curb  be  used  instead  of  the  snaffle, 
the  result  may  be  still  worse ;  because  when  the 
curb-reins  are  pulled  upon,  the  port  or  arched 
part  of  the  bit  will  come  in  contact  with  the 
roof  of  the  animal's  mouth,  and  will  press  upon 
it  to  a  degree  corresponding  to  the  power  used 
upon  the  reins,  while  the  curb-chain  will  be 
forced  against  the  lower  jaw,  and  if  this  contin- 
ual pressure  or  dead  pull  be  kept  up  the  animal 


170  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

will  experience  considerable  pain.  To  relieve 
himself,  he  will  suddenly  throw  his  head  either 
up  or  down  and  may  even  rear.  In  the  latter 
case;  if  his  rider  does  not  instantly  relax  her 
hand,  he  will  be  apt  to  fall  backward,  which  is 
one  of  the  most  serious  accidents  that  can  hap- 
pen when  riding.  If  this  rigid  pull  upon  the 
curb  be  continued,  the  horse  will  be  certain, 
ultimately,  to  become  hard  mouthed,  if  not 
vicious.  This  is  a  reason  why  so  many  riders, 
though  having  the  double  bridle-reins,  use  only 
the  snaffle,  and  allow  the  curb-reins  to  hang 
quite  loosely,  being  afraid  to  employ  them,  as 
experience  has  taught  them  that  this  rigid  hold 
upon  the  reins  will  be  instantly  resented  by  the 
horse.  Hence  the  curb-reins  appear  to  be  at- 
tached to  the  head-gear  of  their  horses  more  as 
an  article  of  ornament  than  of  utility. 

In  order  that  a  lady's  horse  may  move  lightly 
and  well  upon  his  haunches,  the  curb  will  have 
to  be  employed  occasionally  to  collect  and  re- 
strain him ;  and  when  it  is  managed  properly, 
he  will  advance  in  better  style  than  when  the 
snaffle  alone  is  used.  The  snaffle  will  answer 
a  better  purpose  when  employed  to  guide  the 
horse  in  turning  completely  around,  or  in 
movements  to  the  right  or  to  the  left;  while 
the  curb  will  answer  during  a  straightforward 


MANAGEMENT  OF    THE  HORSE.          171 

motion  to  keep  the  animal  well  up  to  his  action 
and  to  bring  out  his  best  gait,  as  well  as  to  col- 
lect and  restrain  him. 

An  easy  "  give  and  take  "  feeling  can  be  ef- 
fected by  slightly  loosening  or  opening  the  fin- 
gers of  the  bridle-hand  or  hands  as  the  horse 
springs  forward ;  as  the  hand  feels  the  pull  upon 
the  reins,  it  must  yield  to  this  sensation,  and 
will  thus  allow  the  animal  liberty  in  his  spring 
or  advance  movements.  Then,  as  the  action  of 
the  horse  lessens  or  recedes,  the  reins  will  be 
felt  to  slacken,  when  the  fingers  should  be 
closed,  which  will  tighten  the  reins,  support  the 
animal,  and  keep  him  under  control.  This 
"  give  and  take  "  movement  should  occur  alter- 
nately and  simultaneously  with  the  cadence  of 
each  step  of  the  steed,  and  should  be  effected 
without  any  backward  or  forward  movements 
of  the  arm  or  arms,  which  must  be  held  steady, 
—  except  in  a  rapid  gallop,  in  which  case  both 
the  hand  and  arm  will,  to  a  certain  extent,  have 
to  move  to  and  fro.  In  the  "  give  and  take  " 
movement  the  reins  should  not  be  allowed  to 
slip  in  the  slightest  degree,  nor  to  be  jerked 
from  the  rider's  hand  by  any  sudden  motion  of 
the  horse's  head ;  on  the  contrary,  they  should 
always  be  held  firm  between  the  thumb  and  the 
first  and  second  joints  of  the  index  finger,  the 


172  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

other  fingers  alone  performing  the  alternate  ac- 
tion of  loosening  and  tightening  the  reins. 

The  reader  will  be  better  enabled  to  under- 
stand this  explanation  if  she  will  take  a  piece  of 
elastic,  pass  it  around  her  right  hand,  which  will 
correspond  to  the  horse's  mouth,  and  then  hold 
the  two  ends  in  her  left  hand,  exactly  in  the 
manner  explained  for  holding  the  double  bridle- 
reins  in  one  hand.  Now,  by  making  tension 
on  the  elastic  (or  reins)  with  the  left  hand,  so 
that  the  right  (or  supposed  horse's  mouth)  can 
just  feel  this  pressure,  a  correspondence  will  be 
formed  between  these  two  hands  (or  bridle-hand 
and  supposed  horse's  mouth)  through  which  the 
slightest  movement  of  the  left  hand,  or  of  its 
second,  third,  or  fourth  fingers,  will  be  immedi- 
ately felt  by  the  right  hand ;  then,  while  hold- 
ing the  elastic  (or  reins)  firmly,  by  pressure, 
between  the  thumb  and  index  finger,  by  alter- 
nately opening  and  closing  the  fingers  of  the 
left  hand,  she  will  observe  that  when  her  fin- 
gers are  closed  there  will  be  quite  a  tension 
upon  the  elastic  and  consequently  upon  the 
right  hand,  and  when  they  are  slightly  opened 
this  will  become  flaccid.  The  relaxation  and 
contraction  of  the  hand  constitutes  the  "give 
and  take"  movement,  which  causes  the  horse  to 
move  easily,  pleasantly,  and  with  perfect  free- 


MANAGEMENT  OF   THE  HORSE.  173 

dom,  while  at  the  same  time  he  is  kept  in  entire 
obedience  to  his  rider.  Indeed,  this  movement 
is  the  grand  secret  of  good  riding  and  correct 
management  of  the  horse,  and  there  can  be  no 
good  riding  without  it. 

With  this  movement  there  should  always  be 
a  certain  support  or  pull  upon  the  horse's 
mouth,  —  firmer  or  lighter  according  to  the 
sensitiveness  of  his  mouth,  as  some  animals  are 
harder  mouthed  than  others,  and  consequently 
require  a  firmer  support ;  —  this  tension  or 
pressure  should  be  rather  light  in  the  walk  and 
canter,  firmer  in  the  trot,  and  very  light  in  the 
hand  gallop.  In  the  rapid  gallop,  the  horse  re- 
quires considerable  support. 

In  all  cases  of  restiveness,  except  in  rearing, 
raising  the  bridle  -  hands  will  give  more  com- 
mand over  the  horse,  as  it  will  cause  him  to 
keep  up  his  head,  and  thus  while  lessening  the 
power  of  the  animal  will  at  the  same  time  add 
to  that  of  the  rider.  On  the  contrary,  should 
the  horse  lower  his  head,  and  the  bridle-hands 
be  held  low,  the  power  of  the  animal  will  be 
augmented  and  he  can  bid  defiance  to  his  rider, 
unless  she  can  raise  his  head.  She  will  have  to 
do  this  in  a  gentle  but  firm  manner,  soliciting, 
as  it  were,  the  desired  elevation  of  his  head  by 
raising  her  hands  and  quickly  relaxing  and  con- 


174  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

tracting  the  fingers,  but  being  careful  to  keep 
the  reins  in  place  between  the  thumb  and  index 
finger  of  each  hand  ;  she  will  thus  gradually 
oblige  him  to  raise  his  neck  with  his  chin  drawn 
in,  so  that  control  over  his  mouth  may  be  re- 
gained. 

Should  he  resist  this  method,  the  reins  must 
be  momentarily  slackened,  and  then  a  decided 
jerk  or  pull  be  given  them  in  an  upward  di- 
rection; this  will  cause  a  sharp  twinge  in  his 
mouth,  and  make  him  raise  his  head.  In  these 
manoeuvres  the  curb-bit  should  be  used,  and  as 
the  animal  raises  his  head  the  rider  should 
gently  relax  the  reins,  and  also  be  on  her  guard 
lest  he  rear.  In  some  instances  a  decided  "  saw- 
ing "  of  his  mouth  with  the  snaffle  —  that  is, 
sharply  pulling  upon  one  rein  and  then  upon 
the  other,  and  in  rather  quick  succession  —  will 
cause  him  to  raise  his  head  and  neck. 

When  a  horse  is  obedient,  all  changes  in  the 
degree  of  pressure  upon  his  mouth  should  be 
made  gradually,  because,  if  a  sudden  transition 
be  made  from  a  firm  hand  to  a  relaxed  one,  he 
will  be  abruptly  deprived  of  the  support  upon 
which  he  has  been  depending  and  may  be 
thrown  forward  on  his  shoulders.  Again,  to 
pass  precipitately  from  a  slack  rein  to  a  tight 
one  will  give  a  violent  shock  to  his  mouth, 


MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  HORSE.          175 

cause  him  to  displace  his  head,  and  destroy  the 
harmony  of  his  movements.  As  a  means  of 
punishment,  some  riders  jerk  suddenly,  repeat- 
edly, and  violently  upon  the  reins;  this  "jag- 
ging on  the  reins  "  is  a  great  mistake,  and  will 
be  likely  to  result  in  more  harm  to  the  rider 
than  to  the  horse,  as  the  latter  may  suddenly 
rear,  or  else  have  a  bad  temper  aroused  that 
will  be  difficult  to  overcome. 

When  riding  on  the  road  there  will  be  times 
when  the  horse  will  require  more  liberty  of  the 
reins,  as,  for  instance,  when  his  head  or  neck 
becomes  uncomfortable  from  being  kept  too 
long  in  one  position,  when  he  has  an  attack  of 
cough,  when  he  wants  to  dislodge  a  troublesome 
fly,  etc.  In  giving  this  liberty  when  occasion 
requires,  the  reins  must  not  be  allowed  to  slip 
through  the  hands,  but  the  arms  should  be 
gradually  advanced,  without,  however,  inclining 
the  body  forward. 

The  movements  of  the  body  must  correspond 
with  those  of  the  horse  and  of  the  rider's 
hands ;  thus,  when  the  animal  is  moving  regu- 
larly and  straight  forward,  the  hands,  or  bridle- 
hand,  being  held  firm  and  steady  immediately 
in  front  of  the  waist,  the  body  must  then  be 
seated  squarely,  with  its  front  part  to  the  front, 
so  that  the  rider  can  look  directly  between  the 


176  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

ears  of  her  steed.  When  the  animal  turns  com- 
pletely around  to  the  right  or  to  the  left,  the 
shoulders  and  head  of  the  rider  must  also  turn 
a  little  toward  the  direction  taken  by  the  horse, 
while  the  hand  must  be  slightly  carried  in  an 
opposite,  direction.  When  turning  a  corner,  the 
entire  body  from  the  hips  upward  must  in- 
cline toward  the  centre  of  the  circle  of  which 
the  turn  forms  an  arc,  or,  in  other  words,  the 
body  must  incline  toward  the  direction  taken 
by  the  horse,  and  the  degree  of  this  inclination 
must  be  proportioned  to  the  bend  of  the  horse's 
body,  and  to  the  rapidity  of  his  pace  while 
turning. 

When  the  horse  advances,  and  the  hands 
are  relaxed,  the  body  must  momentarily  lean 
slightly  forward  without  rounding  the  shoul- 
ders; this  will  aid  the  horse  in  commencing 
his  forward  movement.  In  stopping  him,  the 
rider's  body  must  be  inclined  slightly  back- 
ward as  the  hands  rein  him  in.  All  these  move- 
ments should  be  made  gradually,  and  never  ab- 
ruptly. 

When  a  horse  stumbles,  or  plunges  from  vi- 
ciousness  or  high  spirits,  the  rider's  body  must 
be  inclined  backward,  as  this  will  enable  her  to 
maintain  her  balance  more  effectually  as  well 
as  to  throw  more  weight  upon  the  reins.  On 


MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  HORSE.  177 

the  contrary,  when  he  rears  the  bridle-hand 
must  be  instantly  advanced  or  relaxed,  the 
body  at  the  same  time  being  inclined  well  for- 
ward, which  will  throw  the  rider's  weight  upon 
the  animal's  shoulders  and  fore-legs,  and  cause 
him  to  lower  his  fore-feet  to  the  ground. 

A  horse  is  said  to  be  united  or  collected 
when  he  moves  easily  in  a  regular,  stylish  man- 
ner, well  on  his  haunches,  with  head  and  neck 
in  proper  position,  his  rider  exercising  perfect 
control  over  him  by  gentle  pressure  upon  his 
mouth,  and  keeping  up  the  regular  movements 
of  the  animal  by  a  quiet  and  dexterous  "  give 
and  take  "  action  of  her  hands. 

He  is  disunited  when  he  moves  in  an  irreg- 
ular manner,  or  heavily  upon  his  fore-legs,  oc- 
casioning the  rider  to  support  the  weight  of  his 
neck  and  shoulders ;  also,  when  the  reins  are 
too  slack  and  exercise  no  pressure  upon  his 
mouth,  in  which  case,  having  no  aid  or  support 
from  his  rider's  hand,  he  will  move  carelessly, 
or  exactly  as  he  pleases. 

In  collecting  a  horse,  the  aid  of  the  whip 
and  the  left  leg  will  frequently  be  required, 
as  the  rider's  hand  alone  may  not  be  sufficient. 
In  such  a  case,  the  left  leg  must  be  lightly 
pressed  against  his  left  side  and  the  whip  at 
the  same  time  be  pressed  against  his  right 
12 


178  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN, 

side ;  these  in  conjunction  with  the  action  of  the 
bridle-hand,1  as  heretofore  explained,  will  col- 
lect him  and  bring  him  up  to  his  bridle  with  his 
haunches  well  under  him,  —  the  proper  position 
for  starting.  As  soon  as  he  moves  there  should 
be  only  a  light  pressure  on  his  mouth.  In 
order  to  perform  the  above  feat  effectively,  the 
whip  must  not  be  too  limber  and  must  always 
be  held  with  its  lash  downward.  This  simulta- 
neous pressure  of  the  whip  and  left  leg  has  the 
same  effect  in  collecting  the  horse  as  that  of 
the  horseman's  right  and  left  legs.  Should  the 
horse  flag  in  his  movements  or  move  heavily 
upon  his  fore-legs,  a  repetition  of  this  pres- 
sure of  the  leg  and  whip?  in  conjunction  with 
the  proper  movements  of  the  bridle-hand,  will 
bring  him  well  on  his  haunches  and  lighten  his 
action. 

The  horse  is  always  animated  by  mild  taps  of 
the  whip,  light  pressure  of  the  hand  upon  the 
curb,  a  clacking  of  the  tongue,  or  an  urging 
tone  of  his  mistress's  voice.  He  is  soothed  and 
rendered  confident  by  mild  and  encouraging 
tones  of  voice,  by  the  rider's  sitting  easily,  by 

1  The  bridle-hand  being  in  the  original  position  for  the  double 
bridle,  the  curb  should  be  brought  into  action  by  a  turn  of  the 
wrist,  which  will  carry  the  little  finger  in  toward  the  waist ; 
and  this,  in  conjunction  with  the  leg  and  whip,  will  collect  tlie 
horse. 


MANAGEMENT  OF   THE  HORSE.  179 

a  gentle  hold  upon  the  reins,  and  by  caressing 
pats  upon  his  neck  and  shoulders. 

In  the  directions  given  in  this  chapter,  nec- 
essarily involving  more  or  less  repetition,  the 
author  has  endeavored  to  be  as  clear,  compre- 
hensible, and  simple  as  possible.  And  the  rider 
will  find  it  of  much  greater  advantage  to  have 
these  instructions  printed,  than  to  be  required 
to  learn  them  orally,  as  she  can  read  and  re-read 
them  at  pleasure  and  have  them  thoroughly 
committed  to  memory  before  mounting  her 
horse.  And,  although  it  has  required  many 
pages  to  present  these  instructions  to  the  read- 
er, she  will  find  that  their  application  will  prove 
very  simple,  and  will  also  be  agreeably  sur- 
prised to  observe  the  great  control  she  will  have 
over  the  feelings  and  movements  of  her  steed 
through  their  agency.  Horses  are  generally 
very  sagacious,  and  appear  to  recognize  promptly 
any  timidity,  awkwardness,  or  ignorance  on  the 
part  of  their  riders,  and,  according  to  their  tem- 
per or  disposition,  will  take  advantage  of  such 
recognition,  either  by  advancing  carelessly  or 
by  manifesting  trickiness  or  viciousness.  The 
best  trained  horse  always  requires  to  be  kept 
under  command,  but  by  kind  treatment  and 
correct  management.  The  horse,  when  ridden 
by  a  finished  horsewoman,  knows  that  although 


180  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

allowed  to  move  with  a  light  rein  he  is  under 
the  control  of  a  masterly  hand  that  will  aid  him 
in  his  efforts  to  please,  but  will  instantly  bring 
him  into  submission  if  he  does  not  yield  entire 
obedience. 


CHAPTER  VII. 

THE   WALK. 

"And  do  you  not  love  at  evening's  hour, 

By  the  light  of  the  sinking  sun, 
To  wend  your  way  o'er  the  widening  moor, 
Where  the  silvery  mists  their  mystery  pour, 

While  the  stars  come  one  by  one  ? 
Over  the  heath  by  the  mountain's  side, 
Pensive  and  sweet  is  the  evening's  ride." 

E.  PAXTON  HOOD. 

IN  walking,  the  horse  moves  nearly  simultane- 
ously the  two  legs  that  are  diagonally  opposite 
to  each  other,  first  one  pair,  and  then  the  other. 
Thus,  the  right  fore  and  the  left  hind  leg  make 
one  step  nearly  at  the  same  time,  and  when 
these  have  touched  the  ground,  the  left  fore 
and  the  right  hind  leg  are  raised  and  advanced 
in  a  similar  manner,  and  so  on  in  succession. 
In  this  manner  as  one  pair  of  legs  moves  on- 
ward the  other  pair  sustains  the  weight  of  the 
animal ;  and  of  the  two  legs  that  act  together 
the  fore  one  is  raised  from  as  well  as  placed 
upon  the  ground  slightly  previous  to  the  hind 
one.  This  is  the  reason  why  a  horse  which 
walks  well  and  in  a  regular  manner  will  nearly 


182  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

or  quite  cover  the  foot-marks  of  his  fore-feet 
with  those  of  his  hind  ones.  If  the  hind-foot 
should  fall  short  of  covering  the  track  of  the 
fore  one,  the  animal  will  not  be  a  good  w^alker ; 
if,  on  the  contrary,  it  should  pass  somewhat  be- 
yond the  mark  of  the  fore-foot,  it  will  indicate 
him  to  be  a  fast  walker,  although  he  may  over- 
reach. 

In  both  the  walk  and  the  trot,  when  the  horse 
is  moving  regularly,  a  quick  ear  can  detect  four 
distinct  beats  or  tappings  of  the  feet ;  when 
these  beats  mark  equal  time  and  sound  exactly 
alike  for  each  footstep,  it  may  be  inferred  that 
the  horse  is  a  good  walker  as  well  as  a  good 
trotter,  and  that  all  his  legs  are  sound.  But  if 
one  beat  be  lighter  than  the  others,  it  may  be 
assumed  that  there  is  some  disease  in  the  foot 
or  leg  that  produces  this  beat.  Horse-dealers 
will  often  endeavor  to  disguise  this  defect  by 
adopting  means  to  disable  the  animal  tempora- 
rily in  his  healthy  leg,  as  the  treads  will  then 
be  made  more  nearly  alike,  though  the  slight 
shade  of  difference  thus  effected  can  be  readily 
detected  by  a  quick,  experienced  ear.  These 
hoof -beats  are  best  heard  when  made  on  a  hard 
road. 

A  horse  that  is  a  good  walker  will  move  with 
a  quick  step,  his  hind-legs  well  under  him,  his 


THE    WALK.  183 

• 

foot-taps  marking  regular  time,  and  his  feet 
measuring  exact  distances,  while  he  will  lift  his 
feet  just  high  enough  to  escape  obstructions  on 
the  road,  thrusting  each  foot  well  forward,  and 
placing  it  lightly,  though  firmly  and  squarely, 
upon  the  ground.  He  will  advance  in  a  straight 
line,  vacillating  neither  to  the  right  nor  left, 
and  should  be  able  to  accomplish  at  least  from 
four  to  four  and  a  half  miles  per  hour. 

The  walk  of  a  lady's  horse  is  almost  always 
neglected,  and  as  a  good  walk  is  a  sure  founda- 
tion for  perfection  in  all  other  gaits,  a  lady 
should  positively  insist  that  her  steed  be  thor- 
oughly trained  in  this  particular ;  especially  if 
she  be  large  and  majestic  looking,  because  the 
walk  will  then  become  her  specialty.  A  stout 
woman  does  not  ride  to  the  best  advantage  at 
a  rapid  gait,  but  upon  a  horse  that  has  the  walk 
in  perfection  she  presents  an  imposing,  queen- 
like  appearance.  If  her  steed,  however,  be  al- 
lowed to  saunter  along  in  a  careless,  listless 
manner,  all  the  charm  will  be  destroyed,  and 
the  tout  ensemble  will  present  by  no  means  a 
pleasing  picture. 

The  beginner  in  riding  should  learn  to  sit  and 
manage  her  horse  in  a  walk,  and  should  never 
attempt  to  ride  a  faster  gait  until  she  can  col- 
lect her  steed,  make  him  advance,  turn  him  to 


184  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

the  right  and  to  the  left,  and  rein  him  back ; 
this  last  movement  is  a  very  important  one, 
with  which  few  teachers  strive  to  make  their 
pupils  thoroughly  acquainted.  Reining  back 
will  not  only  bring  the  horse  under  better  com- 
mand, but,  with  a  lady's  horse,  a  short  reining 
back  from  time  to  time  will  improve  his  style 
of  motion  in  his  various  gaits;  besides  which, 
the  rider  may  on  some  occasion  be  placed  in  a 
situation  in  which,  for  her  own  safety,  she  will 
be  compelled  to  move  her  horse  backward. 

To  begin  the  walk :  The  pupil,  having 
placed  herself  in  the  saddle,  must  not  allow  her 
horse  to  move  until  she  is  quite  prepared,  her 
skirt  adjusted,  and  the  whip  and  reins  properly 
arranged  in  her  hands.  Then,  drawing  gently 
upon  the  curb  and  snaffle  reins,  a  little  more 
upon  the  former  than  upon  the  latter,  and  at 
the  same  time  gently  pressing  against  the  ani- 
mal's side  with  her  left  leg,  and  against  his  right 
side  with  the  whip,  as  heretofore  explained,  she 
will  thus  collect  her  horse,  and  start  him  upon 
the  walk.  As  soon  as  he  has  begun  to  move 
forward,  the  pressure  of  the  leg  and  whip  must 
cease,  and  the  hand  or  hands  must  be  held 
steady  on  the  snaffle,  the  curb  no  longer  being 
required,  unless  the  animal  flags  in  his  move- 
ments. The  hold  upon  the  snaffle  must  be  only 


Fig.  29. -The  Walk. 


THE    WALK.  187 

tense  enough  to  enable  the  rider  to  feel  the 
beat  of  the  horse's  action  as  he  places  each  foot 
upon  the  ground,  and  to  give  him  a  slight  sup- 
port and  keep  up  an  even  action.  Should  this 
support  be  too  heavy,  his  step  will  be  shortened, 
and  he  will  be  unable  to  move  freely ;  should 
it  be  insufficient,  he  will  carry  his  head  low,  will 
not  raise  his  feet  high  enough  to  escape  stum- 
bling, will  knock  his  toes  against  every  inequal- 
ity of  the  ground,  and  both  he  and  his  rider 
will  present  an  indolent  and  listless  aspect.  Her 
attitude  should  be  easy  and  erect,  but  she  should 
yield  herself  slightly  to  the  movements  of  the 
horse  although  without  showing  any  lack  of 
steadiness.  (Fig.  29.) 

Should  the  horse  be  too  much  animated  by 
the  reins  and  whip  at  the  commencement  of 
the  walk,  he  may  enter  upon  a  jog  trot,  or  an 
amble,  in  which  case  he  must  be  checked  by 
gradually  reining  him  in  until  he  has  settled 
into  a  walk.  Should  he,  on  the  contrary,  not 
be  sufficiently  animated,  he  will  not  exert  him- 
self and  will  move  in  an  irregular  and  indolent 
manner ;  in  this  case,  he  must  be  made  to  raise 
his  head  by  a  slight  pull  upon  the  curb-reins, 
as  already  explained,  and  be  again  collected  and 
animated  by  the  aid  of  the  leg  and  whip. 

A  short,   abrupt  turn  in  the  walk   should 
12 


188  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

never  be  made,  if  it  can  possibly  be  avoided  ; 
it  is  only  in  case  of  emergency  that  it  should 
be  attempted,  and  even  then  it  is  more  or  less 
dangerous,  because,  as  the  horse  moves  his  legs 
diagonally  in  the  walk,  he  may,  when  abruptly 
turned,  place  one  leg  in  the  way  of  the  other, 
be  thrown  off  his  balance,  and  fall.  When 
turning  a  horse  completely  around,  it  should 
always  be  done  in  a  deliberate  manner.  This 
rule  should  never  be  forgotten,  especially  by  a 
novice. 

During  her  first  lessons  in  the  walk,  the  pu- 
pil, in  attempting  to  turn  her  horse  to  the  right, 
to  the  left,  or  completely  around,  must  move 
him  very  slowly,  pressing  her  whip  and  left  leg 
against  his  sides,  and  keeping  him  well-balanced 
by  proper  support  upon  both  snaffle-reins.  In 
making  a  turn  to  the  right,  with  a  snaffle-rein 
in  each  hand,  the  left  hand  must  not  abandon 
the  horse,  but  retain  a  steady  pressure  upon  his 
mouth,  while  the  tension  upon  the  right  rein 
must  be  increased  by  moving  the  right  hand 
and  its  littla  finger  up  and  toward  the  body,  at 
the  same  time  holding  this  hand  a  little  lower 
than  the  left  one.  The  tension  upon  the  right 
rein  should  be  nearly  double  that  made  upon 
the  left,  and  should  be  kept  up  until  the  turn 
has  been  completed.  In  the  turn  to  the  right, 


THE    WALK.  189 

the  left  leg  should  make  a  little  stronger  pres- 
sure than  that  made  by  the  whip,  to  prevent  the 
animal  from  throwing  his  croup  too  far  to  the 
left ;  and  in  making  the  turn  to  the  left,  the 
whip  should  press  more  strongly  than  the  leg, 
in  order  to  prevent  the  croup  from  being  car- 
ried too  far  to  the  right. 

In  attempting  to  turn  completely  around  to 
the  left,  the  same  manoeuvring,  though  in  an 
opposite  direction,  will  be  required ;  the  above 
directions  for  the  two  hands  being  simply  re- 
versed. 

Should  the  horse  fail  to  turn  in  a  regular 
manner,  or  refuse  to  obey  the  reins  readily,  he 
must  be  collected,  and  brought  up  to  the  bridle 
in  the  manner  already  described.  This  will 
cause  him  to  raise  his  head  and  place  himself  in 
a  position  to  move  in  the  required  manner,  and 
when  this  is  done  the  rider  must  slacken  the 
tension  upon  the  curb,  and  turn  him  with  the 
snaffle-rein. 

In  making  these  turns,  care  must  be  taken  to 
have  ample  space,  and  it  must  not  be  forgotten, 
that  while  increasing  the  tension  upon  the  rein 
required  to  direct  the  turn,  the  other  should  not 
be  slackened  or  abandoned,  but  should  continue 
to  give  support  to  the  horse,  though  in  a  less 
degree ;  and  also  that  this  tension  upon  the 


190  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

reins  is  much  more  important  when  making  a 
partial  or  complete  turn,  than  when  the  animal 
is  moving  forward  in  a  straight  line.  For,  if 
the  reins  be  slackened,  and  the  horse  left  to 
himself,  he  will  turn  in  an  awkward  manner, 
may  get  one  leg  in  the  way  of  the  other,  and 
perhaps  stumble  or  fall,  especially  if  the  ground 
be  slippery,  or  rough  and  uneven. 

It  is  a  habit  with  many  lady  riders,  as  well  as 
with  multitudes  of  horsemen,  to  make  ^the  turn 
by  carrying  the  bridle-hand  in  the  direction  of 
the  turn,  thus  pressing  the  outward  rein,  or  the 
one  opposite  to  the  direction  of  the  turn,  against 
the  horse's  neck,  —  the  inward  rein  being  com- 
pletely slackened.  This  is  a  very  dangerous 
fault  and  one  that  instantly  betrays  ignorance 
of  correct  horsemanship,  because  the  animal  is 
thus  left  without  any  support  at  a  time  when 
it  is  most  needed.  If  a  rider  has  any  regard 
for  her  own  safety,  she  will  remember  this  very 
important  rule,  namely,  to  support  the  horse  on 
both  reins  when  making  a  turn. 

When  all  the  reins  are  held  in  the  bridle-hand 
and  a  turn  is  to  be  made  to  the  left,  the  fault  is 
sometimes  committed  of  carrying  the  right  hand 
over  to  assist  the  left  by  pulling  upon  th§  left 
rein ;  this  is  frequently  done  by  ladies  who 
have  not  been  properly  instructed,  and  gives 


THE    WALK.  191 

them  an  awkward  appearance.  When  riding 
with  the  double  bridle  in  the  bridle-hand,  if  the 
movements  of  the  horse  be  controlled  by  this 
hand  and  wrist,  as  explained  in  the  preceding 
chapter,  the  turn  to  the  right  or  to  the  left 
can  be  effected  without  abandoning  the  horse 
by  relaxing  one  of  the  reins,  and  also  without 
the  assistance  of  the  other  hand.  These  ma- 
noeuvres, accomplished  easily  and  gracefully, 
indicate  the  well-instructed  and  correct  bridle- 
hand,  the  well  -  trained  horse,  and  the  accom- 
plished horsewoman,  who  will  appear  to  manage 
her  steed  more  by  mental  influence  than  by  any 
perceptible  movements  of  her  hands. 

To  stop  in  the  walk,  in  a  correct  and  regu- 
lar manner,  is  a  sure  criterion  of  a  good  horse- 
woman, one  that  has  her  steed  under  complete 
control,  for  this  stop  renders  him  more  obedi- 
ent, and  tends  to  collect  him  and  to  bring  his 
haunches  into  a  pliant  condition.  To  accom- 
plish this  stop  properly,  the  rider  must  brace 
her  arms  firmly  against  her  sides,  —  being  care- 
ful not  to  let  her  elbows  protrude  backward, 
—  throw  her  shoulders  back,  hold  both  reins 
evenly  and  firmly,  and  tighten  the  tension  upon 
them  by  turning  the  hand  and  little  fingers  up 
and  carrying  them  toward  the  waist,  at  the 
same  time  not  omitting  to  press  gently  against 


192  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

the  horse's  sides  with  the  leg  and  whip.  All 
this  should  be  accomplished  by  one  simultaneous 
movement,  and  the  degree  of  tension  made  on 
the  reins  should  be  in  proportion  to  the  sensi- 
tiveness of  the  horse's  mouth. 

If  the  left  leg  and  whip  be  not  employed  in 
making  the  stop,  the  horse  when  brought  to  a 
stand  may  throw  his  weight  upon  his  shoul- 
ders and  fore-legs,  —  which  he  should  never  be 
allowed  to  do,  as  it  will  destroy  the  pleasing 
effect  of  the  stop,  and  cause  him  to  become  dis- 
united. The  animal  should  be  so  nicely  balanced 
upon  his  haunches  when  he  stops,  that,  with  a 
little  more  liberty  of  rein,  he  can  readily  move 
forward  in  a  united  'and  collected  manner.  The 
reins  must  not  be  abruptly  jerked,  but  be  drawn 
upon,  as  stated  before,  in  a  gradual  and  equal 
manner.  After  the  stop  is  completed,  the  reins 
may  be  so  far  relaxed  as  to  enable  the  horse  to 
again  advance,  should  it  be  required.  The  stop 
should  always  be  made  when  the  animal  is  ad- 
vancing straight  forward,  and  never,  if  it  can 
possibly  be  avoided,  when  making  a  turn  or  go- 
ing around  a  corner. 

If,  when  attempting  to  stop  the  horse,  he 
should  toss  up  his  heady  the  bridle-hand  must 
be  kept  low  and  firm,  and  the  right  hand  be 
pressed  against  his  neck  until  his  head  is  low- 


THE   WALK.  193 

ered,  when  the  rein-hold  may  be  relaxed.  In 
such  a  case,  the  rider  must  be  on  her  guard,  as 
a  horse  which  stops  in  this  manner  may  rear, 
when  she  must  immediately  yield  the  reins. 

The  stop,  especially  in  rapid  gaits  and  when 
effected  suddenly,  is  very  trying  to  the  horse ; 
it  should  therefore  be  made  only  when  neces- 
sary, and  never  to  display  the  rider's  superior 
command  and  excellent  horse womanship  ;  many 
horses,  particularly  those  having  weak  loins, 
have  been  caused  much  suffering  and  have  had 
their  dispositions  completely  ruined  by  a  too 
frequent  and  injudicious  practice  of  the  stop. 

In  reining  back  or  backing  in  the  walk,  the 
horse  bends  his  haunches  and  places  one  of  his 
hind-legs  under  his  body,  upon  which  to  rest 
and  balance  himself ;  this  enables  him  to  collect 
force  to  impel  his  croup  backward.  To  favor 
this  movement,  the  horse  must  be  collected, 
brought  to  stand  square  and  even  on  his  fore- 
legs, and  then  be  reined  backward  by  a  firm, 
steady,  and  equal  pull  upon  both  the  right  and 
left  snaffle-reins.1  The  hands  should  be  held 
low  and  directly  in  front  of  the  body,  with  the 
knuckles  down,  and  the  little  fingers  turned  up 
and  carried  toward  the  body.  During  this 

1  If  the  horse  be  tender  in  the  mouth  the  snaffle-reins  had 
better  be  used  in  backing  ;  if  not,  the  curb. 
13 


194  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

whole  movement  care  must  be  taken  not  to  ele- 
vate the  hands.  The  body  of  the  rider  must 
bend  somewhat  forward,  with  'the  waist  drawn 
in,  but  without  any  rounding  of  the  shoulders, 
while  the  leg  and  the  whip  must  make  gentle 
pressure  against  the  horse's  sides,  so  as  to 
"  bring  him  up  to  the  bridle,"  and  prevent  his 
deviating  from  the  line  in  which  it  is  desired  to 
back  him.  The  backing  must  never  be  made 
by  one  continuous  pull ;  but  as  soon  as  the 
movement  is  commenced,  the  hands  and  body  of 
the  rider  must  yield  so  that  the  horse  may  re- 
gain his  balance,  after  which  he  may  again  be 
urged  backward.  These  actions  should  occur 
alternately,  so  that  with  every  step  backward 
the  rider  will  yield  her  hands,  and  immediately 
draw  them  back  again,  continuing  these  move- 
ments until  the  horse  has  backed  as  far  as  de- 
sired. If,  instead  of  this  course,  a  steady  pull 
be  made,  the  horse  may  lose  his  balance  and 
fall,  or  may  be  compelled  to  rear. 

When  reining  the  horse  back  the  body  must 
never  be  inclined  backward,  as  is  necessary 
when  stopping  the  horse  ;  on  the  contrary,  it 
must  always  be  inclined  somewhat  forward,  as 
this  will  enable  the  hands  to  manage  the  reins 
more  effectively,  will  give  the  horse  more  free- 
dom to  recede,  and,  should  he  rear,  will  place 


THE   WALK.  195 

the  rider  in  the  proper  balance.  Should  the 
rider  unfortunately  incline  her  body  backward, 
and  the  horse  rear,  she  would  probably  be  un- 
seated, and  should  she  pull  upon  the  reins  in 
order  to  sustain  herself  and  keep  her  seat,  the 
animal  would  be  drawn  backward,  and  probably 
fall  upon  her. 

In  backing,  the  pull  upon  the  reins  must 
never  be  made  suddenly,  but  always  gradually, 
the  hand  rather  soliciting  than  compelling. 
When  the  reins  are  suddenly  pulled  upon,  the 
horse  is  very  apt  to  get  his  hind-legs  too  far 
forward  under  him,  in  which  case  it  is  impossi- 
ble for  him  to  move  backward. 

In  reining  the  horse  directly  backward,  should 
his  croup  move  out  of  line  to  the  right,  the 
pressure  of  the  whip  must  be  increased,  or  gen- 
tle taps  be  given  with  it  upon  his  right  side 
back  of  the  saddle-flap,  the  hand  at  the  same 
time  increasing  the  tension  upon  the  right  rein. 
The  taps  of  the  whip  must  be  very  light,  lest 
the  animal  turn  too  much  to  the  left. 

Should  the  croup  swerve  to  the  left,  the  rider 
must  press  her  left  leg  against  her  horse's  side, 
or  give  light  taps  with  her  left  heel  upon  his 
side,  turning  the  point  of  the  toe  out,  moving 
the  leg  a  little  back,  and  slightly  separating  the 
knee  from  the  side  of  the  saddle,  in  order  to 


196  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

give  these  taps ;  at  the  same  time  she  must  in- 
crease the  tension  upon  the  left  rein  until  the 
horse  is  brought  into  line. 

When  it  is  desired  to  rein  back,  but  with  an 
inclination  to  the  right,  a  slight  extra  bearing 
or  pull  must  be  made  upon  the  left  rein,  with- 
out relaxing  the  steady  tension  upon  the  right 
one.  A  pressure  with  the  whip  upon  the  right 
side  of  the  horse  must  at  the  same  time  be  kept 
up,  in  order  that  he  may  not  carry  his  croup 
too  far  to  the  right. 

In  reining  back  with  an  inclination  to  the  left, 
the  pull  upon  the  right  rein  must  be  slightly  in- 
creased, still  keeping  a  steady  feeling  upon  the 
left  one  ;  then,  by  a  constant  pressure  with  the 
left  leg  upon  the  horse's  side,  he  will  be  pre- 
vented from  carrying  his  croup  too  far  to  the 
left.  Reining  back  teaches  the  horse  to  move 
lightly,  and  improves  the  style  of  his  different 
gaits,  but  its  effect  is  very  severe  upon  him, 
hence  its  practice  should  not  be  too  frequent, 
and  always  of  short  duration. 


CHAPTER   VIII. 

THE  TROT,  THE  AMBLE,  THE  PACE,  THE  RACK. 

"  We  ride  and  ride.    High  on  the  hills 

The  fir-trees  stretch  into  the  sky; 
The  birches,  which  the  deep  calm  stills, 
Quiver  again  as  we  speed  by." 

OWEN  INNSLY. 

IN  the  trot,  the  horse  moves  his  legs  in  the 
same  diagonal  manner  as  in  the  walk,  the  only 
difference  being  that  in  the  trot  they  are  moved 
more  rapidly.  When  trotting  regularly  and 
evenly,  the  right  fore-foot  and  the  left  hind- 
foot  strike  the  ground  nearly  simultaneously, 
and  then  the  left  fore-foot  and  the  right  hind- 
foot  do  the  same ;  and  so  on  alternately,  two 
legs  being  diagonally  upon  the  ground  at  about 
the  same  moment,  while  two  legs  are  raised  in 
the  air. 

The  strokes  of  the  hoofs  upon  the  ground  are 
called  "  beats/'  and  are  loud  and  quick,  harmo- 
nizing with  the  animal's  rapidity  of  motion  and 
length  of  step.  The  trot  is  the  safest  gait  for 
a  rider  if  the  horse  be  free  from  any  defect 
in  his  limbs,  as  he  will  be  less  apt  to  stumble ; 


198  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

it  is  also  less  tiresome  for  the  animal,  because 
while  two  legs  are  diagonally  off  the  ground, 
the  other  two  support  the  weight  of  his  body, 
and  thus  one  pair  alternately  and  quickly  re- 
lieves the  other. 

There  are  three  varieties  of  trot,  namely,  the 
jog  trot,  the  flying  or  racing  trot,  and  the  true 
or  even  trot.  In  the  jog  trot  each  foot  is  placed 
nearly  in  the  same  track  it  occupied  before  it 
was  raised,  though  somewhat  in  advance  of  it, 
and  it  remains  upon  the  ground  a  longer  time 
than  when  raised  in  the  air,  thus  rendering  the 
gait  almost  as  slow  as  the  walk.  If  the  horse 
be  young  and  spirited,  he  will  prefer  this  gait 
to  that  of  the  walk,  and,  if  permitted,  will  natu- 
rally adopt  it.  This  should  be  guarded  against, 
and  under  no  circumstances  should  he  be  al- 
lowed to  break  into  a  jog  trot ;  because,  how- 
ever accomplished  the  rider  may  be,  she  will 
find  it  a  very  unpleasant  and  excessively  fa- 
tiguing gait,  and  one  which  will  make  her  look 
very  awkward.  This  variety  of  trot,  however, 
occasions  less  injury  to  the  horse's  feet  and  legs 
than  any  other  gait,  and,  on  this  account,  it  is 
preferred  by  most  farmers. 

In  the  racing  or  flying  trot,  the  horse  is  al- 
lowed to  step  out  without  the  least  constraint, 
the  legs  being  extended  as  far  as  possible,  and 


THE   TROT.  199 

moving  straight  forward,  while  the  animal  spir- 
itedly enters  into  the  occasion  and  gives  out  his 
full  power.  In  this  trot  all  the  legs  are  moved 
very  rapidly,  and  the  hind  ones  with  more  force 
than  the  fore-legs,  in  order  that  the  horse's 
body  may,  with  each  bound,  be  propelled  as  far 
forward  as  possible.  Between  the  two  succes- 
sive bounds  all  four  legs  are  momentarily  off 
the  ground.  Very  springy  fetlocks  tend  to  di- 
minish speed  in  the  flying  trot,  and  hence,  not 
having  such  elastic  fetlocks,  a  good  trotting 
racer  is  rough  in  his  action  and  an  undesirable 
saddle-horse. 

In  the  true  or  even  trot,  the  action  of  the 
horse  is  regular,  all  his  limbs  moving  in  an  even 
manner,  his  feet  measuring  exact  distances,  his 
hoof -beats  being  in  equal  time  of  one,  two,  three, 
four,  and  his  feet,  when  moving  rapidly,  touch- 
ing the  ground  only  for  an  instant.  There  are 
two  ways  in  which  this  trot  may  be  ridden: 
one  is  to  sit  closely  to  the  saddle,  moving  as  lit- 
tle as  possible,  and  making  no  effort  to  avoid 
the  roughness  of  the  gait.  This  is  the  method 
practiced  by  the  cavalry  of  this  country,  as  well 
as  by  the  armies  in  Europe,  and  is  called  the 
"  cavalry  "  or  "  French  trot." 

The  other  method  is  to  relieve  the  joltings 
by  rising  in  the  saddle  in  time  with  the  horse's 


200  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

step.  This  is  called  the  "  English  trot/'  and  is 
the  favorite  gait  of  the  European  and  the  Amer- 
ican civilian  horsemen.  It  is  only  during  the 
last  few  years  that  this  trot  has  been  gradually 
coming  into  favor  with  American  horsewomen, 
although  the  ladies  of  England,  and  of  nearly 
all  continental  Europe,  have  for  a  long  time 
ridden  this  gait  as  well  as  the  canter  and  hand 
gallop,  having  found  that  by  alternating  the 
latter  gaits  with  the  trot  they  could  ride  greater 
distances  upon  hard  roads,  and  with  much  less 
fatigue  to  themselves  and  their  steeds.  The' 
English  trot  does  not  wear  out  the  horse  so 
quickly  as  the  gallop  and  canter ;  indeed,  it  has 
been  generally  found  that  the  horse's  trot  im- 
proves as  he  grows  older,  many  horses  having 
become  better  trotters  at  their  tenth  or  twelfth 
year  than  at  an  earlier  age.  The  trot  in  which 
the  hoof-beats  are  in  time  of  only  one,  two,  is 
very  difficult  to  ride. 

In  America,  many  persons  condemn  the  Eng- 
lish trot  for  lady  riders,  which  is  hardly  to  be 
wondered  at  when  one  observes  the  various 
awkward  and  grotesque  attitudes  that  are  as- 
sumed, even  by  many  gentlemen,  when  at- 
tempting to  rise  in  the  saddle.  As  for  the 
ladies  who  have  undertaken  this  innovation, 
their  appearance  on  horseback,  from  want  of 


THE   TROT.  201 

proper  training  or  from  lack  of  attention  to 
given  rules,  has,  with  but  few  exceptions,  been 
simply  ridiculous.  Even  with  correct  teaching 
and  proper  application,  some  ladies,  although 
they  acquire  the  English  trot,  and  do  not  make 
caricatures  of  themselves  while  employing  it, 
yet  do  not  appear  to  such  advantage  as  when 
in  the  canter  or  hand  gallop.  This  is  also  the 
case  with  European  ladies,  who  differ  very  much 
in  their  power  to  make  this  gait  appear  grace- 
ful. A  small,  slightly  built  person,  having  a 
short  measurement  from  the  hip  to  the  knee, 
can,  when  correctly  taught,  ride  this  trot  with 
much  ease  and  grace.  A  tall  woman  will  have 
to  lean  too  far  forward  with  each  rising  move- 
ment of  her  steed,  as  her  length  of  limb  will  not 
permit  a  short  rise ;  she  will  therefore  appear 
to  much  less  advantage  in  this  gait;  while  a 
stout  built  person  will  look  rather  heavy  in  the 
rise  from  the  saddle. 

However,  whether  a  lady  is  likely  to  present 
an  elegant  appearance  or  not  when  riding  the 
English  trot,  she  must,  if  she  desires  to  become 
an  accomplished  horsewoman,  learn  to  ride  this 
particular  gait,  as  it  will  enable  her  to  gain  a 
correct  seat,  to  keep  a  better  and  more  perfect 
balance,  and  to  become  more  thorough  in  the 
other  gaits.  From  a  hygienic  point  of  view,  it 


202  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

will  prove  beneficial,  and  will  preserve  both 
rider  and  horse  from  excessive  fatigue  when 
traveling  long  distances.  Under  certain  cir- 
cumstances, it  will  also  enable  a  lady  to  ride  a 
man's  horse,  which  will  be  very  apt  to  have  this 
trot  in  perfection,  and  but  little  knowledge  of, 
or  training  in,  any  other  gaits.  In  the  country 
a  regular  and  sure  trotting  horse  may  often  be 
readily  obtained,  while  it  will  be  much  more 
difficult  to  procure  one  with  a  light,  easy  can- 
ter or  gallop.  This  trot,  when  well  cadenced 
and  in  perfect  time,  is  very  captivating,  as  the 
rider  escapes  all  jolting,  and  feels  more  as  if  she 
were  flying  through  the  air  than  riding  upon  a 
horse.  , 

There  is,  however,  one  objection  to  the  Eng- 
lish trot  to  which  attention  should  be  directed  ; 
namely,  if  the  lady  ride  on  a  two-pommeled 
saddle,  and  the  horse  happens  to  shy,  or  to  turn 
around  suddenly,  while  she  is  in  the  act  of  ris- 
ing, she  is  very  likely  to  be  unseated  or  thrown 
from  her  horse.  With  the  three  -  pommeled 
saddle,  however,  this  accident  will  be  much  less 
liable  to  occur,  but  the  lady  should  always  be 
on  her  guard  when  riding  this  trot,  especially 
if  her  steed  be  nervous ;  and  to  avoid  an  acci- 
dent of  the  kind  just  named,  she  should  keep 
her  left  knee  directly  under  the  third  pommel, 


THE   TROT.  203 

but  without  pressing  up  against  it  enough  to 
interfere  with  the  rising  motion,  or  just  so  close, 
that  in  pressing  upon  the  stirrup  and  straight- 
ening her  knee  she  can  rise  about  four  inches 
from  the  saddle ;  the  distance  between  the  up- 
per surface  of  the  knee  and  the  under  surface 
of  the  pommel  will  then  be  about  one  and  a 
half,  or  two  inches.  If,  in  the  rise,  she  does 
not  find  herself  embarrassed  by  the  third  pom- 
mel, she  may  know  that  the  stirrup-leather  is 
of  the  correct  length  for  this  trot.  The  more 
rapid  and  regular  the  trot,  the  easier  and  shorter 
will  be  the  rise,  and  the  less  noticeable  the 
movements  of  the  rider,  because,  when  trotting 
fast,  the  rise  will  be  effected  with  but  very  little 
effort  on  her  part,  and  will  be  almost  entirely 
due  to  the  rapid  action  of  the  horse.  To  rise 
when  trotting  slowly,  will  be  neither  easy  nor 
pleasant  for  the  rider,  and  in  this  gait  she  will 
not  appear  to  much  advantage. 

In  the  French  or  cavalry  trot,  the  body 
should  be  inclined  a  little  backward,  being  kept 
as  firm  as  possible  but  without  stiffness,  while 
at  the  same  time  the  rider  should  sit  as  closely 
to  the  saddle  as  she  can,  with  the  left  knee  di- 
rectly under  the  third  pommel,  not  using  force 
to  press  up  against  it,  but  simply  holding  it 
there  to  sustain  the  limb  and  to  assist  in  keep- 


204  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

ing  it  as  firm  and  steady  as  possible  during  the 
roughness  of  this  gait  —  while  the  reins  should 
be  held  a  little  firmer  than  for  the  walk.  This 
trot  should  never  be  ridden  by  ladies  after  their 
first  lessons  in  riding,  unless  the  horse  moves  so 
easily  in  it  that  his  rider  is  not  jolted  in  the 
least.  To  trot  so  softly  that  no  shock  will  be 
experienced  by  the  rider  as  the  horse's  feet 
touch  the  ground  will  require  a  thorough-bred 
of  rare  formation. 

Before  the  invention  of  the  three-pommeled 
saddle  the  French  trot  was  always  employed  in 
the  best  riding-schools,  a  beginner  being  required 
to  practice  it  for  a  long  time,  in  order  to  ac- 
quire the  proper  firmness  in  the  saddle  ;  but 
since  the  invention  of  the  third  pommel  the 
cavalry  trot  has  been  almost  entirely  dispensed 
with,  as  this  pommel  at  once  gives  a  firmness  of 
seat  that  could  be  obtained  on  an  old-fashioned 
two-pommeled  saddle  only  after  taking  many 
fatiguing  lessons  in  the  French  trot.  It  was 
this  fatigue  that  caused  so  many  persons  to  con- 
demn horseback  riding  for  ladies,  and  it  also 
proved  a  cause  of  discouragement  to  the  pupils 
in  the  riding-school,  frequently  giving  rise  to 
a  decided  dislike  for  horseback  exercise.  But 
since  the  employment  of  the  third  pommel,  it 
is  only  necessary  for  the  pupil  to  take  two  or 


r^g  * 


THE   TROT.  207 

three  lessons  in  the  French  trot,  just  enough  to 
enable  her  to  understand  the  movement,  after 
which  she  may  proceed  to  rise  in  the  English 
style.  However,  a  knowledge  of  the  cavalry 
trot  will  be  found  useful,  as  a  horse,  when 
reined  in  from  a  gallop  or  canter,  will  often 
trot  a  short  distance  before  stopping ;  and  if 
the  rider  understands  this  trot,  she  will  be  able 
to  sit  close  to  the  saddle,  and  not  appear  awk- 
ward by  jolting  helplessly  about. 

Of  all  the  styles  of  riding,  there  is  none  so 
difficult  to  describe  or  to  learn  as  the  English 
trot.  We  will  make  an  effort,  however,  to  ren- 
der it  comprehensible  to  the  reader.  Consider- 
able study  and  practice  will  be  required  to  learn 
it  perfectly,  but  when  once  learned  it  will  indi- 
cate the  thoroughly  accomplished  horsewoman. 
(Fig.  30.) 

To  commence  the  English  trot,  the  rider  must 
collect  her  horse,  as  for  the  walk,  and  then,  as 
he  advances,  keep  a  firm,  even  tension  upon  the 
snaffle-reins,  because,  in  this  trot,  the  animal 
will  rely  wholly  upon  his  rider  to  support  him 
and  hold  him  to  the  pace,  without  the  "  give 
and  take  "  movements  of  the  hands  required  in 
the  other  gaits.  It  is  not  meant  by  this  that  a 
dead  pull  is  to  be  made,  but  that  the  support 
must  be  firm  and  steady,  with  a  proper  corre- 


208  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

spondence  between  the  bridle-hand  and  the 
horse's  mouth.  The  elbows  must  be  held  steady 
and  lightly  near  the  rider's  sides,  but  not  close 
against  them.  As  the  horse  extends  his  trot, 
an  unpleasant  roughness  or  jolting  will  be  ex- 
perienced, which  will  give  an  upward  impetus 
to  the  rider's  body  ;  the  moment  she  is  con- 
scious of  this  impetus,  she  must  allow  herself  to 
be  raised  from  her  horse  in  regular  time  with 
his  step  or  hoof-beats.  In  this  trot,  the  horse 
will  always  have  a  leading  foot,  either  the  right 
or  left,  and  the  foot  he  leads  with  is  the  one  to 
which  the  rider  must  rise,  —  rising  when  the 
leading  foot  is  lifted,  and  touching  the  saddle 
when  this  foot  touches  the  ground.  Most  riders 
do  this  instinctively,  as  it  were,  rising  and  fall- 
ing with  the  leading  foot. 

In  this  rise  the  action  of  the  horse  alone  will 
give  the  impetus;  no  effort  must  be  made  by 
the  lady,  except  to  press  slightly,  or  rather  to 
sustain  herself  gently  upon  the  stirrup,  and 
keep  her  knee  and  instep  yielding  and  flexible 
with  the  rise.  Care  must  be  taken  not  to  allow 
the  leg  to  swing  forward  and  backward.  The 
rise  should  be  made  as  straight  upward  as  pos- 
sible, the  upper  part  of  the  body  inclining  for- 
ward no  more  than  is  necessary  to  effect ,  the 
rise  with  ease.  The  back  must  be  kept  well 


THE   TROT.  209 

curved,  and  the  shoulders  square  to  the  front  of 
the  horse,  without  lifting  them  up,  or  rounding 
them  in  rising. 

The  leading  foot  of  the  horse  is  that  fore- 
foot or  leg  with  which  he  commences  his  ad- 
vance in  the  gait ;  it  will  always  be  carried 
somewhat  beyond  its  fellow,  while,  at  the  same 
time,  that  side  of  the  animal's  body  which  cor- 
responds with  the  leading  foot  will  be  a  little 
more  advanced  toward  this  foot,  though  almost 
imperceptibly  so.  Every  rider  should  be  taught 
to  know  with  which  foot  her  horse  leads. 

When  a  horse  trots  evenly  and  quickly,  and 
with  rather  a  short  step,  the  rise  in  the  saddle 
will  be  barely  perceptible;  but  when  he  trots 
slowly  and  with  a  long  step,  the  rise  will  have 
to  be  higher,  in  order  that  the  rider  may  keep 
time  with  the  slowness  and  length  of  his  step. 
In  this  gait  a  tall  woman  will  be  very  apt  to 
prefer  a  long  step  to  a  short  one. 

In  making  the  rise,  the  rider  must  never  as- 
sist herself  by  pulling  upon  the  reins,  which 
should  be  held  firm  and  low  to  give  support  to 
the  horse  alone,  not  allowing  them  to  slip  in  the 
least  from  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger 
that  should  hold  them  steady. 

The  descent  of  the  body  to  the  saddle  must 
be  effected  as  gently  as  possible.  The  right 

14 


210  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

knee  should  be  pressed  against  the  second  pom- 
mel, and  the  left  foot  lean  lightly  upon  the  stir- 
rup, the  left  foot  and  instep  being  kept  yielding 
and  flexible  with  the  descent,  and  the  body  and 
right  leg  bearing1  a  little  to  the  right.  The 
descent  should  be  made  just  in  time  to  catch 
the  next  impetus  of  the  horse's  movement,  so 
that  the  saddle  will  be  hardly  touched  before 
the  rider's  body  will  again  be  thrown  upward  to 
make  the  rise. 

It  presents  a  very  comical  and  inelegant  ap- 
pearance for  a  rider,  whether  man  or  woman, 
when  attempting  the  rising  trot,  to  elevate  and 
protrude  the  shoulders,  curve  the  back  out  so 
as  to  round  it,  lean  forward  toward  the  horse's 
ears,  with  elbows  sticking  out  from  the  rider's 
sides  and  flopping  like  the  wings  of  a  restless 
bird,  while  the  body  is  bobbing  up  and  down 
like  a  dancing-jack,  out  of  all  time  with  the 
movements  of  the  animal.  One  reason  why 
some  persons  are  so  awkward  in  the  rise  is  that 
they  sit  too  far  back  upon  the  saddle.  This 
obliges  them  to  sustain  themselves  upon  the 
stirrup  obliquely,  thus  causing  them  to  lean  too 

1  By  "bearing  to  the  right  "  is  not  meant  an  inclination  of 
the  body  to  this  side,  but  a  resistance  sufficient  to  keep  the  body 
from  inclining  toward  the  left.  As  hereafter  stated,  trotting  in 
a  circle  to  the  right  will  be  found  an  excellent  exercise  to  teach 
one  this  bearing. 


THE    TROT.  211 

far  forward  in  order  to  accomplish  the  rise  more 
easily.  Another  cause  of  awkwardness  in  the 
rising  trot  is  an  improperly  constructed  sad- 
dle. The  seat  or  platform  should  be  as  nearly 
level  as  a  properly  made  saddle  will  permit. 
When  the  front  part  or  arch  is  much  higher 
than  the  seat,  it  will  be  difficult  to  use  the 
second  pommel  as  a  point  of  support  for  the 
right  knee,  which  support  is  highly  essential 
during  the  descent,  in  this  trot.  It  is  a  com- 
mon thing  to  see  riders  exaggerate  the  rise  by 
pressing  hard  upon  the  stirrup  and  supporting 
themselves  by  the  reins,  thus  rising  higher 
than  necessary,  and  coming  down  with  a  heavy 
thump  upon  the  saddle  ;  to  which  equestrian 
gymnastics  they  give  the  name  of  "  English 
trot." 

"When  rising  and  descending  in  the  English 
trot,  the  left  leg,  from  knee  to  instep,  must 
be  held  perpendicular  and  steady;  the  foot, 
from  toe  to  heel,  must  rest  horizontally  in  the 
stirrup,  and  in  a  line  with  the  horse's  side.  The 
foot  should  not  be  allowed  to  turn  out,  nor  the 
leg  to  swing  backward  and  forward :  if  the  foot 
be  pointed  out,  this  will  tend  to  carry  the  body 
and  leg  too  much  toward  the  left,  on  the  rise ; 
and,  if  the  leg  be  allowed  to  swing,  it  will  cause 
the  rider  to  lose  the  rhythm  of  the  trot.  Again, 


212          THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

the  stirrup  must  not  be  too  strongly  pressed 
upon,  as  this  will  throw  all  the  rider's  weight 
upon  the  left  side,  and  may  cause  the  saddle  to 
turn.  On  making  the  rise,  great  care  must  be 
taken  not  to  advance  the  left  shoulder,  nor  to 
turn  the  body  to  the  left ;  many  riders  do  these 
things  with  the  idea  that  they  will  enable  them 
to  rise  with  more  ease.  But  this  is  an  error,  for 
such  movements  will  not  only  occasion  fatigue, 
but  will  also  render  the  rein-hold  unsteady,  and 
the  action  of  the  foot  and  knee  uncertain.  The 
body  and  shoulders  must  always  be  square  to 
the  front  when  the  horse  is  trotting  straight 
forward,  the  body  remaining  as  erect  as  the 
action  of  the  horse  will  allow. 

To  stop  a  well-trained  horse  in  this  gait,  it 
will  simply  be  necessary  for  the  rider  to  cease 
rising,  sit  down  to  the  saddle,  and  gradually 
loosen  the  reins.  Many  horses,  however,  are 
trained  to  make  the  stop  in  the  usual  way,  by 
having  the  reins  tightened.  The  advance  and 
the  turns  are  to  be  conducted  in  the  same  man- 
ner as  that  described  for  the  walk. 

In  the  English  trot,  the  horse  must  be  kept 
well  up  to  his  gait ;  should  he  appear  to  move 
heavily  or  disunitedly  the  reins  must  be  grad- 
ually shortened,  and  the  animal  be  collected. 
Should  he  step  short,  in  a  constrained  manner, 


THE   TROT.  213 

the  reins  must  be  gradually  lengthened,  to  give 
him  more  freedom.  If  he  break  into  a  gallop 
when  it  is  desired  that  he  should  trot,  he  must 
be  gradually  reined  in  to  a  walk,  and  then  be 
started  again  upon  a  trot,  and  this  course  must 
be  repeated  until  he  obeys,  stopping  him  every 
time  he  attempts  to  gallop,  and  then  starting 
the  trot  anew.  If  he  trot  too  rapidly,  he-  must 
be  checked,  by  bracing  the  bridle-hand  and 
increasing  the  pull  upon  the  reins.  If  the  trot 
be  too  slow,  the  hand  must  relax  the  reins  a  lit- 
tle, and  the  horse  be  animated  by  the  voice,  and 
by  gentle  taps  with  the  whip.  To  regulate  the 
trot,  to  keep  it  smooth  and  harmonious,  to  rein 
in  the  horse  gently  without  rendering  him  un- 
steady, and  then  gradually  to  yield  the  hand  so 
that  he  may  move  forward  again  in  a  regular 
manner,  are  very  difficult  points  for  beginners 
to  accomplish  while  still  keeping  up  the  proper 
support  upon  the  bit,  and  will  require  study  and 
considerable  practice. 

A  horse  should  never  be  urged  into  a  more 
rapid  trot  than  he  can  execute  in  an  even,  reg- 
ular manner  ;  if  compelled  to  exceed  this,  he 
will  break  into  a  rough  gallop,  or  into  such  an 
irregular  trot  as  will  render  it  impossible  for  the 
rider  to  time  the  rise. 

An  accomplished  horsewoman,  when  trotting 


214  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

her  horse,  will  make  no  observable  effort,  and 
there  will  be  perfect  harmony  between  her 
steed  and  herself.  When  the  English  trot  is 
ridden  in  this  manner,  the  person  who  can  con- 
demn it  must,  indeed,  be  extremely  fastidious. 
However,  it  must  be  acknowledged  that  it  will 
require  the  lithe,  charming  figure  of  a  young 
lady  to  exhibit  its  best  points,  and  to  execute 
it  in  its  most  pleasing  and  graceful  style.  The 
very  tall,  the  inactive,  or  the  stout  lady  may 
ride  this  gait  with  ease  to  herself  and  horse, 
and  when  properly  taught  will  not  render  her- 
self awkward  or  ridiculous,  but  she  can  never 
ride  it  with  the  willowy  grace  of  the  slender 
woman  of  medium  size. 

Trotting  in  a  circle  may  be  practiced  in  a 
riding-school,  or  upon  a  level,  open  space  or 
ground,  having  a  circular  track  about  seventy- 
five  or  eighty  feet  in  diameter.  It  is  very  ex- 
cellent practice,  especially  in  teaching  the  rider 
to  rise  in  unison  with  the  horse's  trot,  whether 
he  leads  with  the  right  or  left  leg.  For  first 
lessons,  the  pupil  must  commence  by  circling  to 
the  right,  as  this  is  the  easiest  to  learn,  and  will 
teach  her  to  bear  toward  the  right  side  of  the 
horse.  It  is  very  essential  that  in  first  lessons 
she  should  do  this ;  because  in  the  English  trot 
she  will  have  to  guard  carefully  against  inclin- 


THE    TROT.  215 

ing  to  the  left  in  the  rise  and  descent,  a  fault 
common  to  all  beginners  who  are  not  better  in- 
structed. 

In  circling,  the  horse  will  always  incline  to- 
ward the  centre  of  the  circle,  with  which  in- 
clination the  rider's  body  must  correspond,  by 
leaning  in  the  same  direction  ;  if  this  precaution 
should  be  neglected  and  the  horse  be  trotting 
rapidly,  the  rider  will  lose  her  balance,  and  fall 
off  on  the  side  opposite  to  that  of  the  inclina- 
tion. The  distance  she  should  lean  to  the  right 
or  to  the  left  must  be  in  proportion  to  the  size  of 
the  circle  that  is  being  passed  over,  and  also  to 
the  inward  bearing  of  the  horse's  body.  Should 
the  circle  be  small  and  the  gait  rapid,  the  in- 
clination of  the  rider's  body  will  have  to  be 
considerable  to  enable  her  to  maintain  her  seat 
and  keep  in  unison  with  the  horse.  If  the  cir- 
cle be  large,  say  eighty  feet  in  diameter,  the  in- 
clination  will  be  slight. 

In  order  to  circle  to  the  right,  when  holding  a 
curb  and  a  snaffle  rein  in  each  hand,  the  pupil 
must  collect  her  horse  by  the  aid  of  curb,  leg, 
and  whip,  as  already  explained,  and  start  him 
forward  on  the  snaffle,  holding  the  right  rein 
a  little  lower  than  the  left,  and  drawing  it 
enough  to  enable  her  to  see  plainly  the  corner 
of  his  right  eye ;  the  reins  must  be  held  stead- 


216  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

ily,  no  sudden  jerks  being  given  to  them,  as 
these  will  cause  the  horse  to  move  irregularly 
and  swerve  about.  Should  his  croup  be  turned 
too  much  to  the  right,  the  pressure  of  the  whip 
will  bring  it  to  the  left ;  if  it  be  turned  too  much 
to  the  left,  the  pressure  of  the  left  leg  will  bring 
it  to  the  right. 

In  circling  to  the  left,  the  horse  will  incline 
his  body  to  the  left,  toward  the  centre  of  the 
circle.  It  is  not  very  easy  to  learn  to  circle  to 
the  left,  but  when  once  learned,  it  will  be  found 
no  more  difficult  than  circling  to  the  right,  pro- 
vided the  animal  has  been  properly  trained  and 
made  supple,  so  as  to  lead  with  either  leg. 
Horses  that  have  been  trained  to  lead  with  the 
right  leg  only  will,  when  required  to  change 
and  lead  with  the  left,  move  in  a  confined,  in- 
flexible, and  irregular  manner,  so  that  it  will  be 
impossible  to  time  the  rise  from  the  saddle.  In 
riding  in  the  circle  to  the  left,  the  directions  for 
circling  to  the  right  must  be  reversed,  the  rider 
leaning  to  the  left,  pulling  the  left  rein  a  little 
tighter,  etc.  Great  care  must  be  taken,  how- 
ever, not  to  lean  too  much  toward  the  left  in 
making  the  rise.  The  degree  of  inclination 
should  not  in  this  case  be  so  great  as  the  corre- 
sponding inclination  when  circling  to  the  right, 
for  if  it  is  the  rider  will  throw  her  weight  too 


THE  AMBLE.  217 

much  upon  the  stirrup  side,  and  may  cause  the 
saddle  to  turn. 

In  practicing  riding  in  a  circle,  it  will  be 
found  very  advantageous  to  vary  the  size  of  the 
circle,  first  riding  in  a  large  one,  then  grad- 
ually contracting  it,  and  again  enlarging  it ;  or 
the  rider,  while  practicing  upon  a  large  circle, 
may  make  a  cross-cut  toward  the  centre  of  this 
circle,  so  as  to  enter  upon  another  one  of  smaller 
diameter,  and,  after  riding  for  a  short  time  in  the 
smaller  circle,  she  may  again  pass  out  to  resume 
her  ride  upon  the  larger  one.  These  changes 
from  large  to  narrow  circles  form  excellent 
practice  for  pupils,  but  should  always,  if  pos- 
sible, be  performed  under  competent  instruc- 
tion. 

The  first  lessons  in  trotting  in  a  circle  should 
always  be  of  short  duration,  and  the  pupil  re- 
quired to  ride  slowly,  the  speed  being  gradually 
increased  as  she  gains  knowledge  and  confi- 
dence. The  moment  she  experiences  fatigue 
she  should  dismount,  and  rest,  before  resuming 
the  lesson. 

In  the  amble  the  horse's  movements  very 
strongly  resemble  those  of  the  camel,  two  legs 
on  one  side  moving  together  alternately  with 
the  two  legs  of  the  other  side.  Thus  one  side 
of  the  animal  supports  the  weight  of  his  body, 


218  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

while  the  other  side  moves  forward,  and  so  on 
in  alternation.  This  is  an  artificial  gait,  and 
one  to  which  the  horse  must  usually  be  trained ; 
though  some  horses  whose  ancestors  have  been 
forced  to  travel  in  this  gait,  have  themselves 
been  known  to  amble  without  any  training.  In 
the  feudal  ages  it  was  the  favorite  pace  for  a 
lady's  palfrey,  but  at  the  present  day  it  is  no 
longer  countenanced  by  good  taste. 

The  pace,  however,  which  is  so  well  liked  by 
many  ladies  in  this  country,  is  a  kind  of  amble, 
although  the  steps  taken  are  longer.  A  good 
pacer  can  frequently  travel  faster  than  most 
horses  can  in  the  trot.  When  the  steed  moves 
easily  and  willingly,  the  pace  is  very  pleasant 
for  short  rides,  but  for  long  journeys,  unless  the 
animal  can  change  his  gait  to  a  hand  gallop  or 
a  canter,  it  will  become  very  unpleasant  and 
tiresome.  Many  pacers  are  almost  as  rough  in 
their  movements  as  the  ordinary  trotter;  and 
although  they  do  not  jolt  the  rider  up  and  down 
upon  the  saddle,  yet  they  jerk  her  body  in  such 
a  manner  as  successively  and  alternately  to 
throw  one  side  forward  and  the  other  slightly 
back  with  each  and  every  step,  rendering  a 
ride  for  any  distance  very  fatiguing. 

The  rack,  at  one  time  so  much  liked,  has  be- 
come almost  obsolete.  This  is  a  peculiar  gait, 


THE  RACK.  219 

not  easily  described,  in  which  the  horse  appears 
to  trot  with  one  pair  of  legs  and  amble  with  the 
other,  the  gait  being  so  mixed  up  between  an 
amble  and  a  defective  trot  as  to  render  it  almost 
a  nondescript.  When  racking,  the  horse  will 
appear  constrained  and  uncomfortable,  and  will 
strongly  bear  upon  the  rider's  hand ;  some  ani- 
mals so  much  so,  as  completely  to  weary  the 
bridle-hand  and  arm  in  a  ride  of  only  an  hour 
or  two.  This  constant  bearing  of  the  horse's 
head  upon  the  reins  soon  renders  him  hard 
mouthed,  and,  consequently,  not  easily  and 
promptly  managed.  The  rack  soon  wears  out 
a  horse,  besides  spoiling  him  for  other  gaits, 
and  so  injures  his  feet  and  legs  that  a  racker 
will  rarely  be  suitable  for  the  saddle  after  his 
eighth  year.  It  is  an  acquired  step,  much  dis- 
liked by  the  horse,  which  has  always  to  be 
forced  into  it  by  being  urged  forward  against 
the  restraint  of  a  curb-bit ;  and  he  will,  when- 
ever an  opportunity  presents,  break  into  a  rough 
trot  or  canter,  so  that  the  rider  has  to  be  con- 
stantly on  the  watch,  and  compel  him  to  keep 
in  the  rack  against  his  will.  And  although  the 
motion  does  not  jolt  much,  the  aspect  of  the 
horse  and  rider  is  not  as  easy  and  graceful  as  in 
the  canter  and  hand  gallop,  there  being  an  ap- 
pearance of  unwillingness  and  restraint  that  is 


220          THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

by  no  means  pleasing.  The  directions  for  the 
French  trot  will  answer  for  both  the  pace  and 
the  rack,  except  that  in  the  latter  the  traction 
upon  the  reins  must  be  greater. 


CHAPTER  IX. 

THE    CANTER. 

"  When  troubled  in  spirit,  when  weary  of  life, 
When  I  faint  'neath  its  burdens,  and  shrink  from  its  strife, 
When  its  fruits,  turned  to  ashes,  are  mocking  my  taste, 
And  its  fairest  scene  seems  but  a  desolate  waste, 
Then  come  ye  not  near  me,  my  sad  heart  to  cheer 
With  friendship's  soft  accents  or  sympathy's  tear. 
No  pity  I  ask,  and  no  counsel  I  need, 
But  bring  me,  oh,  bring  me  my  gallant  young  steed, 
With  his  high  arched  neck,  and  his  nostril  spread  wide, 
His  eye  full  of  fire,  and  his  step  full  of  pride ! 
As  I  spring  to  his  back,  as  I  seize  the  strong  rein, 
The  strength  to  my  spirit  returneth  again ! 
The  bonds  are  all  broken  that  fettered  my  mind, 
And  my  cares  borne  away  on  the  wings  of  the  wind  ; 
My  pride  lifts  its  head,  for  a  season  bowed  down, 
And  the  queen  in  my  nature  now  puts  on  her  crown ! " 

GRACE  GREENWOOD. 

IN  the  gallop,  the  horse  always  has  a  leading 
foot  or  leg.  In  leading  with  the  right  fore-foot, 
he  will  raise  the  left  one  from  the  ground,  and 
then  the  right  will  immediately  follow,  but  will 
be  advanced  somewhat  beyond  the  left  one ; 
and  this  is  the  reason  why,  in  this  case,  the 
right  side  is  called  the  "  leading  side."  In  the 
descent  of  the  fore-feet,  the  left  one  will  touch 
the  ground  first,  making  the  first  beat,  and  will 


222  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

be  immediately  followed  by  the  leading  or 
right  fore-foot  which  will  make  the  second  beat. 
The  hind-legs  are  moved  in  a  similar  way,  the 
left  hind-foot  making  the  third  beat,  and  the 
right  one  the  fourth.  These  beats  vary  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  adjustment  of  the  horse's 
weight,  but  when  he  gallops  true  and  regular, 
as  in  the  canter,  the  hoof-beats  distinctly  mark 
one,  two,  three,  four.  In  the  rapid  gallop  the 
hoof-beats  sound  in  the  time  of  one-two,  or  one- 
two-three. 

In  leading  with  the  left  foot,  the  left  side  of 
the  horse  will  be  advanced  slightly  and  the  left 
leg  be  carried  somewhat  beyond  the  right,  the 
action  being  just  the  reverse  of  that  above  de- 
scribed when  leading  with  the  right  leg.  In 
this  case  the  left  side  is  termed  the  "  leading 
side."  The  hoof-beats  of  horses  in  the  trot 
and  gallop  have  been  admirably  rendered  by 
Bellini,  in  the  opera  of  "  Somnambula,"  just 
previous  to  the  entrance  of  Rudolfo  upon  the 
stage.  There  are  three  kinds  of  gallop,  namely, 
the  rapid  or  racing,  the  hand  gallop,  and  the 
canter. 

The  canter  is  a  slow  form  of  galloping,  which 
the  horse  performs  by  throwing  his  weight 
chiefly  upon  his  hind-legs,  the  fore  ones  be- 
ing used  more  as  supports  than  as  propellers. 


THE  CANTER.  223 

Horses  will  be  found  to  vary  in  their  modes  of 
cantering,  so  much  so  as  to  render  it  almost 
impossible  to  describe  them  accurately.  Small 
horses  and  ponies  have  a  way  of  cantering  with 
a  loose  rein,  and  without  throwing  much  weight 
upon  their  haunches,  moving  their  feet  rapidly, 
and  giving  pattering  hoof-beats.  Most  ponies 
on  the.  Western  prairies  canter  in  this  manner, 
and  it  is  said  to  be  a  very  easy  gait  for  a  horse- 
man though  very  unpleasant,  from  its  joltings, 
for  a  lady. 

Another  canter  is  what  might  be  termed  the 
"  canter  of  a  livery-stable  horse."  This  appears 
to  be  partly  a  run  and  partly  a  canter,  a  pecul- 
iarity which  is  due  to  the  fact  that  one  or  more 
of  the  animal's  feet  are  unsound,  and  he  adopts 
this  singular  movement  for  the  purpose  of  ob- 
taining relief.  The  little  street  gamins  in  Lon- 
don recognize  the  sound  of  this  canter  at  once, 
and  will  yell  out,  in  time  with  the  horse's  hoof- 
beats,  "  three  pence,  two  pence/'  in  sarcastic 
derision  of  the  lady's  hired  horse  and  the  un- 
happy condition  of  his  feet. 

In  the  true  canter,  which  alone  is  suitable  for 
a  lady,  the  carriage  of  the  horse  is  grand  and 
elegant.  In  this  gait,  the  animal  has  his  hind- 
legs  well  under  his  body,  all  his  limbs  move 
regularly,  his  neck  has  a  graceful  curve,  and 


224  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

responds  to  the  slightest  touch  of  the  rider's 
hand  upon  the  reins.  A  horse  that  moves  in 
this  manner  is  one  for  display ;  his  grand  action 
will  emphasize  the  grace  of  a  finished  rider,  and 
the  appearance  of  the  tout  ensemble  will  be  the 
extreme  of  elegance  and  well-bred  ease. 

Horses  intended  for  ladies'  use  are  generally 
trained  to  lead  in  the  canter  with  the  right  or 
off  fore-foot.  Most  lady  riders,  whose  lessons 
in  riding  have  been  limited,  sit  crosswise  upon 
their  saddles.  This  position,  without  their  be- 
ing aware  of  it,  places  them  more  in  unison 
with  the  horse's  movements,  and  thereby  ren- 
ders the  canter  with  this  lead  the  easiest  gait 
for  them.  But  if  a  horse  be  constantly  re- 
quired to  canter  with  this  lead  he  will  soon  be- 
come unsound  in  his  left  hind-leg,  because  in 
leading  with  the  right  fore-foot  he  throws  the 
greater  part  of  his  weight  upon  his  left  hind- 
leg,  and  thus  makes  it  perform  double  duty. 
For  this  reason  the  majority  of  ladies'  horses, 
when  the  canter  is  their  principal  gait,  will  be 
found  to  suffer  from  strained  muscles,  tendons, 
and  articulations. 

A  finished  rider  will  from  time  to  time  re- 
lieve her  horse  by  changing  the  lead  to  the  left 
leg,  or  else  she  will  change  the  canter  to  a  trot. 
Should  her  horse  decidedly  refuse  to  lead  with 


THE   CANTER.  227 

the  foot  required,  whether  right  or  left,  it  may 
be  inferred  that  he  is  unsound  in  that  leg  or 
foot;  in  which  case  he  should  be  favored,  and 
permitted  to  make  his  own  lead,  while  the  can- 
ter should  frequently  be  changed  to  a  walk. 

To  commence  the  canter,  the  horse  must  be 
brought  to  a  walk,  or  to  a  stand,  then  be  placed 
on  his  haunches,  and  collected  by  means  of  the 
curb,  left  leg,  and  whip ;  and  then  the  bridle- 
hand  must  be  raised,  while  the  second,  third, 
and  fourth  fingers  are  moved  to  and  fro,  so  as 
to  give  gentle  pulls  upon  the  curb-reins,  thus 
soliciting  the  animal  to  raise  his  fore-feet.  In 
performing  these  manoeuvres,  the  rider  must  be 
careful  to  direct  the  leg  with  which  she  desires 
her  horse  to  lead.  This  may  be  done  as  fol- 
lows: If  she  desires  to  have  the  right  leg 
lead,  the  tension  upon  the  left  curb-rein  must, 
just  before  the  animal  rises  to  take  his  first  step, 
be  increased  enough  to  make  him  incline  his 
head  so  far  to  the  left  that  the  rider  can  see  his 
left  nostril,  while,  simultaneously,  her  left  leg 
must  press  against  his  side.  By  these  means, 
the  horse  will  be  prompted  to  place  himself 
obliquely,  with  his  head  rather  to  the  left,  and 
his  croup  to  the  right. 

The  rider,  if  seated  exactly  in  the  centre  of 
her  saddle,  must  take  a  position  corresponding 


228  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

to  that  of  the  horse,  by  throwing  her  right  hip 
and  shoulder  somewhat  forward,  her  face  look- 
ing toward  the  animal's  head,  while  her  body 
is  held  erect  with  the  shoulders  gracefully  in- 
clined backward,  and  the  hollow  of  the  back 
well  curved  inward.  Any  stiffness  or  rigidity 
of  the  body  must  be  guarded  against  in  these 
movements  and  positions.  The  rider  must  hold 
herself  in  a  pliant  manner,  and  yield  to  the  mo- 
tions of  the  horse.  The  left  leg  must  be  held 
steady,  the  knee  being  placed  directly  under- 
neath the  third  pommel,  and  care  must  be  taken 
not  to  press  iipon  the  stirrup,  as  this  will  tend 
to  raise  the  body  from  the  saddle,  and  convey 
its  weight  almost  wholly  to  the  left  side. 

The  hands  must  be  held  somewhat  elevated 
and  steady,  and,  as  the  horse  advances,  the  ten- 
sion on  the  reins  must  be  even,  so  that  the  fin- 
gers can  feel  every  cadence  of  his  step,  and  give 
and  take  with  his  movements.  Unlike  the  trot, 
in  which  the  horse  must  be  supported  by  the 
snaffle,  the  canter  will  require  the  curb  to  sus- 
tain and  keep  up  his  action.  After  the  animal 
has  started  in  the  canter  with  the  right  log 
leading,  should  he  incline  too  much  to  the  left, 
the  tension  upon  the  right  rein  must  be  in- 
creased, so  as  to  turn  his  head  more  to  the 
right  and  bring  him  to  the  proper  inclination 


THE  CANTER.  229 

for  the  lead  of  the  right  leg.  This  correction 
must  be  effected  gradually  and  lightly,  so  as 
not  to  disturb  the  gait,  or  cause  him  to  change 
his  leading  leg.  This  canter  with  the  right  leg 
leading  is  very  easy  to  learn,  and  will  not  re- 
quire much  practice  to  master. 

However,  should  the  horse  fail  to  obey  these 
indications  of  the  left  rein  and  leg,  and  start  off 
in  a  false  and  disunited  manner,  as  explained 
under  "  the  turn  in  the  canter,"  another  course 
should  be  pursued,  namely  :  the  tension  upon 
the  right  or  off  curb-rein  must  be  increased  so 
as  to  bring  the  animal's  nose  to  the  right,  as  if 
he  were  going  to  turn  to  the  right  on  a  curve, 
while  at  the  same  time  the  left  leg  must  be 
pressed  against  his  side  in  order  to  have  him 
carry  his  croup  slightly  to  the  right.  Now  he 
must  be  made  to  lift  his  fore-feet  by  increased 
tension  on  both  curb  reins,  and  then  be  urged 
forward.  As  he  advances,  the  hands  should  be 
extended  a  little  to  give  him  more  freedom  in 
the  spring  forward,  and  he  will  then  naturally 
lead  with  the  right  side  advanced.  When  once 
started  in  this  gait,  the  rider  must  equalize  the 
tension  upon  the  reins,  having  placed  herself  in 
the  saddle,  in  the  manner  explained  for  the  can- 
ter. To  have  him  lead  with  the  left  leg,  a  simi- 
lar but  reversed  course  must  be  pursued,  using 


230  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

pressure  with  the  whip,  instead  of  the  leg,  to 
make  him  place  his  croup  to  the  left. 

To  canter  with  the  left  leg  leading  will  be 
found  more  difficult  to  acquire,  and  will  demand 
more  study  and  practice.  The  horse,  having 
been  collected,  must  then  be  inclined  obliquely 
to  the  right.  To  accomplish  this,  the  rider 
must  increase  the  tension  of  the  right  curb-rein, 
and  press  her  whip  against  the  animal's  right 
side,  which  will  urge  his  head  to  the  right  and 
his  croup  to  the  left.  In  order  that  the  position 
of  the  rider's  body  may  correspond  with  that  of 
the  horse,  her  left  hip  and  shoulder  must  be 
slightly  advanced,  in  precedence  of  her  right 
hip  and  shoulder.  It  will  be  observed  that  the 
manoeuvring  in  this  lead  is  similar  to  that  in 
which  the  right  leg  leads,  except  that  the  direc- 
tion of  the  positions,  of  the  management  of  the 
reins,  and  of  the  horse's  bearing  during  the  can- 
ter is  simply  reversed ;  in  either  lead,  however, 
the  tension  or  bearing  upon  the  reins,  as  the 
horse  advances  in  the  canter,  must  be  equal. 

It  may  be  proper  to  state  here  that,  as  the 
amount  of  tension  needed  upon  the  reins  when 
cantering  varies  considerably  with  different 
horses,  some  needing  only  the  lightest  touch, 
the  rider  will,  consequently,  have  to  ascertain 
for  herself  how  much  will  be  suitable  for  her 


THE   CANTER.  231 

horse.  Some  horses,  after  having  fairly  started 
in  the  canter,  will  bend  their  necks  so  as  to 
carry  their  chin  closer  to  the  throat,  while 
others  again  will  extend  the  neck  so  as  to  carry 
the  chin  forward.  In  the  first  instance,  the 
reins  will  have  to  be  shortened  in  order  to  give 
the  animal  the  proper  support  in  the  gait,  as 
well  as  to  keep  up  the  correspondence  between 
his  mouth  and  the  bridle-hand  ;  in  the  latter 
they  will  require  to  be  lengthened,  to  give  him 
more  freedom  in  his  movement.  Should  the 
reins  be  held  too  short,  or  the  rider's  hand  be 
heavy  and  unyielding,  the  horse  will  be  con- 
fined in  his  canter ;  should  the  reins  be  held  too 
long,  he  will  canter  carelessly,  and  will  either 
move  heavily  upon  his  fore-legs,  or  break  into 
an  irregular  trot. 

A  rider  may  by  attending  to  the  following  di- 
rections readily  determine  whether  her  horse 
be  leading  with  the  leg  she  desires,  and  also 
whether  he  be  advancing  in  a  true  and  united 
manner  :  If  he  be  moving  regularly  and  easily, 
with  a  light  play  upon  the  reins  in  harmony 
with  the  give  and  take  movements  of  the  hand, 
his  head  being  slightly  inclined  in  a  direction 
opposite  to  that  of  the  leading  leg,  and  his  ac- 
tion being  smooth  and  pleasant  to  the  rider,  he 
will,  as  a  rule,  be  cantering  correctly.  But  if 


232  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

he  be  moving  roughly  and  unevenly,  giving 
the  rider  a  sensation  of  jolting,  if  his  head  is 
inclined  toward  the  same  side  as  that  of  the 
leading  leg,  and  he  does  not  yield  prompt  obe- 
dience to  the  reins,  then  he  is  not  cantering 
properly,  and  should  be  immediately  stopped, 
again  collected,  and  started  anew.  If  necessary 
this  course  should  be  repeated  until  he  advances 
regularly  and  unitedly. 

Some  horses,  after  having  fairly  entered  upon 
the  canter,  will  change  the  leading  leg,  and  will 
even  keep  changing  from  one  to  the  other,  at 
short  intervals.  This  is  a  bad  habit,  and  one 
that  will  never  be  attempted  by  a  well-trained 
animal,  unless  his  rider  does  not  understand 
how  to  support  him  correctly  and  to  keep  him 
leading  with  the  required  leg.  A  horse  should 
never  be  allowed  to  change  his  leading  leg  ex- 
cept at  the  will  of  his  rider ;  and  should  he  do 
so,  he  should  be  chidden  and  stopped  instantly, 
and  then  started  anew. 

If  the  rider  when  trotting  rapidly  wishes  to 
change  to  a  canter,  she  must  first  moderate 
th'e  trot  to  a  walk,  because  the  horse  will  other- 
wise be  apt  to  break  from  the  trot  into  a  rapid 
gallop.  Should  he  insist  upon  trotting,  when  it 
is  desired  that  he  should  canter,  he  must  be 
stopped,  collected  with  the  curb-bit,  as  hereto- 


THE  CANTER.  233 

fore  described  in  the  directions  for  commencing 
the  canter,  and  started  anew.  This  course  must 
be  repeated  every  time  he  disobeys,  and  be  con- 
tinued until  he  is  made  to  canter. 

It  may  be  remarked  here  that,  in  the  canter, 
whenever  the  horse  moves  irregularly,  advances 
heavily  upon  his  fore-legs,  thus  endeavoring  to 
force  his  rider's  hand,  or  when  he  fails  to  yield 
ready  obedience,  he  should  always  be  stopped, 
collected,  and  started  anew,  —  repeating  this 
course,  if  necessary,  several  times  in  succession. 
Should  the  animal,  however,  persist  in  his  dis- 
obedience, pull  upon  the  reins,  and  get  his  head 
down,  his  rider  must,  as  he  moves  on,  gently 
yield  the  bridle-reins,  and  each  time  he  pulls 
upon  them  she  must  gradually,  but  firmly,  in- 
crease the  tension  upon  them,  by  drawing  them 
in  toward  her  waist.  This  counter  -  traction 
must  be  continued  until  the  horse  yields  to  the 
bridle  and  canters  properly.  When  he  pulls 
upon  tl:  e  reins  his  rider  in  advancing  her  hands 
to  yield  the  reins  should  be  careful  to  keep  her 
body  erect,  and  not  allow  it  to  be  pulled  for- 
ward. 

The  turn  in  the  canter.  In  turning  to  the 
right,  if  the  horse  is  leading  with  the  inward 
leg,  or  the  one  toward  the  centre  of  the  circle 
of  which  the  distance  to  be  turned  forms  an 


234  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

arc,  in  the  present  instance  the  right  fore-leg 
which  is  followed  by  the  right  hind-leg,  he  is 
said  to  be  true  and  united,  and  will  be  able  to 
make  the  turn  safely.  Should  the  turn  be  made 
toward  the  left,  the  horse  leading  with  his  in- 
ward or  left  fore-leg,  followed  by  the  left  hind- 
leg,  he  will  likewise  be  true  and  united. 

On  the  contrary,  the  animal  will  be  disunited 
when,  in  cantering  to  the  right,  he  leads  with 
the  right  fore-leg  followed  by  the  left  hind-leg, 
or  when  he  leads  with  the  left  fore-leg  followed 
by  the  right  hind-leg.  In  either  case,  from  want 
of  equilibrium  in  action  and  motion,  a  very 
slight  obstruction  may  make  him  fall. 

In  turning  toward  the  left,  in  a  canter,  the 
horse  will  be  disunited  if  he  leads  with  the  left 
fore-leg  followed  by  the  right  hind-leg,  or  if  he 
leads  with  the  right  fore-leg  followed  by  the 
left  hind-leg,  as  in  the  preceding  instance,  he 
will  be  liable  to  fall.  A  horse  is  said  to  go  false 
when,  in  turning  to  the  right,  in  the  ca.iter,  he 
leads  with  both  left  legs,  or  advances  his  left 
side  beyond  his  right ;  also,  when  in  cantering 
to  the  left  he  leads  with  both  right  legs  or  ad- 
vances his  right  side  beyond  his  left ;  in  either 
of  these  false  movements  he  will  be  very  liable 
to  fall. 

When  it  is  desired  to  turn  to  the  right,  in 


THE  CANTER.  235 

the  canter,  the  horse  must  be  kept  well  up  to 
the  bridle,  so  as  to  place  his  haunches  forward 
and  well  under  him,  thus  keeping  him  light  on 
his  fore-legs,  and  preventing  his  bearing  too 
heavily  upon  his  shoulders  ;  and,  while  the  in- 
ward rein  is  being  tightened  in  order  to  make 
the  turn,  the  outward  one  must  continue  to 
support  the  horse,  being  just  loose  enough  to 
allow  him  to  incline  his  head  and  neck  toward 
the  inner  side  of  the  turn.  Pressure  from  the 
left  leg  of  the  rider  will  keep  the  animal  from 
inclining  his  haunches  too  much  to  the  left,  dur- 
ing the  turn.  Should  the  steed  be  turned 
merely  by  means  of  the  inward  rein,  without 
being  kept  well  up  to  the  bridle,  and  without 
either  leg  or  whip  being  used  upon  his  outer 
side,  he  will  turn  heavily  upon  his  forehand, 
and  will  be  obliged  to  change  to  the  outward 
leg  in  order  to  support  himself.  This  will  cause 
him,  after  the  turn  has  been  accomplished,  to 
advance  in  a  disunited  way  in  the  canter. 

When  it  is  desired  to  turn  to  the  left,  the  in- 
structions in  the  preceding  paragraph  may  be 
pursued,  the  directions,  however,  being  reversed 
and  pressure  with  the  whip  being  employed  in- 
stead of  that  with  the  leg. 

Sudden,  sharp  turns,  are  always  dangerous, 
however  sure-footed  the  horse  may  be,  and  es- 


236  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

pecial  care  should  be  taken  not  to  turn  quickly 
to  the  right  when  the  left  fore-leg  leads,  nor  to 
the  left  when  the  right  fore-leg  leads,  as  in 
either  .case  the  animal  will  almost  certainly  be 
thrown  off  his  balance.  In  turning  a  "  sharp 
corner/'  especially  when  the  rider  cannot  see 
what  she  is  liable  to  encounter,  it  will  be  bet- 
ter for  her  to  make  the  turn  at  a  walk,  and 
keep  her  own  side  of  the  road,  the  right. 

The  stop  in  the  canter.  In  bringing  the 
horse  to  a  stand,  in  the  canter,  he  should  be 
well  placed  on  his  haunches  by  gradually  in- 
creasing the  pull  upon  the  curb-reins  just  as  his 
fore-feet  are  descending  toward  the  ground ; 
the  hind-feet  being  then  well  under  the  horse 
will  complete  the  stop.  The  rider  must  guard 
against  leaning  forward,  as  this  will  not  only 
prevent  the  horse  from  executing  the  stop  in 
proper  form,  but  should  he  suddenly  come  to  a 
stand,  it  will  throw  her  still  farther  forward, 
and  the  reins  will  become  relaxed.  Now,  while 
she  is  thus  leaning  forward,  should  the  animal 
suddenly  raise  his  head,  the  two  heads  will  be 
very  likely  to  come  into  unpleasant  contact ;  or 
should  the  horse  stumble,  his  liability  to  fall  will 
be  increased,  because  the  rider  will  not  be  in  a 
proper  position  to  support  him,  and  will  increase 
the  weight  upon  his  shoulders,  by  being  so  far 
forward. 


THE  CANTER.  237 

Many  ladies  not  only  lean  forward  while 
effecting  the  stop,  but  also  draw  the  bridle-hand 
to  the  left,  and  carry  the  bridle-arm  back  so 
that  the  elbow  projects  behind  and  beyond  the 
body,  while  at  the  same  time  they  elevate  the 
shoulder  on  this  side.  This  is  an  extremely 
awkward  manner  of  bringing  a  horse  to  a  stand. 
The  stop  should  be  made  in  the  same  manner 
as  that  described  in  the  walk,  that  is,  by  grad- 
ually drawing  the  bridle-hand  toward  the  waist, 
etc. 

Nearly  all  horses,  unless  exceptionally  well 
trained,  will  trot  a  short  distance  before  coming 
to  a  stand  in  the  canter  or  gallop,  and  it  is  here 
that  a  knowledge  of  the  French  or  cavalry  trot 
will  prove  essential,  because  the  rider  will  then 
comprehend  the  motion,  and  will  sit  closely  to 
the  saddle  until  the  horse  stops.  In  all  cases, 
the  horse  should  be  brought  to  a  stand  in  a  reg- 
ular, collected  manner,  so  that  with  a  little 
more  liberty  of  rein  he  can  promptly  reenter 
upon  the  canter,  should  this  be  desired. 


CHAPTER  X. 

THE  HAND  GALLOP. THE  FLYING  GALLOP. 

"  Now  we  're  off  like  the  winds  to  the  plains  whence  they  came; 
And  the  rapture  of  motion  is  thrilling  my  frame ! 
On,  on  speeds  my  courser,  scarce  printing  the  sod, 
Scarce  crushing  a  daisy  to  mark  where  he  trod! 
On,  on  like  a  deer,  when  the  hound's  early  bay 
Awakes  the  wild  echoes,  away,  and  away ! 
Still  faster,  still  farther,  he  leaps  at  my  cheer, 
Till  the  rush  of  the  startled  air  whirs  in  my  ear ! 
Now  'long  a  clear  rivulet  lieth  his  track,  — 
See  his  glancing  hoofs  tossing  the  white  pebbles  back ! 
Now  a  glen  dark  as  midnight  —  what  matter  ?  — we  '11  down 
Though  shadows  are  round  us,  and  rocks  o'er  us  frown; 
The  thick  branches  shake  as  we  're  hurrying  through, 
And  deck  us  with  spangles  of  silvery  dew ! " 

GRACE  GKEENWOOD. 

THE  hand  gallop  is  an  intermediate  gait  be- 
tween the  canter  and  the  flying  gallop.  Its 
motion,  though  rather  rapid,  is  smooth,  easy, 
and  very  agreeable  for  both  rider  and  steed. 
Nearly  all  horses,  especially  spirited  ones,  prefer 
this  movement  to  any  other ;  the  bronchos  on 
the  plains  of  the  far  West  will  keep  up  this 
long,  easy  lope  or  hand  gallop  for  miles,  without 
changing  their  gait,  or  requiring  their  riders  to 
draw  rein,  and  without  any  apparent  fatigue. 
This  pace  is  likewise  a  favorite  one  with  riding 


THE  HAND   GALLOP.  239 

parties,  as  the  motion  is  so  smooth  that  conver- 
sation can  be  kept  up  without  difficulty.  If 
the  animal's  movements  are  light,  supple,  and 
elegant,  the  lady  rider  presents  a  very  graceful 
appearance  when  riding  this  gait,  as  the  reac- 
tions in  it  are  very  mild ;  it  is  the  gait  par  ex- 
cellence, for  a  country  ride. 

On  a  breezy  summer  morning,  there  is  noth- 
ing more  exhilarating  than  a  ride  at  a  hand 
gallop,  on  a  willing,  spirited  horse  ;  it  brightens 
the  spirits,  braces  the  nerves,  refreshes  the 
brain,  and  enables  one  to  realize  that  "  life  is 
worth  living." 

<l  I  tell  thee,  0  stranger,  that  unto  me 

The  plunge  of  a  fiery  steed 
Is  a  noble  thought,  —  to  the  brave  and  free 
It  is  music,  and  breath,  and  majesty, — 

'T  is  the  life  of  a  noble  deed; 
And  the  heart  and  the  mind  are  in  spirit  allied 
In  the  charm  of  a  morning's  glorious  ride." 

Let  all  gloomy,  dyspeptic  invalids  try  the 
cheering  effects  of  a  hand  gallop,  that  they  may 
catch  a  glimpse  of  the  sunlight  that  is  always 
behind  even  the  darkest  cloud  of  despondency. 

When  the  horse  is  advancing  in  a  collected 
canter,  if  the  rider  will  animate  him  a  little 
more  by  gentle  taps  with  the  whip,  and  then  as 
he  springs  forward  give  him  more  liberty  of 
the  curb-rein,  he  will  enter  upon  a  hand  gal- 
lop. In  this  gait  he  will  lead  either  with  the 


240  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

left  or  the  right  foot,  but  the  oblique  position 
of  his  body  will  be  very  slight.  The  manage- 
ment of  the  reins,  the  turns  to  the  right  or  to 
the  left,  the  stop,  and  the  position  of  the  rider's 
body,  must,  in  this  gait  be  the  same  as  in  the 
canter,  except  that  the  body  need  not  be  quite 
so  erect,  and  the  touch  upon  the  reins  must  be 
very  light,  barely  appreciable. 

If  riding  a  spirited  horse,  the  lady  must  be 
upon  her  guard,  lest  he  increase  his  speed  and 
enter  into  a  flying  or  racing  gallop.  Any  horse 
is  liable  to  do  this  when  he  has  not  been  prop- 
erly exercised,  especially  if  he  is  with  other 
horses,  when  a  spirit  of  rivalry  is  aroused,  and  he 
sometimes  becomes  almost  unmanageable  from 
excitement.  Many  livery-stable  horses,  although 
quiet  enough  in  the  city,  will,  when  ridden 
upon  country  roads,  especially  in  the  spring,  re- 
quire all  the  skill  of  their  riders  to  keep  them 
under  control.  The  change  from  the  stone  and 
brick  of  the  city  or  town  to  the  odor  of  the 
fresh  grass  and  the  sight  of  green  fields  has  an 
exhilarating  effect  upon  them,  and  makes  them 
almost  delirious  with  gladness,  so  that  they  act 
like  anything  but  sensible,  quiet,  well- worked 
horses. 

When  her  horse  manifests  any  such  disposi- 
tion, the  rider  must  retain  her  presence  of 


THE  HAND   GALLOP.  241 

mind,  and  not  permit  any  nervousness  or  ex- 
citement on  her  part  to  increase  that  of  her 
horse.  She  must  keep  him  well  under  the  con- 
trol of  the  curb-bit,  and  not  allow  him  to  in- 
crease his  speed ;  when  he  endeavors  to  do  so, 
she  must  sit  erect,  and  every  time  his  fore-feet 
touch  the  ground  she  must  tighten  the  curb- 
reins,  by  drawing  them  gradually  but  firmly 
toward  her  waist.  She  will  thus  check  the 
animal's  desire  to  increase  his  speed,  by  com- 
pelling him  to  rest  upon  her  hand  at  short 
intervals  until  he  can  be  brought  under  com- 
mand and  again  made  obedient.  Care  must  be 
taken  not  to  make  this  strong  pull  upon  the 
animal's  mouth  constant,  as  this  will  be  more 
apt  to  increase  than  to  lessen  his  speed,  and 
will  also  prevent  her  from  turning  him  readily 
should  she  encounter  any  object  upon  the  road. 
Should  the  horse,  however,  continue  to  dis- 
obey the  commands  of  his  rider,  and  persist  in 
his  efforts  to  increase  his  speed,  she  must  then 
lean  well  back,  and  "  saw  his  mouth  "  with  the 
snaffle-reins,  that  is,  she  must  pull  first  one  of 
these  reins  and  then  the  other  in  rapid  succes- 
sion ;  this  may  cause  him  to  swerve  out  of  a 
straight  course,  but  if  he  has  a  snaffle-bit  sepa- 
rate from  the  curb  this  sawing  will  generally 
have  the  desired  effect,  and  stop  him. 

16 


242  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

If  the  horse  should  get  his  head  down  and 
manifest  a  disposition  to  change  the  full  gallop 
into  a  runaway,  the  rider  must,  as  she  values 
her  own  safety,  keep  her  body  well  inclined 
backward,  for  some  horses,  when  excited,  will, 
while  their  riders  are  endeavoring  to  check  or 
control  them,  kick  up  as  they  gallop  along,  and 
the  rider,  unless  she  is  prepared  for  such 
movements,  will  be  in  danger  of  being  thrown. 
In  such  a  case  every  effort  must  be  made  to 
raise  the  horse's  head.  To  do  this,  the  rider 
must  slacken  the  curb-reins  for  a  moment,  and 
then  suddenly  give  them  a  strong,  decided  jerk 
upward  ;  this  will  cause  a  severe  shock  to  the 
horse's  mouth,  and  make  him  raise  his  head  and 
stop  suddenly,  a  movement  that  may  throw  her 
toward  or  upon  the  front  of  the  saddle  with 
considerable  force,  unless  she  guard  herself 
against  such  an  accident  by  leaning  well  back. 

Should  the  horse,  when  galloping  at  full 
speed,  turn  a  corner  in  spite  of  the  efforts  of 
his  rider,  she  must  keep  a  steady  pull  upon  the 
outer  curb-rein,  and  lean  well  back  and  in  to- 
ward the  centre  of  the  curve  which  the  horse 
is  describing  in  his  turn.  All  this  must  be  done 
quickly,  or  she  will  lose  her  balance  and  fall  off 
upon  the  outer  side. 

During  all  these  violent  efforts  of  the  horse 


THE  FLYING   GALLOP.  245 

the  rider  must  keep  a  firm,  steady  seat,  pressing 
her  left  knee  up  strongly  against  the  third  pom- 
mel, and  at  the  same  time  holding  the  second 
clasped  firmly  by  the  bend  of  her  right  knee. 
If  she  recollects  to  do  all  this,  there  will  be  lit- 
tle cause  for  alarm,  as  it  will  then  be  very  dif- 
ficult for  her  horse  to  unseat  her.  The  com- 
bined balance  and  grip  of  limbs  will  give  her  a 
firmer  seat  than  it  is  possible  for  a  man  to  ac- 
quire in  his  saddle. 

In  the  flying  or  racing  gallop  the  horse 
manifests  the  utmost  capabilities  of  his  speed, 
his  body  at  every  push  of  his  hind-legs  being 
raised  from  the  ground  so  quickly  that  he  will 
appear  as  if  almost  flying  through  the  air ; 
hence  the  name  "  flying  gallop."  In  this  gait 
it  is  unimportant  with  which  leg  the  horse 
leads,  provided  the  advance  of  the  hind-leg  on 
the  same  side  as  that  of  the  leading  one  be  made 
correspondingly.  It  is  advisable  that  every 
lady  rider  should  learn  to  sit  the  flying  gallop, 
as  she  will  then  be  better  able  to  maintain  her 
seat,  and  to  manage  her  horse,  should  she  ever 
have  the  misfortune  to  be  run  away  with.  (Fig. 
32.) 

Many  ladies,  when  riding  in  the  country,  en- 
joy a  short  exhilarating  flying  gallop;  and  for 
their  benefit  a  few  instructions  are  here  given 


246          THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

that  will  enable  them  to  indulge  their  penchant 
for  rapid  riding,  without  danger  to  themselves, 
or  injury  to  their  horses.  Before  the  lady  at- 
tempts rapid  riding,  however,  she  must  be  thor- 
oughly trained  in  all  the  other  gaits  of  the 
animal,  must  possess  strong,  healthy  nerves, 
and  must  have  sufficient  muscular  power  in  her 
arms  to  hold  and  manage  her  horse,  and  to 
stop  him  whenever  occasion  requires ;  she  must 
also  have  fitted  to  his  mouth  a  curb-bit  which 
possesses  sufficient  power  to  control  him  and 
to  bring  him  to  a  stand,  when  this  is  desired. 
Above  all,  her  horse  must  be  sure-footed,  and 
free  from  any  and  every  defect  that  might  occa- 
sion stumbling. 

Every  point  having  been  carefully  attended 
to,  and  the  lady  being  ready  for  the  ride,  she 
must  sit  firmly  upon  the  centre  of  the  saddle, 
grasping  the  second  and  third  pommels,  as  de- 
scribed above.  She  must  be  careful  not  to 
press  strongly  upon  the  stirrup,  as  this  will 
tend  to  raise  her  body  from  the  saddle.  From 
the  hips  down  the  body  and  limbs  must  be  held 
as  immovable  as  possible.  The  body,  below  the 
waist,  must  by  its  own  weight,  aided  by  the 
clasp  of  the  right  and  left  legs  upon  their  re- 
spective pommels,  secure  a  firm  seat  upon  the 
saddle.  From  the  waist  up  the  body  must  be 


THE  FLYING  GALLOP.  247 

pliable,  the  shoulders  being  well  back,  and  the 
back  curved  in,  so  that  the  rider  may  keep  her 
balance,  and  control  the  horse's  action.  The 
reins  must  be  held  separately,  in  the  manner 
described  for  holding  the  double  bridle-reins 
in  both  hands.  The  animal  must  be  ridden  and 
supported  by  the  snaffle-reins,  the  curb  being 
held  ready  to  check  'him  instantly  should  he 
endeavor  to  obtain  the  mastery.  The  hands 
must  be  held  low,  and  about  six  or  eight  inches 
apart,  and  the  rider's  body  must  lean  back 
somewhat. 

Leaning  forward  is  a  favorite  trick  of  the 
horse-jockey  when  riding  a  race,  as  it  is  sup- 
posed to  assist  the  horse,  and  also  enable  the 
rider  to  raise  himself  on  the  stirrups;  but  as 
lady  riders  are  not  horse-jockeys,  and  are  not 
supposed  to  ride  for  a  wager,  but  simply  for  the 
enjoyment  of  an  exhilarating  exercise,  it  will 
not  be  at  all  necessary  for  them  to  assume  this 
stooping  posture.  Many  of  the  best  horsemen, 
when  riding  at  full  gallop  in  the  hunting  field, 
or  on  the  road,  prefer  to  incline  the  body  some- 
what backward,  this  having  been  found  the 
safest  as  well  as  most  graceful  position  for  the 
rider. 

As  the  horse  moves  rapidly  forward,  the  rider, 
while  keeping  a  firm  hand  upon  the  snaffle-reins 


248  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

so  as  to  give  full  support  to  the  horse,  must  be 
sure  with  every  stride  of  the  animal  to  "  give 
and  take,"  and  this  motion,  instead  of  being 
limited  to  the  hands  and  wrists,  as  in  all  other 
gaits,  must  in  this  one  embrace  the  whole  of 
the  fore  -  arms,  which,  using  the  elbows  as  a 
hinge,  should  move  as  far  as  is  necessary. 

To  stop  the  horse  in  a  flying  gallop,  the 
curb-reins  must  be  drawn  upward  and  toward 
the  waist  gradually,  for  should  they  be  pulled 
upon  suddenly  it  would  be  apt  to  stop  him  so 
abruptly  that  he  would  either  become  over- 
balanced, or  cross  his  legs,  and  fall. 

In  this  gait,  the  rider  should  never  attempt 
to  turn  her  horse  except  upon  a  very  large  cir- 
cle, because,  even  when  in  the  proper  position, 
unless  she  possesses  great  muscular  power,  she 
will  be  almost  certain  to  be  thrown  off  on  the 
outward  side  by  the  forcible  and  vigorous  im- 
petus imparted. 


CHAPTER  XI. 

THE  LEAP.  —  THE  STANDING  LEAP.  —  THE  FLY- 
ING LEAP. 

"  Soft  thy  skin  as  silken  skein, 
Soft  as  woman's  hair  thy  mane, 

Tender  are  thine  eyes  and  true  ; 
All  thy  hoofs  like  ivory  shine, 
Polished  bright;  oh,  life  of  mine, 

Leap,  and  rescue  Kurroglou!  " 

Kyrat,  then,  the  strong  and  fleet, 
Drew  together  his  four  white  feet, 

Paused  a  moment  on  the  verge, 
Measured  with  his  eye  the  space, 
And  into  the  air's  embrace 

Leaped  as  leaps  the  ocean  serge. 

LONGFELLOW,  The  Leap  ofSoushan  Beg. 

A  LADY  rider  who  has  the  nerve  and  confi- 
dence to  ride  a  hand  gallop,  or  a  flying  gallop, 
will  be  ready  to  learn  to  leap.  Indeed,  instruc- 
tion in  this  accomplishment  should  always  be 
given,  as  it  is  of  great  assistance  in  many  emer- 
gencies. The  most  gentle  horse  may  become 
frightened,  shy  suddenly  to  one  side,  or  plunge 
violently  for  some  reason  or  other,  and  these 
abrupt  movements  strongly  resemble  those  of 
leaping ;  if,  therefore,  the  rider  understands  the 
leap,  she  will  know  better  how  to  maintain  her 


250  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

equilibrium.  Or  she  may  meet  some  obstruction 
on  the  road,  as  the  trunk  of  a  tree  felled  by  a 
storm ;  when,  instead  of  being  compelled  to  re- 
turn home  without  finishing  her  ride,  she  can 
leap  over  the  obstacle.  Again,  should  she  at 
any  time  be  in  great  haste  to  reach  her  destina- 
tion she  may,  by  leaping  some  low  gap  in  a 
fence,  or  some  small  stream,  be  able  to  take  one 
or  more  short  cuts,  and  thus  greatly  lessen  the 
distance  she  would  have  had  to  ride  on  the 
road. 

Leaping  is  by  no  means  difficult  to  learn. 
With  an  English  saddle,  the  third  pommel  will 
prevent  the  rider  from  being  shaken  off  by  the 
violence  of  the  motion,  and  will  thus  make  leap- 
ing entirely  safe  for  a  lady  provided  the  horse 
be  well-trained  and  sure-footed.  Before  ven- 
turing upon  a  leap,  three  requisites  are  nec- 
essary :  first,  the  horse  must  be  a  good  and 
fearless  leaper;  second,  the  rider  must  have 
confidence  in  herself  and  steed,  because  any 
nervousness  on  her  part  will  be  apt  to  cause  the 
animal  to  leap  awkwardly  ;  and  third,  she  must 
always  be  sure  of  the  condition  of  the  ground 
on  the  opposite  side  of  the  object  over  which 
the  leap  is  to  be  made  —  it  must  neither  slope 
abruptly  down,  nor  present  any  thorny  bushes, 
nor  be  so  soft  and  soggy  that  the  horse  will  be 


THE  LEAP.  253' 

apt  to  sink  into  it.  No  risk  must  be  taken  in 
the  leap,  except  in  cases  of  emergency,  when,  of 
course,  the  rider  may  have  neither  time  nor  op- 
portunity to  select  her  ground,  and  be  obliged 
to  leap  her  steed  over  the  nearest  available 
point.  The  author  once  avoided  what  might 
have  proved  a  serious  accident  to  both  herself 
and  horse,  by  promptly  leaping  him  over  a 
hedge  of  thorn  bushes,  upon  the  other  side  of 
which  was  a  river :  this  was  done  in  order  to 
avoid  colliding  in  a  narrow  road  with  a  fright- 
ened, runaway  team,  which  was  quite  beyond 
the  control  of  its  driver. 

The  standing  leap  will  prove  more  difficult 
to  learn  than  the  flying  leap,  but,  nevertheless, 
it  should  be  the  first  one  practiced,  and  when 
once  acquired,  the  other  will  be  mere  play.  A 
bar  twelve  feet  long,  raised  two  feet  from  the 
ground,  will  be  sufficient  for  practice  in  this 
exercise  ;  if  a  lady  can  manage  a  leap  of  this 
height  with  expertness  and  grace,  she  will  be 
fully  able  to  bound  over  a  still  higher  obstacle, 
should  she  desire  to  do  so,  and  her  horse  be 
equal  to  the  occasion.  Before  attempting  the 
leap,  she  must  be  sure  that  she  is  perfectly  se- 
cure upon  the  saddle,  with  her  left  knee  directly 
under  the  third  pommel  so  as  to  press  it  firmly 
against  the  latter  as  the  horse  rises  to  the  leap ; 


254  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

her  left  leg,  from  the  knee  to  the  stirrup,  must 
hang  perpendicularly1  along  the  side  of  the 
horse,  the  inner  surface  or  side  of  the  knee 
lightly  pressing  against  the  saddle-flap ;  her 
foot  must  be  well  placed  in  the  stirrup ;  her 
seat  directly  in  the  centre  of  the  saddle ;  her 
body  erect  and  square  to  the  front ;  her  shoul- 
ders well  back;  and  the  small  of  her  back 
curved  in.  The  right  leg  must  firmly  grasp  the 
second  pommel  as  the  horse  rises,  and  the  right 
heel  be  held  somewhat  back,  and  close  to  the 
fore-flap  of  the  saddle.  The  hands  must  be 
held  low,  and  about  six  inches  apart,  with  a 
snaffle-rein  in  each,  and  the  curb-reins  must  be 
so  placed  that  the  rider  will  not  unconsciously 
draw  upon  them,  but  must  not  hang  so  loosely 
as  to  become  caught  accidentally  upon  any  pro- 
jecting article  with  which  they  may  come  in  con- 
tact. If  all  these  points  be  carefully  attended 
to,  just  previous  to  walking  the  horse  up  to  the 
bar,  the  rider  will  be  in  correct  position  and 
ready  for  the  leap,  which  she  will  accomplish 
very  quickly,  with  perfect  security,  and  with  a 
much  firmer  seat  than  that .  obtained  by  the 
most  finished  horseman. 

1  If  the  leap  be  a  very  high  one,  the  left  foot  may  be  thrust  a 
little  more  forward  to  enable  the  rider  to  lean  back  as  far  as  is 
necessary. 


THE  LEAP.  255 

The  principal  movement  for  which  the  rider 
should  be  prepared  in  leaping  is  that  of  being 
thrown  forward  on  the  saddle,  both  when  the 
horse  makes  the  spring  and  when  his  fore-feet 
touch  the  ground.  In  order  to  avoid  this  acci- 
dent, the  rider,  keeping  a  firm  seat  and  grasp 
upon  the  pommels,  must  incline  her  shoulders 
somewhat  backward,  both  when  the  horse 
springs  from  the  ground  and  also  during  the 
descent,  the  amount  of  inclination  varying  with 
the  height  of  the  leap.  The  erect  position 
should  be  resumed  when  the  hind-legs  have 
again  touched  the  ground.  In  a  very  high 
leap,  the  rider's  body  should  be  bent  so  far  back 
during  the  descent  as  to  look  almost  as  if  in 
contact  with  the  back  of  the  horse. 

When  the  points  named  above  have  been  at- 
tended to,  the  horse  must  be  collected,  with  his 
hind-legs  well  under  him,  and  then  be  briskly 
walked  up  to  the  bar  or  obstacle  to  be  leaped 
and  placed  directly  before  it,  but  not  so  close 
that  he  cannot  clear  it  without  striking  his 
knees  against  it  as  he  rises,  —  sufficient  room 
must  always  be  allowed  him  for  his  spring. 
Now,  after  receiving  a  light  touch  or  pull  upon 
the  reins  to  tell  him  that  his  rider  is  ready,  he 
will  raise  himself  upon  his  hind-legs  for  the 
leap.  As  he  rises,  the  rider's  body,  if  properly 


256  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

seated,  as  heretofore  explained,  will  naturally 
assume  a  sufficient  inclination  forward  without 
any  effort  on  her  part.  While  in  this  position 
she  must  not  carry  her  shoulders  forward,  but 
must  keep  them  well  back,  with  the  waist  well 
curved  in  as  when  sitting  erect.  It  should 
never  be  forgotten  that  in  the  rise  during  the 
leap,  just  previous  to  the  spring,  no  efforts 
whatever  must  be  made  by  the  rider  to  support 
the  horse,  or  to  lift  him,  but  instead,  she  should 
simply  hold  the  reins  so  lightly  that  his  mouth 
can  just  be  felt,  which  is  called  "  giving  a  free 
rein."  If  the  reins  be  allowed  to  hang  too 
loosely  they  may  catch  upon  some  object  not 
noticed  by  the  rider,  and  not  only  be  wrenched 
from  her  hands,  but  also  give  the  horse's  mouth 
a  severe  jerk,  or  perhaps  throw  him  upon  the 
ground.  Too  loose  a  rein  would,  moreover,  be 
apt  to  make  it  impossible  for  her  to  give  timely 
support  to  the  animal  as  his  fore-feet  touched 
the  ground.  The  leap,  it  must  be  borne  in 
mind,  is  effected  very  quickly.  (Fig.  33.) 

As  the  horse  springs  from  his  hind-legs  to 
make  the  leap,  the  rider  must  advance  her 
arms,  with  her  hands  held  as  low  as  possible 
so  as  to  give  him  a  sufficiently  free  rein  to  en- 
able him  to  extend  himself ;  this  position  of  the 
arms  will  also  prevent  the  reins  from  being  for- 


st 


I 


THE  LEAP.  259 

cibly  wrested  from  her  hands  by  the  horse's 
movements.  At  the  moment  of  the  spring  and 
the  advance  of  the  arms,  the  rider's  body  must 
be  inclined  backward,  the  erect  position  of  the 
waist  and  shoulders  being,  however,  maintained. 
As  the  animal's  fore-feet  touch  the  ground,  the 
hands  must  be  gently  drawn  in  toward  the 
waist  in  order  to  support  him,  as  such  support 
will  be  expected  by  the  horse,  and  must  be  con- 
tinued even  after  his  hind-legs  rest  upon  the 
ground,  so  that  the  animal  will  not  become  dis- 
united, but  will  move  onward  in  a  collected 
manner.  (Fig.  34.) 

Many  riding-teachers  instruct  their  pupils  to 
incline  the  body  well  forward  as  the  horse  rises, 
while  others  require  their  pupils  to  lean  well 
back.  The  advocates  of  the  former  method  say 
that  this  forward  inclination  conforms  to  the 
position  of  the  horse  at  the  time,  and  so  places 
the  weight  of  the  body  as  to  assist  the  horse  in 
his  spring.  They  who  adopt  the  other  method 
maintain  that  if  the  body  be  inclined  forward 
in  the  rise,  it  will  be  almost,  if  not  quite,  im- 
possible for  the  rider,  from  the  rapidity  with 
which  the  horse  extends  himself,  to  make  the 
backward  inclination  in  time  to  enable  her  to 
regain  her  balance  quickly.  A  happy  medium 
will  prove  the  best.  If  the  rider  be  seated  cor- 


260  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

rectly  at  the  time  the  horse  rises,  her  body  will 
naturally  incline  a  little  forward,  and  there  will 
be  but  little  weight  upon  the  horse's  hind- 
quarters, while,  as  he  springs  and  extends  him- 
self in  his  leap,  she  can  promptly  adapt  herself 
to  his  movements  and  incline  her  body  back- 
ward. 

By  leaning  back  as  the  horse  rises  on  his 
hind-legs,  the  weight  of  his  rider  will  be  thrown 
upon  his  hind-quarters,  and  she  will  present  an 
awkward  appearance ;  while  at  the  same  time 
she  will  be  very  apt  to  shorten  the  reins,  and 
thus  confine  the  horse  so  much  that  his  leap  will 
become  clumsy  and  dangerous. 

On  commencing  the  leap  the  rider,  as  hereto- 
fore stated,  must  never  attempt  to  raise  the 
horse  by  the  reins ;  a  light,  gentle  touch  or 
pull  given  to  them  with  the  fingers,  as  when 
starting  upon  a  hand  gallop,  is  all  that  will  be 
necessary.  The  horse  must  be  left  free  to  take 
the  leap  in  his  own  way,  using  his  own  instinct 
or  judgment  in  order  that  he  may  clear  his  fore 
feet  from  the  bar  or  object  over  which  he  has 
to  pass.  During  the  rise,  the  rider  must  care- 
fully guard  against  raising  her  hands,  and  also 
against  jerking  or  holding  back  the  reins,  as 
either  of  these  movements  will  discourage  the 
horse,  and,  should  he  be  tender  mouthed,  he 


THE  LEAP.  261 

will  refuse  to  leap  at  all,  his  own  instinct  warn- 
ing him  that  it  is  dangerous  to  attempt  it  under 
such  conditions. 

A  rather  hard  mouthed,  courageous  animal, 
that  has  had  experience  with  awkward  riders, 
will,  as  he  extends  himself  in  the  leap,  force 
his  rider's  hands  by  a  sudden  jerk  of  his  head, 
so  as  either  to  pull  the  reins  out  of  her  hands, 
or,  should  she  manage  to  retain  her  hold  upon 
them,  to  pull  her  forward  upon  the  saddle. 

Many  ladies,  in  their  fear  of  becoming  dis- 
placed during  the  leap,  will  unconsciously  press 
their  left  leg  and  foot  strongly  against  the  side 
of  the  horse,  thus  causing  him  to  swerve  or  to 
refuse  to  leap.  Gentlemen  teachers  are  apt  to 
be  unaware  of  this .  pressure,  as  the  leg  is  hid- 
den underneath  the  riding  skirt,  and  not  unfre- 
quently  they  have  been  puzzled  to  comprehend 
why  a  well  -  trained,  docile  horse  should  leap 
very  well  with  some  of  their  lady  pupils,  and 
awkwardly,  or  not  at  all,  with  others. 

A  common  error,  in  attempting  to  leap,  is  to 
sit  too  far  back  upon  the  saddle,  a  position  that 
not  only  prevents  the  rider  from  supporting 
herself  properly  by  the  pommels,  but  is  also 
likely  to  occasion  her  a  severe  jar  as  the  horse's 
feet  touch  the  ground.  When  in  the  correct 
position,  the  body  is  placed  as  far  forward  upon 


262  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

the  saddle  as  the  pommels  will  permit,  the  waist 
and  shoulders  only  being  inclined  backward,  as 
already  described. 

Pressing  heavily  upon  the  stirrup  is  another 
fault.  This  not  only  destroys  the  usefulness  of 
the  third  pommel,  but,  as  has  already  been  re- 
marked, such  pressure  will  tend  to  lift  the  body 
from  the  saddle.  The  foot  should  merely  be 
kept  light  and  steady  in  the  stirrup. 

It  will  be  better  for  a  beginner  to  leap  with  a 
snaffle-rein  in  each  hand.  After  having  thor- 
oughly learned  how  to  make  the  leap  properly, 
she  may  then  prefer  to  hold  all  the  reins  in  the 
left  hand.  In  this  case,  she  must  be  very  care- 
ful not  to  throw  up  the  unoccupied  right  hand 
and  arm  as  the  horse  passes  over  the  obstacle ; 
for,  besides  being  a  very  ungraceful  movement, 
it  may  lead  the  horse  to  suppose  that  he  is 
about  to  be  struck  with  the  whip,  and  so  cause 
him  to  make  the  leap  precipitately,  and  upon 
reaching  the  ground  to  gallop  wildly  off. 

The  rider  must  hold  her  head  firm,  not  only 
for  the  sake  of  appearances,  but  also  to  escape 
biting  her  tongue  and  receiving  a  violent  jerk 
of  the  neck,  when  the  horse's  feet  touch  the 
ground. 

If  a  horse,  just  before  leaping,  be  too  much 
confined  or  collected  by  an  unnecessary  degree 


THE  LEAP.  263 

of  tension  upon  the  reins,  especially  if  he  be 
not  thoroughly  trained,  he  will  rise  from  all 
four  legs  almost  simultaneously,  and  also  alight 
upon  them  all  together.  In  horse-jockey's  par- 
lance this  is  termed  a  u  buck-leap."  It  is  an 
awkward  manner  of  leaping,  and  gives  a  severe 
shock  to  the  animal  beside  fearfully  jolting  his 
rider.  Again,  a  horse  not  well  trained  in  the 
leap,  or  somewhat  indolent,  may,  if  not  ani- 
mated and  properly  collected  just  before  rising, 
fail  to  leap  over  the  obstacle,  or  in  passing  over 
it  may  strike  it  with  his  hind-feet,  for  he  will 
attempt  the  leap  in  a  loose,  straggling  manner. 
An  animal  that  is  well  trained,  and  accustomed 
to  leaping,  will  take  care  of  himself,  and  will 
require  very  little  assistance  from  his  rider ;  a 
light  hand  upon  the  reins  just  before  he  rises, 
a  free  rein  as  he  extends  himself,  and  support 
when  he  touches  the  ground  being  all  that  is 
necessary. 

Should  the  lady  be  expert  in  riding,  and  de- 
sire to  teach  her  steed  to  leap,  she  can  readily 
do  so  by  pursuing  the  following  course  :  Let 
a  bar  about  twelve  feet  in  length,  and  two  feet 
from  the  ground,  be  so  arranged  that  the  horse 
cannot  pass  around  it.  If  possible,  he  should 
be  allowed  to  see  a  well- trained  horse  leap  over 
this  bar  a  number  of  times ;  then  taking  advan- 


264  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

tage  of  a  time  when  her  horse  is  hungry,  his 
mistress  should  give  him  a  few  oats  and,  pass- 
ing over  the  bar,  she  should  rattle  the  oats  and 
call  to  him,  when  he  will  bound  over  to  obtain 
them.  This  course  should  be  followed  at  each 
meal,  and  she  should  reward  him  by  feeding, 
caressing,  and  praising  him  every  time  he  leaps 
the  bar,  —  the  object  being  to  accustom  him 
to  leap  it  without  being  whipped  or  treated 
harshly.  By  thus  being  allowed  to  take  the 
leap  of  his  own  accord  and  without  assistance, 
he  will  gain  confidence,  and  will  not  be  apt  to 
refuse  when  his  rider  is  placed  upon  his  back. 
In  the  course  of  this  training,  the  appearance 
of  the  bar  should  be  changed  in  various  ways, 
as,  for  example,  by  placing  different  bright  col- 
ored articles  upon  it,  such  as  pieces  of  carpet, 
rugs,  shawls,  etc.  If  he  be  accustomed  to  leap 
only  over  an  object  that  invariably  presents  the 
same  appearance,  he  may  refuse  to  leap  one  of 
a  different  aspect. 

Having  thus  trained  the  horse  until  he  has 
become  quite  familiar  with  the  movements  of 
the  leap,  and  does  not  refuse  to  pass  over  the 
bar,  whatever  appearance  it  may  present,  he 
will  then  be  ready  for  his  rider.  For  the  first 
few  trials  the  lady  should  take  care  to  have  the 
bar  consist  of  some  material  that  can  readily  be 


THE  LEAP.  265 

broken,  in  order  to  prevent  any  accident  should 
the  horse,  in  passing  over  with  her  weight  upon 
his  back,  strike  it  with  either  his  fore  or  hind 
feet.  Once  mounted,  she  should  teach  him  to 
clear  the  bar  in  a  deliberate  manner,  not  allow- 
ing him  to  rush  at  it  and  jump  from  all  four 
feet  at  once.  She  will  have  to  collect  him,  cause 
him  to  place  his  hind-legs  under  him  so  that,  as 
he  rises,  his  weight  will  be  thrown  upon  his 
haunches,  and,  as  he  leaps  over,  she  must  be 
exceedingly  careful  not  to  restrain  him  in  the 
least,  as  any  thoughtless  act  or  awkwardness  on 
her  part  may  give  him  a  great  distaste  for  an 
exercise  which,  otherwise,  he  would  have  no 
reluctance  in  performing. 

With  regard  to  teaching  a  young  horse  to 
leap,  the  author  is  much  gratified  to  know  that 
her  views  are  sustained  by  several  eminent 
equestrians,  and  among  them  Mr.  E.  Mayhew 
of  England,  who  states  that  a  horse  should 
never  be  allowed  to  leap  until  he  has  attained 
at  least  his  fifth  year,  and  who  in  his  excellent 
work,  entitled  "  The  Illustrated  Horse  Manage- 
ment," etc.,  remarks :  "  To  place  a  rider  upon 
an  animal's  back  and  then  to  expect  a  bar  to  be 
cleared  is  very  like  loading  a  young  lady  with 
a  sack  of  flour,  as  preparatory  to  a  dancing  les- 
son being  received.  This  folly  is,  however,  uni- 


266  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

versally  practiced  ;  so  is  that  of  teaching  the 
paces,  when  the  quadruped's  attention  is  proba- 
hly  engrossed  by  the  burden  which  the  spine 
has  to  sustain. 

"  Leaping  is  best  taught  by  turning  the  horse 
into  a  small  paddock  having  a  low  hedge  or  hur- 
dle-fence across  its  centre.  A  rider  should,  in 
sight  of  the  animal,  take  an  old  horse  over  sev- 
eral times.  The  groom  who  brings  the  corn  at 
the  meal  hour  then  goes  to  that  side  where  the 
animal  is  not  and  calls,  shaking  up  the  proven- 
der all  the  time  his  voice  sounds.  The  boundary 
will  soon  be  cleared.  When  half  the  quantity 
is  eaten,  the  man  should  proceed  to  the  opposite 
compartment  and  call  again.  If  this  is  done 
every  time  the  young  horse  is  fed,  the  fence 
may  be  gradually  heightened ;  after  six  months 
of  such  tuition,  a  light  rider  may  be  safely 
placed  upon  the  back. 

"  Instruction,  thus  imparted,  neither  strains 
the  structures  nor  tries  the  temper.  The  habit 
is  acquired  without  those  risks  which  necessarily 
attend  a  novel  performance,  while  a  burden  op- 
presses the  strength,  and  whip  or  spur  distracts 
the  attention.  The  body  is  not  disabled  by  the 
imposition  of  a  heavy  load  before  its  powers  are 
taxed  to  the  uttermost.  The  quadruped  has  all 
its  capabilities  unfettered,  and,  in  such  a  state, 


THE  LEAP.  267 

leaping  speedily  becomes  as  easy  of  performance 
as  any  other  motion." 

Horses  leap  in  different  ways  ;  the  best  leap- 
ers  being  those  which  just  glide  over  the  object 
without  touching  it,  —  they  appear  to  measure 
the  height  required  for  the  leap,  and,  whether 
the  object  be  high  or  low,  they  skim  close  to  it. 
Such  animals  can  be  trusted,  and  may  be  al- 
lowed to  leap  without  urging  or  hurrying  them, 
for  they  require  very  little  assistance  from  their 
riders,  and  do  better  when  left  to  themselves. 
Other  horses  exaggerate  the  leap  and  rise  higher 
than  is  required  ;  they  make  a  very  fine  appear- 
ance when  leaping,  but  are  apt  to  light  too  close 
to  the  opposite  side  of  the  bar  or  obstacle,  be- 
cause they  expend  all  their  energies  on  height 
instead  of  width.  The  worst  leapers  are  those 
which,  instead  of  clearing  the  bar  at  a  single 
bound,  make  two  bounds,  as  it  were,  in  passing 
over  it :  the  fore-part  of  the  horse  having  passed 
over,  the  body  will  seem  to  be  resting  for  an  ap- 
preciable time  upon  the  fore-legs. 

The  flying  leap  can  be  taken,  without  stop- 
ping, from  any  gait  that  is  more  rapid  than  a 
walk,  though  commonly  taken  from  the  gallop. 
It  is  a  very  easy  leap,  being  little  more  than  an 
extended  gallop.  The  rider  takes  the  same  firm, 
central  position  upon  the  saddle  as  has  been  de- 


268  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

scribed  for  the  standing  leap.  In  the  flying  leap 
the  body  must  be  inclined  well  back  from  the 
start,  care  being  taken  not  to  make  any  forward 
inclination  whatever.  When  the  horse  has  fairly 
landed,  after  the  leap,  the  body  must  again  be- 
come erect.  The  degree  of  the  backward  incli- 
nation must  be  in  accordance  with  the  height 
and  width  of  the  leap.  During  the  whole  period 
of  the  leap  the  hands  must  be  kept  low  and  the 
reins  be  freely  given  to  the  animal,  which  must 
be  supported  as  he  lands  on  the  opposite  side. 
As  the  horse  runs  toward  the  object  to  be  leaped 
over,  the  rider  must,  when  about  twelve  or  fif- 
teen yards  from  it,  gradually  relax  the  reins,  by 
advancing  her  bridle  hand  or  hands ;  and,  if  her 
horse  be  a  willing  and  good  leaper,  he  may  be 
allowed  to  select  his  own  pace,  and  use  his  own 
judgment  as  to  the  proper  distance  from  which 
to  make  the  spring. 

If  the  horse  be  unused  to  leaping,  or  be  un- 
willing, the  rider  must  be  upon  her  guard  lest 
he  attempt  to  defend  himself  and  avoid  the  leap, 
either  by  suddenly  swerving  to  one  side  or  by 
stopping  before  the  object  to  be  leaped  and  then 
backing,  or  rearing.  These  actions  are  gener- 
ally the  result  of  the  horse's  want  of  confidence 
in  his  own  powers,  and  severity  will  only  make 
matters  worse.  In  a  dilemma  of  this  kind,  the 


THE  LEAP.  269 

rider  will  have  to  convert  the  flying  into  the 
standing  leap,  as  follows  :  — 

She  must  turn  her  horse  and  walk  him  a  short 
distance  away  from  the  object,  then,  turning 
him  again  toward  it,  she  must  encourage  him  to 
advance  slowly  that  he  may  take  a  good  look  at 
it ;  at  the  same  time  she  must  have  a  light  and 
ready  hand  on  the  reins,  just  firm  enough  to 
keep  his  head  steady  and  maintain  control  over 
his  neck,  so  as  to  prevent  him  from  swerving  to 
the  right  or  to  the  left.  She  should  then  kindly 
and  firmly  encourage  him  to  make  the  bound ; 
and  by  patience  and  perseverance  in  this  course 
he  will  generally  be  induced  to  do  so.  After  he 
has  obeyed,  she  must  not  make  him  repeat  the 
movement  several  times  in  succession,  as  if  she 
were  triumphing  over  him,  because  he  might 
regard  such  a  process  as  a  sort  of  challenge,  and 
renew  the  contest ;  instead  of  such  measures,  he 
should  be  allowed  to  pass  on  quietly,  no  further 
attention  being  given  to  the  matter.  By  this 
change  from  the  flying  to  the  standing  leap  the 
horse  can  be  better  prevented  from  shying,  and 
on  the  next  occasion  will  be  apt  to  make  the 
flying  leap  over  the  object  without  swerving. 

The  whip  or  spur  should  never  be  employed 
to  make  an  obstinate  or  timid  horse  leap,  as  he 
will  ever  after  associate  such  objects  as  those 


270  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

over  which  he  has  been  thus  urged  or  forced  to 
leap  with  fear  of  punishment,  and  his  rider  will 
never  be  sure  of  him  when  approaching  one  of 
them,  for  he  will  either  shy,  or  else  bound  over 
it  in  such  a  flurried  manner  as  will  prove  dan- 
gerous both  to  himself  and  his  rider.  An  in- 
dolent horse,  that  requires  to  be  roused  by  whip 
or  spur,  is  not  a  suitable  one  for  a  lady  to  ride 
at  a  leap.  Some  horses  will  refuse  to  leap 
when  traveling  alone,  but  will  do  so  spiritedly 
and  excellently  when  in  company  with  others 
of  their  kind. 


CHAPTER  XII. 

DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE. CRITICAL  SITUATIONS. 

"  High  pampered  steeds,  ere  tamed,  the  lash  disdain, 
And  proudly  foam,  impatient  of  the  rein." 

VIRGIL,  Sotheby's  Translation. 
"  The  startling  steed  was  seized  with  sudden  fright." 

DRYDEN. 

A  LADY'S  horse  is  generally  selected  for  his 
gentleness,  soundness,  good  training,  and  free- 
dom from  vice,  and  the  rider's  management  of 
him  is  usually  so  kind  and  considerate  that  he 
is  seldom  roused  to  rebellion;  hence,  she  is 
rarely  called  upon  to  enter  into  a  contention 
with  him.  The  docility  of  a  lady's  steed  is  al- 
most proverbial,  and  when  purchasing  a  horse 
the  highest  recommendation  as  to  his  gentleness 
and  safeness  is  the  assurance  that  he  has  "  been 
used  to  carry  a  woman."  Horse-dealers  are 
well  acquainted  with  this  fact,  and  attach  a 
high  value  to  it,  as  a  sure  criterion  of  the  ani- 
mal's kindly  nature.  No  lady  rider,  however 
expert  she  may  be,  will,  if  she  be  wise  and  have 
a  regard  for  her  own  safety,  ride  or  endeavor 
to  conquer  a  really  vicious  horse  ;  yet  there 


272  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

may  be  times  when  even  the  hitherto  most  doc- 
ile animal  will  suddenly  display  that  which  in 
Yorkshire  dialect  is  called  "  mistech  ;  "  that  is, 
there  may  be  unexpectedly  developed  a  restive 
trait,  for  which  there  seems  to  be  no  reason. 
Even  a  really  good-natured  horse  may,  owing 
to  high  feed  and  little  work,  shy,  plunge,  and 
kick,  in  his  exuberance  of  spirits,  and  should 
his  rider  not  know  how  to  control  these  sudden 
and  unexpected  manifestations,  he  may  gain 
the  ascendency,  and  she  be  thrown  from  the 
saddle.  That  which,  on  the  part  of  the  horse, 
is  intended  for  good-humored  play,  may  thus, 
from  want  of  control,  degenerate  into  positive 
viciousness.  A  skillful  rider  will  manage  and 
endure  the  prancings,  pawings,  and  impatience 
of  her  steed,  —  which  are  frequently  only  his 
method  of  expressing  satisfaction  and  happiness 
in  carrying  his  kind  mistress,  —  and  will  con- 
tinue riding  and  controlling  him  until  he  be- 
comes calm  and  quiet,  and  ceases  to  display  his 
impulsive  sensitiveness.  Again,  a  lady  may 
have  occasion  to  ride  a  strange  horse,  of  whose 
disposition  she  knows  very  little.  It  is,  there- 
fore, very  important  that  every  horsewoman 
should  be  prepared  to  meet  and  to  overcome 
any  eccentric  demonstrations  on  the  part  of  the 
animal  she  may  be  riding. 


DEFENSES  OF    THE  HORSE.  273 

Some  horses  are  constitutionally  nervous  and 
timid,  always  fearful  and  upon  the  lookout,  con- 
stantly scrutinizing  every  object  around  them, 
and  keeping  their  riders  incessantly  on  the 
watch.  These  horses,  though  disagreeable  to 
ride,  are  seldom  dangerous,  as  they  will  readily 
obey  the  reins  and  yield  to  the  hand  that  has 
many  times  proved  its  reliability  and  correct- 
ness. 

SHYING.  —  The  position  in  which  a  horse 
places  his  ears  is  a  sure  indication  of  his  imme- 
diate intentions.  When  he  raises  his  head  and 
points  his  ears  strongly  forward,  it  is  because 
he  sees  some  object  at  the  side  of  the  road,  or 
approaching,  which  renders  him  uneasy  or  even 
fearful.  In  such  a  case,  his  rider  must  be  pre- 
pared for  a  sudden  leap  to  one  side,  a  whirl 
around,  or  a  quick  darting  from  the  road.  She 
must  not  allow  herself  to  become  nervous  and 
jerk  or  suddenly  tighten  the  reins,  for  then  the 
animal  will  think  that  she  is  likewise  afraid,  and 
that  he  is  justified  in  his  own  fright.  On  the 
contrary,  she  must  maintain  her  presence  of 
mind,  quietly  and  calmly  take  a  snaffle-rein  in 
each  hand,  draw  them  just  tight  enough  to  feel 
the  horse's  mouth,  keep  his  head  high  and 
straight  forward,  and,  as  he  approaches  the  ob- 
ject that  has  alarmed  him,  gently  turn  his  head 

18 


274  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

away  from  it,  so  that  in  passing  he  can  see  as 
little  of  it  as  possible ;  at  the  same  time  she 
should  press  her  leg  or  whip  against  the  horse 
on  the  side  toward  which  he  is  likely  to  shy,  — 
also  speaking  to  him  in  a  firm  and  assuring  tone 
of  voice,  that  he  may  be  led  to  understand 
there  is  nothing  to  fear. 

In  following  these  directions  the  rider  must 
be  mindful  of  her  balance,  because,  notwith- 
standing all  her  efforts,  the  horse  may  leap  out 
of  the  road  ;  she  should  sit  erect,  keep  a  firm 
hold  on  both  pommels  with  the  legs,  check  him 
as  soon  as  possible,  and  then  bring  him  again 
upon  the  road.  Should  he  swerve  and  attempt 
to  rush  past  the  object,  his  rider  must  not  try 
to  pull  his  head  toward  it,  but,  holding  the 
reins  with  steady  hands,  must  keep  him  headed 
straight  forward,  and,  after  he  has  passed,  grad- 
ually rein  him  in. 

Should  he  make  a  half  turn  from  the  object, 
he  must  be  turned  completely  around,  so  as  to 
face  it,  and  then  be  urged  forward  by  the  aid 
of  the  left  leg  and  whip,  while  he  is  at  the  same 
time  spoken  to  in  a  quiet,  encouraging  tone. 
If  the  horse  have  confidence  in  his  rider,  and 
his  fright  be  not  a  pretense,  he  will  thus  be  in- 
duced to  go  by,  and  on  future  occasions  will 
pass  by  the  same  object  with  indifference.  Se- 


DEFENSES  OF   THE  HORSE.  275 

verity,  such  as  scolding  and  whipping,  will  only 
render  him  more  fearful,  and  since  he  will  al- 
ways regard  the  object  of  his  fright  as  being 
the  cause  of  his  punishment,  he  will,  conse- 
quently, the  next  time  of  meeting  with  it  be- 
come still  more  unmanageable.  But,  having 
passed  it  at  first  without  experiencing  any  pain, 
he  will  gain  confidence  in  the  judgment  of  his 
rider,  imagine  he  has  made  a  mistake  in  being 
alarmed,  and  be  satisfied  that,  after  all,  there 
was  no  occasion  for  dread. 

A  horse  should  never  be  caressed,  patted,  or 
coaxed,  either  just  before  or  just  after  he  has 
passed  any  object  he  dislikes,  because  he  may 
misinterpret  these  acts,  and  imagine  that  he 
has  done  just  right  in  shying,  and  will,  there- 
fore, be  very  apt  to  repeat  the  act  in  order 
again  to  receive  the  praise  of  his  rider.  It  will 
always  be  better,  in  such  cases,  to  ride  on  as 
usual,  and  act  as  if  the  matter  were  of  no  con- 
sequence. On  the  other  hand,  a  horse  should 
never  be  whipped  after  he  has  passed  an  object 
that  terrifies  him.  Some  riders  are  afraid  to 
whip  the  horse  while  he  is  in  the  act  of  shying, 
but  will  lay  on  the  lash  after  he  has  passed  the 
cause  of  his  dread ;  this  will  not  only  be  "  a 
tardy  vengeance  that  crowns  a  cowardly  act," 
but  will  cause  the  animal  to  conclude  that  he 


276  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

has  done  wrong  in  passing  by,  and  on  the  next 
occasion  for  alarm  he  will  either  delay  as  long 
as  possible  in  dread  of  the  remembered  whip- 
ping, or  else  will  plunge  quickly  by  the  object, 
and,  perhaps,  add  to  the  vice  of  shying  that  of 
running  away.  The  course  pursued  by  some 
persons  of  making  a  horse  pass  and  repass  a 
number  of  times  in  succession  an  object  which 
has  caused  him  to  shy  is  an  erroneous  one,  as 
it  gives  him  a  chance  for  again  resisting,  and 
makes  the  rider  appear  vainglorious  and  pre- 
tentious. 

Whether  a  horse  shies  from  real  fright,  or 
from  mere  pretense  or  affectation,  the  severe 
use  of  whip  or  spur  to  force  him  by  the  object 
he  is  shying  at  will  always  do  more  harm  than 
good.  Mildness  and  forbearance,  combined  with 
firmness,  will  invariably  do  much  more  to  tran- 
quillize him  and  to  render  him  obedient  than 
severity  and  harsh  measures.  Horsemen  who, 
from  actual  experience,  are  well  able  to  advise 
say,  "  Let  the  horse  alone,  neither  letting  him 
perceive  that  we  are  aware  we  are  advancing 
toward  anything  that  he  dislikes,  nor  doing 
more  with  him  when  in  the  act  of  shying  than 
is  necessary  for  due  restraint  and  a  steady  hand 
upon  the  reins." 

When  a  horse  shies  from  pretense  of  fright, 


DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE.       277 

it  is  either  from  exuberance  of  spirits,  because 
he  has  not  been  sufficiently  exercised,  or  else 
because  he  has  detected  timidity  in  his  rider, 
and  shies  from  pure  love  of  mischief  and  the 
desire  to  amuse  himself  by  augmenting  her 
fears.  Although  not  intending  any  real  harm, 
he  may  manage,  to  his  own  astonishment,  to 
unseat  her,  and,  by  thus  discovering  what  he 
can  do,  may  become  a  vicious  rogue,  and  make 
every  strange  object  an  excuse  for  a  dangerous 
shy.  The  only  remedy  for  this  affectation  and 
mischievousiiess  will  be  a  courageous  and  de- 
termined rider  on  his  back,  who  will  give  him 
more  work  than  he  likes ;  he  will  then,  of  his 
own  accord,  soon  tire  of  his  tricks. 

When  a  horse  that  has  had  plenty  of  work 
and  a  good  rider  to  manage  him  nevertheless 
continues  to  shy,  it  will  generally  be  found  that 
his  vision  is  defective.  If  he  is  a  young  horse, 
with  very  prominent  eyes,  the  probability  is 
that  he  is  near-sighted ;  if  an  old  horse,  that 
his  vision  —  having  undergone  a  change  sim- 
ilar to  that  of  a  human  being  who  is  advanced 
in  years  —  is  imperfect  for  near  objects,  which 
appear  confused  and  blurred  ;  in  other  words, 
that  he  is  troubled  with  long-sightedness,  or 
presbyopia.  In  these  cases  the  horse  becomes 
fearful  and  suspicious,  and  his  quick  imagination 


278  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

transforms  that  which  he  cannot  distinctly  see 
into  something  terrifying.  Ocular  science  has 
not  advanced  so  far  as  to  have  determined  a 
remedy  for  these  visual  difficulties  except  by 
the  use  of  glasses ;  and  to  place  spectacles  upon 
a  horse  to  improve  his  sight  would  be  incon- 
venient as  well  as  decidedly  unique.  Animals 
thus  afflicted  are  unsuited  for  either  saddle  or 
harness,  as  they  are  more  dangerous  than  if 
they  are  totally  blind,  and  the  only  safe  course 
to  pursue  when  one  is  compelled  to  use  them 
will  be  the  very  undesirable  one  of  completely 
blindfolding  them.  Many  a  horse  has  been 
severely  punished  and  condemned  for  vicious- 
ness,  when  his  fault  arose  from  defective  vision. 
Sometimes  a  horse  becomes  discontented  and 
uneasy  from  being  always  ridden  over  the  same 
road ;  this  dull  routine  is  irksome  to  him,  espe- 
cially if  he  be  spirited,  and  he  ventures  upon 
some  act  of  disobedience  in  order  to  create 
variety  and  excitement.  He  may  commence  by 
sideling  toward  other  horses  or  objects  on  his 
left,  or  by  suddenly  turning  around  to  the  right. 
In  the  first  case,  the  rider  must  instantly  take  a 
snaffle-rein  in  each  hand,  and  instead  of  attempt- 
ing to  turn  him  from  the  object,  she  must  rein 
his  head  directly  toward  it,  and  then  back  him 
from  it.  By  these  means,  his  body  will  form  a 


DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE.      279 

concavity  on  the  side  toward  the  object,  thus 
preventing  injury  to  the  rider  or  horse,  and  she 
will  be  able^to  retreat  in  safety. 

In  the  second  instance,  the  horse  instinctively 
knows  that  he  is  opposing  his  strongest  side  to 
the  weakest  one  of  his  rider,  and  it  is  useless  to 
contend  with  him  by  pulling  upon  the  left  snaffle- 
rein,  as  he  will  be  watching  for  this  very  move- 
ment and  be  prepared  to  resist  it.  He  should 
be  foiled  by  having  the  right  rein  tightened  so 
as  to  turn  him  completely  around  and  place  him 
in  the  same  position  he  was  in  before  he  began 
to  turn.  He  will  perceive  to  his  astonishment 
that  he  has  gained  nothing  by  his  abrupt  move- 
ment ;  and  as  soon  as  he  has  reached  the  posi- 
tion stated,  he  should  be  urged  forward  by  the 
aid  of  both  leg  and  whip. 

This  method  is  usually  successful  unless  the 
steed  be  very  obstinate  ;  he  may  then  refuse  to 
advance  at  all,  and  may  make  another  turn  to 
the  right,  in  which  case  his  rider  should  repeat 
the  course  just  named,  and  oblige  him  to  turn 
completely  around  three  or  four  times  in  succes- 
sion, and  then  while  his  head  is  in  the  right  di- 
rection, a  stroke  of  the  whip  behind  the  girths 
should  instantly  be  given  in  order  to  compel  him 
to  go  forward  before  he  has  time  to  defend  him- 
self and  make  another  turn.  Should  he  again 


280  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

refuse,  and  succeed  in  making  still  another  turn, 
the  tactics  of  his  rider  must  be  changed  ;  taking 
care  not  to  use  her  whip,  she  must  turn  him 
around  as  before,  and  then  rein  him  backward 
in  the  direction  she  desires  him  to  go ;  she  must 
keep  doing  this  until  he  concludes  to  move  on- 
ward. Should  this  course  have  to  be  continued 
for  some  time,  it  will  be  advisable  occasionally  to 
head  him  in  the  desired  direction,  in  order  to  as- 
certain whether  he  will  go  forward  ;  if  he  will 
not,  he  must  again  be  turned  and  backed.  A 
horse  can  readily  be  induced  to  move  backward, 
when  he  has  determined  not  to  go  forward. 

During  this  contest  with  the  horse,  the  rider 
must  be  careful  to  retain  her  balance,  to  keep 
her  left  knee  directly  under  the  third  pommel, 
and  to  incline  her  body  quickly  to  the  right  as 
her  animal  turns.  She  should  likewise  be  watch- 
ful of  surrounding  objects,  in  order  to  protect 
herself  and  her  horse  from  any  dangerous  posi- 
tion in  which  he  may  be  disposed  to  place  him- 
self. In  case  she  is  not  a  very  expert  horse- 
woman, or  has  little  confidence  in  her  ability  to 
manage  the  horse,  it  will  be  better  to  have  him 
led  a  short  distance,  and  then,  if  possible,  she 
should  change  the  road  to  one  he  has  not  been 
accustomed  to  travel ;  this  will  divert  him,  and 
cause  him  to  forget  his  contumacy. 


DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE.      281 

BALKING.  —  When  a  horse  stops  on  the  road 
and  refuses  to  move  in  any  direction,  it  may  be 
owing  to  disease  (immobility),  or  to  obstinacy. 
In  either  case,  it  will  be  better  for  the  rider  to 
make  no  effort  to  induce  him  to  move,  but  she 
should  quietly  and  patiently  remain  in  the  sad- 
dle until  he  evinces  a  disposition  to  advance, 
when  he  should  be  made  to  stand  a  little  longer. 
If  his  defense  be  due  to  obstinacy,  this  course 
will  be  a  punishment ;  but  should  it  be  due  to 
disease,  the  detention  will  be  no  disadvantage 
nor  punishment  to  him,  but  rather  an  advantage, 
as  it  will  enable  him  to  gain  composure.  It  is 
rarely,  however,  that  a  horse  proves  balky,  un- 
less as  the  result  of  some  disease  of  the  brain  or 
of  the  heart,  rheumatic  pain,  etc. 

BACKING.  —  Should  a  horse  commence  back- 
ing, when  on  the  road,  he  must  have  his  head 
quickly  turned  toward  the  direction  in  which  he 
is  backing.  Thus,  if  he  be  backing  toward  a 
dangerous  declivity,  he  will  be  able  to  see  that 
what  he  is  doing  threatens  danger  to  himself, 
and  will  be  checked.  Then  he  must  be  backed 
some  little  distance  away  from  the  danger,  and 
in  the  direction  toward  which  he  is  desired  to 
go.  If,  however,  the  horse  continues  to  back 
toward  the  dangerous  place,  notwithstanding 
the  rider's  efforts  to  turn  him,  the  safest  course 


282  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

will  be  to  dismount  instantly.  Backing  is  some- 
times, if  not  very  frequently,  due  to  confused 
vision,  rush  of  blood  to  the  head,  pain  in  the 
head,  etc. 

GAYETY.  —  When  a  horse  moves  one  ear 
back  and  forth,  or  keeps  agitating  first  one  and 
then  the  other,  at  the  same  time  moving  his 
head  and  neck  up  and  down,  and,  perhaps,  also 
champing  upon  his  bit,  he  is  feeling  gay,  and 
his  rider  must  be  on  her  guard,  as  he  may 
unexpectedly  jump.  While  keeping  a  steady 
hand  upon  the  reins,  she  must  urge  him  to  move 
forward  at  a  regular  and  somewhat  rapid  gait, 
for  this  will  be  what  he  wants  in  order  to  work 
off  his  superfluous  spirits. 

KICKING.  —  A  horse,  when  defending  himself 
against  anything  whatever,  will  always  lay  his 
ears  flat  upon  the  back  of  his  head  ;  this  is  his 
attitude  and  signal  for  a  battle,  and  he  is  then 
ready  to  kick,  bite,  plunge,  or  rear.  When  the 
ears  are  only  momentarily  placed  back,  it  may 
be  from  playfulness,  but  when  maintained  in 
this  position,  he  is  angry  and  vicious,  and  may 
make  a  desperate  effort  to  throw  his  rider.  In 
the  company  of  other  horses  he  will  attempt  to 
bite  or  kick  at  them.  As  soon  as  he  is  observed 
to  gaze  fixedly  upon  any  animals  in  his  vicinity, 
while  at  the  same  time  he  puts  his  ears  back, 


DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE.      283 

and  turns  his  croup  toward  his  companions,  he 
is  then  about  to  kick,  and  his  rider  must  frus- 
trate his  intention,  as  soon  as  she  feels  his  croup 
move,  by  quickly  raising  his  head  and  turning 
it  in  the  direction  in  which  the  kick  was  to  be 
made.  Should  he  attempt  to  bite,  he  must  bo 
driven  to  a  proper  distance  from  the  object  of 
his  anger,  and  his  attention  be  diverted  by  keep- 
ing him  moving  on. 

A  horse  will  kick  when  feeling  gay,  when  he 
is  annoyed,  when  he  suffers  pain  from  any  cause, 
when  feeling  playful  or  malevolent  toward  other 
animals,  and,  sometimes,  when  he  wishes  to  dis- 
lodge his  rider.  Whenever  her  horse  manifests 
an  inclination  to  kick,  the  rider  must  endeavor 
to  keep  his  head  up,  because  he  will  then  be  un- 
able to  accomplish  much  in  the  way  of  raising 
his  hind-legs  ;  but  once  allowed  to  get  his  head 
down,  he  will  have  everything  his  own  way, 
and  will  be  able  to  kick  as  high  as  he  pleases. 

Every  time  the  horse  attempts  to  lower  his 
head,  he  must  be  punished  by  a  pull  upon  the 
curb-bit  strong  enough  to  make  him  keep  his 
head  up.  His  mouth  must  also  be  sawed  upon 
with  the  curb,  should  he  succeed  in  getting  his 
head  down.  The  rider  must  remember  to  lean 
well  back,  and  have  her  left  knee  well  braced 
against  the  third  pommel,  as  in  this  position  it 


284  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

will  be  almost  impossible  for  him  to  unseat  her 
by  his  kicking.  If  the  kick  be  made  during  a 
stand-still,  a  sharp,  vigorous  stroke  of  the  whip 
upon  the  animal's  shoulder  will  be  apt  to  check 
him ;  but  if  the  kick  be  made  while  he  is  on  the 
gallop,  a  stroke  of  the  whip  will  be  apt  to  make 
him  run  away.  Should  kicking  be  an  old  vice 
of  the  horse,  he  must  be  ridden  with  a  severe 
curb-bit,  that  he  may  be  prevented  from  getting 
his  head  down. 

PLUNGING,  BUCKING.  —  Plunging  is  a  succes- 
sion of  bounds,  in  which  the  four  legs  of  the 
horse  are  almost  simultaneously  raised  from  the 
ground,  the  animal  advancing  with  each  bound. 
It  is  frequently  an  effort  made  by  the  horse  to 
rid  himself  of  something  that  pains  him,  as  the 
sting  of  an  insect,  the  pinching  of  the  saddle  or 
the  girth,  etc.  All  that  can  be  done  in  any  case 
of  plunging  will  be  to  endeavor  to  keep  up  the 
animal's  head,  brace  one's  self  firmly  in  the  sad- 
dle, and  sit  the  plunges  out ;  they  will  rarely 
amount  to  more  than  three  or  four.  When  a 
horse  that  is  not  vicious  commences  to  plunge, 
it  may  be  due  to  fear  or  pain  ;  he  should,  there- 
fore, be  spoken  to  kindly,  and  be  soothed.  As 
soon  as  he  is  brought  under  control,  the  rider 
should  endeavor  to  ascertain  the  cause  of  his 
movements,  and,  if  possible,  remove  it. 


DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE.      285 

Bucking  is  a  desperate  effort  to  throw  the 
rider  ;  the  horse  will  gather  his  legs  under  him 
in  as  close  a  group  as  possible,  curve  his  back 
upward  like  an  angry  Tabby  when  she  espies 
Towser,  lower  his  head,  endeavor  to  burst  the 
saddle-girths  by  forcibly  expanding  his  abdo- 
men, and  then  without  making  any  advance  or 
retreat  bound  up  and  down  upon  all  four  legs, 
which  are  held  as  rigid  as  iron  rods.  Sometimes 
he  will  produce  a  see-saw  movement  by  repeat- 
edly and  rapidly  throwing  himself  from  his  hind 
to  his  fore  legs.  These  motions  will  be  kept  up 
as  long  as  he  can  hold  his  breath,  which  gener- 
ally becomes  exhausted  after  five  or  six  bounds; 
he  will  then  renew  his  breath  and  may  repeat 
the  bounds. 

When  a  horse  "  bucks,"  the  rider  must  keep 
her  seat  the  best  way  she  can.  Her  body  should 
be  held  as  straight  as  possible,  although  the  nat- 
ural tendency  will  be  to  lean  forward  and  to 
round  the  shoulders ;  she  should  also  take  a  firm 
knee-grasp  upon  both  the  second  and  third  pom- 
mels, keep  a  steady  hold  upon  the  reins,  and  be 
especially  on  her  guard  against  allowing  her 
body  to  be  pulled  forward  as  the  horse  jerks  his 
head  down.  Fortunately,  very  few  thorough- 
bred horses  buck  violently,  their  movement 
being  more  of  a  plunge.  The  horses  of  the 


286  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

Russian  steppes,  and  the  bronchos  and  ponies  of 
our  far  Western  country,  are  apt  to  have  the 
vicious,  genuine  buck  in  perfection. 

REAKING.  —  With  the  young  horse,  rearing  is 
the  last  frantic  effort  to  unseat  his  rider ;  an  old 
rogue  will  sometimes  resort  to  it,  having  found 
his  rider  timid  and  much  alarmed  at  the  move- 
ment. A  lady  should  never  ride  a  horse  that 
has  once  reared  dangerously,  unless  the  action 
was  occasioned  by  the  injudicious  use  of  too  se- 
vere a  curb-bit.  A  horse  that  has  once  reared 
without  provocation  will  be  very  apt  to  do  so 
again.  The  danger  of  this  vice  is,  that  the  horse 
may  fall  backward  and  upon  his  rider.  This  ac- 
cident will  be  especially  liable  to  occur  when,  in 
rearing  suddenly  and  very  high,  he  bends  his 
fore-legs  under  his  body.  While  he  is  in  this 
position,  should  the  rider  feel  him  sinking  down 
upon  his  hind-quarters,  she  must  instantly  leap 
from  the  saddle,  at  the  same  time  giving,  if  pos- 
sible, a  vigorous  push  to  the  horse  with  both 
hands,  as  near  his  shoulder  as  she  can  readily 
reach  without  endangering  herself.  This  is 
done  that  he  may  be  made  to  fall  to  the  right, 
and  the  impetus  of  the  push  will  also  convey 
her  to  a  safe  distance,  should  he  fall  to  the  left. 

When  a  horse,  after  rearing,  paws  in  the  air 
with  his  fore-feet,  he  is  then  employing  them 


DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE.      287 

for  the  same  purpose  that  a  tight-rope  dancer 
uses  his  balancing  pole,  namely,  to  keep  his 
equilibrium.  In  this  case,  there  will  not  be 
much  danger  of  his  falling  backward,  unless 
his  rider  should  pull  him  over  by  holding  too 
tight  a  rein,  or  by  using  the  reins  to  aid  her  in 
keeping  her  balance. 

The  first  act  of  the  horse,  when  he  intends  to 
rear,  will  be  to  free  himself  from  the  influence 
of  the  bit,  and  he  will  attempt  to  accomplish 
this  by  bending  his  neck  in  so  as  to  slacken  the 
tension  on  the  reins ;  at  the  same  time  he  will 
come  to  a  stand  by  a  peculiar  cringing  move- 
ment, which  will  make  his  rider  feel  as  if  the 
animal  had  collapsed,  or  were  falling  to  pieces. 
This  "  nowhere  "  feeling  will  hardly  be  realized 
before  the  horse  will  stiffen  his  hind-legs  and 
neck,  and  rise  with  his  fore-feet  in  the  air,  bid- 
ding defiance  to  all  control. 

Under  these  circumstances,  as  the  horse  rears 
his  rider  must  quickly  yield  the  reins  and  incline 
her  body  well  forward,  firmly  supporting  herself 
by  the  second  and  third  pommels ;  as  she  values 
her  life,  she  must  not  strike  her  steed  nor  pull 
upon  the  reins,  but  must  patiently  wait  until  his 
fore-feet  come  to  the  ground,  when  the  time  for 
action  will  have  arrived. 

Although  she  may  be  taken  by  surprise  when 


288  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

the  horse  first  rears,  she  can  anticipate  his  sec- 
ond attempt,  which  will  generally  be  not  far  off, 
by  taking  a  snaffle-rein  in  each  hand,  holding 
her  hands  low,  and  the  instant  she  perceives 
that  he  is  going  to  rise,  loosening  the  left  rein 
and  tightening  the  right,  so  as  to  bend  his  head 
to  the  right.  He  cannot  now  complete  the  rear, 
because  her  action  will  compel  him  to  move  a 
hind-leg,  and  he  will  then  be  unable  to  rest  his 
weight  upon  both  hind-legs,  which  he  must  do 
in  order  to  rear.  As  a  punishment,  he  should 
then  be  turned  around  a  few  times,  from  right 
to  left  •  this  turning  will  also  be  very  apt  to 
prevent  him  from  again  rearing.  Sometimes 
a  severe  stroke  with  the  whip  upon  the  horse's 
hind-quarters  as  his  fore-feet  are  descending  to 
the  ground  will  prevent  the  second  rear  ;  as  .he 
plunges  forward  from  the  whip,  the  rider  must 
be  careful  to  prevent  her  body  from  being 
thrown  forward  by  the  plunge. 

EUNNING  AWAY.  —  The  most  dangerous  run- 
away horse  is  the  one  that  starts  off  from  exces- 
sive fear,  as  terror  will  make  a  horse  act  as  if  he 
were  blind,  and  he  may  then  rush  over  a  preci- 
pice, or  violently  collide  with  some  object  in  his 
way.  Terrified  horses  have  been  known  almost 
to  dash  out  their  brains  by  violent  collision  with 
a  stone  wall,  and  even  to  impale  themselves 


DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE.  289 

upon  an  iron  fence.  The  least  dangerous  run- 
away steed  is  the  practiced  one,  which  runs  be- 
cause he  has  vicious  propensities;  for  as  he  knows 
what  he  is  about,  he  generally  takes  good  care 
of  himself,  and  thus,  in  a  measure,  protects  his 
rider,  of  whose  mishaps,  however,  he  is  entirely 
regardless.  Some  horses,  when  urged  to  do 
something  that  is  beyond  their  ability,  or  when 
goaded  by  pain  from  any  cause,  will  run,  imag- 
ining that  by  so  doing  they  can  escape  the  evil. 
With  these,  the  "  bolt "  or  runaway  is  more  the 
last  furious  effort  of  despair  than  real  vicious- 
ness.  A  heavy-handed  rider  may  cause  a  horse 
to  run  away,  the  horse,  taking  advantage  of 
the  constant  pull  upon  the  reins,  is  liable  to 
make  the  hand  of  his  rider  a  point  of  support, 
and  then  dash  wildly  onward. 

When,  from  restlessness,  a  horse  endeavors  to 
break  away,  the  curb-reins  should  be  taken,  one 
in  each  hand,  and  every  time  he  attempts  to 
run,  a  sharp  pull  should  be  made  upon  his  mouth 
by  means  of  these  reins ;  he  will  thus  be  checked 
and  prevented  from  starting  upon  a  run.  Should 
he  once  get  fairly  started,  it  will  be  very  diffi- 
cult to  stop  him  promptly.  In  such  a  case,  care 
should  be  taken  not  to  make  a  "  dead  pull  " 
upon  the  reins,  but  instead,  a  succession  of 
pulls  at  short  intervals,  and  these  efforts  should 

19 


290  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

be  continued  until  he  comes  to  a  stand ;  should 
the  horse  manifest  any  disposition  to  stop,  the 
rider  should,  as  he  slackens  his  speed,  make  a 
continued  pull  on  the  reins  as  if  reining  him  in 
from  the  walk,  and  this  will  gradually  check  him. 

When  a  horse  runs  away  from  fear  or  pain, 
nothing  will  stop  him  except  the  voice  of  the 
rider  in  whom  he  has  confidence,  and  for  whom 
he  entertains  affection.  In  his  terror,  he  will 
rely  entirely  upon  her  for  aid  and  support,  and 
if  she  fail  him,  the  most  severe  bit  will  not  stop 
him.  An  old  offender  may  sometimes  be  con- 
trolled by  a  severe  bit,  or  may  be  cured  of  his 
propensity  for  running  by  being  placed  in  the 
hands  of  a  good  horseman  who  will  allow  him 
to  run  away,  and  when  the  animal  wishes  to 
stop,  will  then,  by  means  of  whip  and  spur, 
make  him  run  still  farther,  and  allow  him  to 
stop  only  when  the  rider  pleases. 

The  management  of  a  horse  when  he  attempts 
to  "  bolt "  has  been  described  in  the  chapter  on 
the  Hand  Gallop.  A  horse  that  has  once  fairly 
run  away  and  met  with  some  catastrophe,  or 
that  has  thrown  his  rider,  will  never  be  a  safe 
one  to  ride  subsequently. 

UNSTEADINESS  WHILE  BEING  MOUNTED.  —  It  is 
very  annoying,  as  well  as  dangerous,  to  have  a 
horse  moving  about  unsteadily  while  the  rider 


DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE.      291 

is  attempting  to  mount ;  this  restlessness  is  some- 
times occasioned  by  his  impatience  and  eager- 
ness to  start,  and  may  then  be  remedied  by  hav- 
ing him  held  by  the  bit,  with  his  right  side 
placed  against  a  wall,  fence,  or  other  firm  bar- 
rier, where  he  can  be  kept  until  the  lady  has 
mounted.  The  horse  must  not  be  allowed  to 
start  immediately  after  the  rider  has  become 
seated,  but  must  be  restrained  until  he  is  per- 
fectly quiet,  and  must  be  chidden  every  time  he 
commences  to  prance.  A  few  lessons  of  this  kind 
will  teach  him  to  stand  still  while  being  mounted. 

When  the  horse  from  viciousness,  or  from  dis- 
like to  carrying  a  rider,  attempts  to  evade  being 
mounted,  he  had  better  be  disposed  of;  for 
should  the  lady  succeed  in  mounting  she  will 
receive  but  little  benefit  from  the  ride,  as  the 
bad  temper  and  unwillingness  of  her  steed  will 
not  only  make  it  unpleasant,  but  even  danger- 
ous for  her. 

Sometimes  the  restiveness  of  the  horse  may 
be  the  fault  of  the  person  holding  him,  who,  per- 
haps, either  takes  too  heavy  a  hold  of  the  snaf- 
fle-rein, thus  pressing  the  sides  of  the  snaffle-bit 
against  the  animal's  mouth,  and  pinching  him, 
or  pulls  upon  the  curb-reins,  which  should  not 
be  touched.  Either  of  these  mistakes  will  cause 
the  horse  to  move  backward.  Not  unf requently 


292  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

a  horse  will  violently  plunge  and  kick  from  the 
pain  of  some  injury  in  his  side  or  back,  which, 
though  not  painful  when  the  rider  is  seated,  be- 
comes so  when  she  bears  upon  the  stirrup.  Such 
a  horse  is  unsound  and  not  suitable  for  a  side- 
saddle. 

STUMBLING.  —  When  a  horse,  not  naturally 
indolent,  and  having  his  ears  well  placed,  allows 
the  latter  to  project  out  and  to  fall  loosely  on 
each  side  of  his  head,  he  is  then  fatigued,  and 
must  be  kept  well  supported  by  the  bridle,  for 
he  may  stumble,  or  even  fall.  Whenever  a  horse 
is  felt  to  trip  or  stumble,  the  rider's  body  must 
instantly  be  inclined  backward,  her  hands  be 
lifted,  and  her  horse  be  steadied  and  supported 
by  sufficient  tension  on  the  reins.  Should  the 
tired  horse  be  walking  down  a  hill,  he  must  al- 
ways be  well  balanced  by  pressure  of  both  leg 
and  whip  ;  this  will  keep  him  light  upon  his 
fore-legs,  and  he  will  not  be  so  apt  to  fall. 

A  horse  should  never  be  whipped  for  stum- 
bling, as  it  is  not  likely  that  he  would  do  so  of 
his  own  accord,  and  it  would  be  cruel  to  punish 
the  poor  animal  for  what  he  could  not  help.  It 
may  be  the  fault  of  the  blacksmith  in  not  shoe- 
ing him  properly. 

Should  an  indolent  horse  fail  to  raise  his  feet 
sufficiently  to  escape  tripping,  the  proper  course 


DEFENSES   OF   THE  HORSE.  293 

to  pursue  will  be  to  keep  him  collected  and 
make  him  move  at  rather  a  rapid  gait,  because, 
when  he  is  animated,  he  will  lift  his  feet  more 
briskly  and  to  better  advantage. 

A  straight-shouldered  horse,  when  carrying  a 
woman,  will  be  apt  to  stumble,  to  bear  upon  the 
reins,  and  to  move  heavily  on  his  fore-feet,  and 
will  therefore  require  an  expert  horsewoman 
to  keep  him  moving  in  good  form. 

When  the  rider  hears  a  metallic  clinking 
sound  at  each  step  of  her  horse,  it  will  be  an  in- 
dication that  the  shoes  of  his  hind-feet  are  strik- 
ing against  those  of  his  fore-feet ;  this  is  very 
dangerous,  as  in  the  trot,  or  gallop,  he  may 
"  overreach  "  and  strike  one  of  his  fore-legs  with 
one  of  his  hind-shoes  in  such  a  manner  as  to  in- 
jure himself  severely,  or  he  may  catch  the  toe 
of  a  hind-shoe  in  the  heel  of  a  fore-shoe  so  that 
they  will  become  locked  together,  when  the 
fore-shoe  will  have  to  give  way  and  come  off,  or 
a  terrific  fall  will  ensue.  Some  horses  overreach 
on  account  of  their  natural  conformation,  others 
only  when  fatigued  ;  again,  some  will  be  free 
from  this  defect  when  fat,  but  will  manifest  it 
when  they  become  lean  from  overwork,  defi- 
ciency of  food,  or  other  cause.  Young  horses 
will  occasionally  move  in  this  manner  before 
they  are  taught  their  paces,  but  as  soon  as  they 


294          THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

are  thoroughly  trained  this  dangerous  annoy- 
ance ceases. 

When  a  horse  falls  to  the  ground,  or  merely 
falls  on  his  knees,  if  the  rider  be  not  thrown  off 
by  the  violence  of  the  shock  it  will  be  better  for 
her  to  keep  to  the  saddle,  as  the  horse  will  rise 
very  quickly,  and  if  she  attempts  to  jump  off  he 
may  step  upon  her  as  he  is  in  the  act  of  rising, 
or  her  habit  may  catch  upon  the  pommel  and 
add  to  the  peril  of  the  situation  by  causing  her 
to  be  dragged  along  should  the  horse  move  on, 
or  become  frightened  and  run  away.  She  must 
not  attempt  to  assist  the  horse  by  pulling  upon 
the  bridle,  but  must  allow  him  to  get  upon  his 
feet  in  his  own  way.  Should  she  be  thrown  off 
as  he  falls,  she  must  free  her  skirt  from  the  sad- 
dle as  promptly  as  possible  and  quickly  get  away 
from  him  in  order  to  escape  being  stepped  upon 
as  he  rises.  The  fall  of  a  horse  upon  his  right 
side  is  much  less  dangerous  than  upon  his  left, 
because  in  the  latter  case  the  rider's  left  leg 
may  be  caught  beneath  him,  perhaps  injured, 
and  she  would  then  be  unable  to  extricate  her- 
self without  assistance. 

WHIP  AND  SPUR.  —  A  lady's  whip  is  employed 
as  a  substitute  for  the  right  leg  of  the  horseman 
in  collecting  and  guiding  the  horse.  For  this 
reason,  it  must  always  be  firm,  strong,  and  well- 


DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE.      295 

made.  It  is  also  used  both  to  give  light  taps  to 
the  horse  in  order  to  increase  his  speed,  and  like- 
wise, when  necessary,  to  chastise  him  moderately 
and  thus  make  him  more  obedient.  If  it  can 
possibly  be  avoided,  a  lady  should  never  whip 
her  horse ;  but  when  it  is  required,  one  quick, 
sharp  stroke,  given  at  the  right  time,  and  with 
judgment,  will  subdue  him  and  bring  him  to  his 
senses.  Deliberately  to  give  stroke  after  stroke, 
or  to  flog  him,  will  always  do  more  harm  than 
good,  for  it  will  make  him  wild,  vicious,  and  un- 
manageable, and  the  lady  will  gain  nothing  by 
it  except  the  reputation  of  being  a  virago. 

When  a  horse  has  committed  a  fault  requiring 
the  whip,  he  knows  that  the  first  stroke  given 
is  for  this  fault,  and  submits ;  but  he  does  not 
understand  why  the  succeeding  blows  are  given, 
and  resents  them  accordingly.  An  expert  rider 
will  rarely  whip  her  horse,  and  will  never  become 
angry  at  even  the  most  obstinate  resistance  on 
his  part,  but  will,  instead,  manage  him  intelli- 
gently, and  subdue  him  in  a  subtle  way  that  he 
cannot  comprehend.  She  will  turn  his  disobe- 
dient acts  against  himself  in  a  manner  that  is 
mysterious  to  him,  and  which  will  make  them 
appear  to  him  to  be  the  will  of  his  rider.  The 
horse  will  find  himself  foiled  at  every  turn,  in  a 
way  against  which  he  can  present  no  permanent 


296  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

defense,  and  there  will  be  nothing  left  for  him 
but  submission. 

When  a  horse  fails  in  his  attempts  to  gain  the 
ascendency,  and  yields  to  her  skill  and  author- 
ity, she  should  be  generous  and  forgiving,  and 
treat  the  vanquished  one  with  kindness  and  con- 
sideration, letting  him  know  that  there  is  no  re- 
sentment harbored  against  him.  He  will  quickly 
appreciate  this  forbearance,  and  it  will  have  a 
lasting  effect.  But  while  accepting  the  olive 
branch,  she  should  not  give  him  his  usual  pats 
and  caresses  for  some  little  while  afterward,  as 
these  acts  might  be  misinterpreted  by  him  as  a 
weakening  on  the  part  of  his  rider,  or  lead  him 
to  imagine  that  he  has  been  doing  right  instead 
of  wrong. 

A  lady's  horse  should  never  be  trained  with 
the  spur.  The  horse  that  requires  a  spur  is  un- 
suited  for  the  side-saddle  ;  even  the  dullest  ani- 
mal will  soon  learn  that  he  is  spurred  only  on 
one  side,  and  will  shrink  from  the  attack  by  a 
shy  or  a  jump  to  the  right,  knowing  there  is  no 
spur  on  this  side.  An  indifferent  rider  may 
place  herself  in  danger  by  unconsciously  spur- 
ring her  horse,  thus  goading  him  to  madness, 
and  to  such  a  frenzy  of  despair  that  the  only 
alternative  left  for  him  will  be  to  unseat  his  fair 
rider  in  order  to  escape  the  pain  thus  uncon- 
sciously inflicted  upon  him. 


DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE.  297 

The  novice  in  riding  must  not  be  dismayed 
nor  discouraged  by  all  the  instructions  in  regard 
to  defending  one's  self  against  restive  and  vi- 
cious horses,  as  she  may  ride  for  years,  or  even 
for  a  life-time,  and  never  be  in  any  serious  dan- 
ger. But  a  time  might  possibly  come,  when  she 
would  suddenly  and  unexpectedly  be  called  upon 
to  exert  herself  in  order  to  exact  obedience 
from  her  steed,  or  to  extricate  herself  from  a 
perilous  situation,  and  then  a  knowledge  of 
what  should  be  done  will  be  of  great  use  to 
her.  Being  armed  at  all  points,  and  understand- 
ing the  means  required  for  any  emergency, 
she  will  not  depend  for  safety  altogether  upon 
the  caprice  or  the  gentleness  of  her  horse,  but 
chiefly  upon  her  own  knowledge  and  skill ;  this 
will  give  her  a  confidence  and  sense  of  security 
that  will  greatly  add  to  the  pleasure  of  her  ride. 


EXPLANATION. 


1.  The  lips. 

2.  Tip  of  the  nose.    Figs.  1  and  2 

form  the  muzzle. 

3.  Chanfrin,  or  face ;  the  parts  that 

correspond  to  the  bones  of  the 
nose,  and  that  extend  from  the 
brow  to  the  nostrils. 

4.  The  brow,  or  forehead. 

5.  The  eye-pits ;  cavities  more  or  less 

deeply  situated  above  the  eyes. 

6.  Forelock ;  hairs  between  the  ears 

that  fall  upon  the  forehead. 

7.  The  ears. 

8.  The  lower  jaw  and  channel,  or 

space  comprised  between  the 
two  lower  jaws.  Cheek.  Jowl. 

9.  The  jaws:  nether  jaws. 

10.  The  nostril. 

11.  The  throat. 

12.  Region  of  parotid  glands,  at  the 

posterior  and  internal  part  of 
each  of  the  lower-jaw  bones. 

13.  The  crest. 
13'.  The  mane. 

14.  Windpipe  and  groove  of  the  ju- 

gular veins. 

15.  The  chest,  thorax. 

16.  The  withers,  or  the  sharp,  pro- 

jecting part  at  the  inferior  ex- 
tremity of  the  crest  and  of  the 
mane.  It  is  formed  by  the 
projection  of  the  first  dorsal 
vertebra. 

17.  The  back,  or  part  upon  which 

the  saddle  is  placed. 

18.  The  ribs. 

19.  The  passage  for  the  girths. 

20.  The  loins. 


21.  The  croup;   the  most  elevated 

part  of  the  posterior  extremity 
of  the  body. 

22.  The  tail. 

24.  The  flank. 

25.  The  abdomen. 

27.  The  saphena  vein. 

28.  The  shoulder  and  arm. 
28'.  The  point  of  the  shoulder. 

29.  The  elbow. 

30.  The  fore-arm. 

32.  The  knee. 

33.  The  cannon  bone,  shank. 

34.  The  large  pastern  joint. 

35.  The  small  pastern  joint. 

36.  The  coronet. 

37.  The  front  foot  and  hoof. 

38.  The  fetlock  and  ergot.    The  fet- 

lock consists  of  hairs,  and  the 
ergot  of  a  horny-like  substance 
constantly  found  at  the  back 
and  lower  part  of  the  large 
pastern  joints. 

39.  The  haunch. 

40.  The  thigh,  gaskin,  or  femur. 

41.  The  stifle  joint. 

42.  The  buttock, 

43.  The  tibia,  or  leg  proper  (lower 

thigh);  a  small  bone  lies  be- 
hind it,  the  fibula. 

44.  The  hock  (curb  place). 
44'.  The  point  of  the  hock. 

46.  The  cannon  bone. 

47.  The  large  pastern  joint. 

48.  The  fetlock  and  ergot. 

49.  The  small  pastern  joint. 

50.  The  coronet. 

51.  Hind-foot  and  hoof. 


ADDENDA. 


GOOD  RULES  TO  BE  REMEMBERED. 

(1.)  WHEN  in  company  with  a  gentleman,  an  accom- 
plished horsewoman  will  prefer  to  have  him  ride  at  the  right 
side  of  her  horse,  because,  being  thoroughly  able  to  control 
her  steed,  she  will  require  little  or  no  assistance  from  the 
cavalier.  On  the  contrary,  if  she  be  an  inexperienced  rider, 
it  will  be  better  for  the  gentleman  to  ride  at  the  left  side, 
because,  in  this  position,  his  right  hand  will  be  free  to  ren- 
der any  assistance  she  may  require,  and  he  will  also  be 
placed  between  her  and  any  approaching  object. 

(2.)  A  finished  horseman,  when  riding  at  the  left  side  of 
a  lady's  horse,  will  not  allow  his  spurs  to  catch  in  her  dress, 
nor  will  he  permit  his  steed  to  press  so  closely  against  this 
left  side  as  to  injure  or  interfere  with  the  action  of  her  left 
foot  and  leg. 

(3.)  In  the  park,  or  in  any  public  place,  a  gentleman 
should  always  approach  a  lady  on  the  off-side  of  her  horse. 

(4.)  When  in  company  with  two  ladies,  a  gentleman 
should  ride  on  the  off-side  of  them,  and  never  between  the 
two,  unless  they  request  it. 

(5.)  When  obliged  to  pass  or  meet  a  lady  who  is  riding 
without  an  escort,  always  do  so  at  a  moderate  gait ;  this  is 
an  act  of  politeness  and  consideration  which  may  prevent  her 
steed  from  becoming  fractious. 

(6.)  When  passing  by  a  horseman  who  is  leading  another 


302  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

horse,  never  ride  by  him  on  the  side  of  the  led  animal,  for  if 
you  do  the  latter  will  be  apt  to  kick  or  plunge,  and  become 
unruly.  This  precaution  is  essential  for  the  safety  of  the 
horsewoman,  as  well  as  for  the  better  management  of  the 
led  horse  by  the  horseman.  In  a  crowded  place  it  will  be 
better  to  wait  until  there  is  sufficient  room  to  pass  without 
hindrance. 

(7.)  Give  assistance  to  a  companion,  or  other  lady  rider, 
when  it  is  indispensable  for  her  safety,  but  do  not  give  ad- 
vice unless  directly  requested.  And  if,  when  you  are  riding 
a  fractious  horse,  assistance  be  politely  offered,  do  not  de- 
cline it. 

(8.)  In  city,  town,  or  village,  always  ride  at  a  moderate 
gait. 

(9.)  Be  extremely  careful  never  to  ask  for  a  friend's 
horse  to  ride,  but  always  wait  until  the  animal  is  freely 
offered,  and  when  accepted,  do  not  follow  the  advice  con- 
tained in  the  horseman's  proverb,  —  "  With  spurs  of  one's 
own  and  the  horse  of  a  friend,  one  can  go  where  he 
pleases." 

(10.)  Before  setting  out  for  a  ride,  in  company  with  other 
lady  riders,  the  equestrienne,  after  having  mounted,  should 
move  a  short  distance  away  from  the  others,  and  then  keep 
her  horse  perfectly  quiet  and  steady;  by  this  course  the 
neighboring  horses  will  not  be  apt  to  become  uneasy  and 
restive  while  her  companions  are  mounting. 

(]  1.)  Always,  when  with  others,  begin  the  ride  at  a  mod- 
erate gait.  A  number  of  horses,  fresh  from  the  stable, 
when  assembled  together,  are  apt,  if  started  on  a  gallop,  to 
become  too  highly  excited ;  and  it  will  always  be  better  to 
have  them  start  slowly. 

(12.)  Should  a  lady  be  a  better  horsewoman  than  her 
companions,  and  be  riding  a  horse  superior  to  theirs,  she 
should  restrain  him,  and  not  allow  him  to  be  constantly  in 


RULES  FOR  LADY  RIDERS.  303 

advance  of  the  others.  It  will  be  more  courteous  for  her  to 
follow  the  lead  of  her  companions,  and  to  consult  with  them 
as  to  the  kind  and  rapidity  of  gait  most  agreeable  to  them. 
The  preceding  rules  of  politeness  and  propriety  will  be 
readily  understood  and  appreciated.  A  lady  under  no  cir- 
cumstances will  forget  her  tact  and  consideration  for  others. 

(13.)  In  riding  up  hill  the  body  should  be  inclined  for- 
ward, and  the  bridle-hand  be  advanced,  in  order  to  give  the 
horse  space  to  extend  his  head  and  neck,  as  it  is  natural  for 
him  to  do  under  such  circumstances.  In  case  the  ascent  be 
very  steep,  the  rider  may  support  herself  by  holding,  with 
her  right  hand,  to  her  horse's  mane,  but  never  to  the  off- 
pommel,  because  her  weight  may  cause  the  saddle  to  slip 
backward. 

(14.)  In  riding  down  hill  the  body  must  be  inclined  more 
or  less  backward,  in  proportion  to  the  steepness  of  the  hill, 
and  as  the  horse  lowers  his  head  upon  the  commencement  of 
the  descent,  the  rider  must  advance  her  bridle-hand  just 
enough  barely  to  feel  his  mouth.  Timid  and  awkward 
riders,  on  descending  a  hill,  are  apt  to  confine  the  horse's 
head  too  much,  thus  keeping  it  too  high,  and  preventing  him 
from  freely  stepping  out,  as  well  as  from  placing  his  feet 
firmly  upon  the  ground.  By  doing  this,  they  are  likely  to 
bring  about  the  very  catastrophe  they  are  trying  to  avoid, 
namely,  a  stumble  and  a  fall.  Never  ride  at  a  rapid  gait 
when  going  down  hill. 

(15.)  It  is  always  customary  to  keep  to  the  left  when 
passing  by  others  on  horseback  or  in  vehicles,  who  are  go- 
ing in  the  same  direction  as  the  rider ;  and  in  passing  those 
who  are  approaching,  to  keep  to  the  right.  But,  in  the 
latter  instance,  should  anything  be  present  that  might  cause 
the  horse  to  shy,  and  a  declivity,  ditch,  or  other  source  of 
danger  be  on  the  right,  while  none  exists  on  the  left,  it  will 
then  be  safer  for  the  rider  to  take  the  left  side. 


304  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

(16.)  When  crossing  a  stream,  or  when  allowing  one's 
horse  to  drink  from  it,  a  watchful  eye  should  be  kept  upon 
him,  especially  in  warm  weather,  lest  he  attempt  to  take  an 
impromptu  bath.  If  he  begins  to  paw  the  water,  or  bend 
his  knees,  the  rider  must  raise  his  head,  give  him  a  sharp 
stroke  with  the  whip,  and  hurry  him  on. 

(17.)  After  severe  exercise,  or  when  the  horse  is  very 
warm,  he  should  neither  be  fed  nor  be  allowed  to  drink  un- 
til a  sufficient  time  has  passed  to  enable  him  to  become  com- 
posed, rested,  and  cool.  Many  a  valuable  steed  has  been 
lost  because  his  mistress  did  not  know  this  simple,  but  highly 
important  rule.  Again,  a  horse  should  never  be  ridden  at  a 
fast  gait  just  after  he  has  eaten  a  meal,  or  taken  a  good 
drink ;  he  should  be  allowed  at  least  an  hour  in  which  to 
have  his  meal  digested. 

(18.)  A  horse  should  never  be  allowed  to  drink  from  a 
public  trough,  if  it  can  possibly  be  avoided  ;  and  when  he  is 
permitted  to  do  so,  the  trough  should  first  be  emptied  and 
then  filled  anew.  Horses  often  contract  serious  diseases 
from  these  public  drinking-places. 

(19.)  When  riding  over  a  rough  road,  the  horse's  mouth 
should  only  be  lightly  felt,  and  he  should  be  allowed  to  have 
his  own  way  in  selecting  the  safest  places  upon  which  to 
step. 

(20.)  When  it  is  observed  that  the  horse  is  moving  un- 
easily, at  the  same  time  violently  twitching  his  tail,  or  giving 
a  kick  outward  or  under  him,  the  rider  may  be  certain  that 
something  is  hurting  him,  and  should  immediately  dismount, 
loosen  the  saddle-girths,  and  carefully  inspect  the  girths,  the 
saddle,  and  parts  touched  by  them  to  ascertain  whether  a 
nail  be  loosened  from  the  saddle,  the  skin  be  pinched  or 
abraded,  the  hair  be  pulled  upon  by  the  girths,  or  whether 
some  hard  object  has  become  placed  beneath  the  saddle,  etc. ; 
she  should  also  carefully  examine  the  head-stall  and  bit,  to 


RULES  FOR  LADY  RIDERS.  305 

see  that  all  is  right  about  the  horse's  head  ;  after  having  re- 
moved or  diminished  the  irritating  cause,  she  should  care- 
fully readjust  both  saddle  and  girths. 

(21.)  If,  when  riding  rapidly,  it  be  observed  that  the 
horse  is  breathing  with  difficulty  and  with  a  strange  noise,  or 
that  his  head  and  ears  are  drooping,  the  rider  should  imme- 
diately stop  him,  as  he  has  been  driven  too  hard,  and  is  on 
the  point  of  falling. 

(22.)  A  lady's  horse  should  never  be  placed  in  harness, 
because  in  order  to  pull  a  load  he  will  be  obliged  to  throw 
his  weight  forward,  thus  spoiling  the  lightness  of  his  saddle 
gaits. 

(23.)  When  turning  a  corner  the  horse  should  not  be 
drawn  around  by  the  reins ;  these  should  merely  indicate  the 
desired  direction  for  the  turn,  and  should  never  be  drawn 
upon  more  than  will  bring  that  eye  of  the  animal  which  is 
toward  the  direction  of  the  turn  into  view  of  the  rider. 

(24.)  Should  a  horse  which  is  usually  spirited  move  lan- 
guidly, and,  during  warm,  or  moderately  cold  weather,  have 
his  hair  stand  out  and  appear  rough,  particularly  about  the 
head  and  neck,  or  should  he  frequently  cough,  it  would  be 
better  to  relinquish  the  ride,  have  him  returned  to  the  stable, 
and  a  warm  bran-mash  given  to  him  as  quickly  as  possible. 
It  may  be  that  he  has  contracted  only  a  cold  that  can  be 
checked  by  prompt  measures.  But  should  he  continue  to 
grow  worse,  a  veterinary  surgeon  should  be  speedily  sum- 
moned. Be  very  firm  and  decided  in  not  permitting  the 
groom  to  administer  his  favorite  patent  medicines,  because 
such  nostrums  are  as  liable  to  occasion  injury  to  animals  as 
similar  preparations  are  to  human  beings. 

(25.)  A  few  observations  with  regard  to  shoeing  a  horse 
may  not  be  amiss.  It  may  happen  when  riding  on  a  coun- 
try road,  that  one  of  the  horse's  shoes  will  come  off,  and  the 
rider  be  obliged  to  resort  to  the  nearest  rural  blacksmith  to 
20 


306  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

have  it  replaced.  In  such  case  she  will  find  that  some 
knowledge  on  her  part  of  the  manner  in  which  a  shoe  should 
be  fitted  to  a  horse's  foot  will  prove  very  useful.  The  black- 
smith should  not  be  permitted  to  cut  the  frog  (the  soft  and 
elastic  substance  in  the  middle  of  the  foot)  of  the  foot,  but 
should  leave  it  entirely  alone,  and  pare  around  the  margin 
of  the  hoof  just  enough  to  adjust  the  shoe  evenly  and  firmly. 
Country  blacksmiths,  as  well  as  many  in  cities,  are  very 
fond  of  paring  and  rasping  the  horse's  hoof,  as  they  think 
they  can  make  a  neater  fit  of  the  shoe  by  such  a  course. 
An  eminent  writer  on  the  subject  of  shoeing  states  that,  ex- 
cept in  case  of  disease,  undue  paring  and  rasping  are  never 
indulged  in  by  persons  who  understand  how  to  fit  a  shoe  to 
the  horse's  feet  properly ;  he  also  observes  :  "  This  is  paring 
and  rasping  the  horse's  foot  till  it  be  small  enough  to  fit  the 
shoe,  rather  than  kindle  a  fire  and  forge  a  new  set  which 
shall  just  suit  the  feet  of  the  animal.  It  may  to  some  read- 
ers seem  like  a  jest,  to  write  seriously  about  the  horse's 
shoes  being  too  tight ;  but  it  is,  indeed,  no  joke  to  the  quad- 
ruped which  has  to  move  in  such  "articles.  The  walk  is 
strange,  as  though  the  poor  creature  were  trying  to  progress, 
but  could  obtain  no  bearing  for  its  tread.  The  legs  are  all 
abroad,  and  the  hoofs  no  sooner  touch  the  ground  than  they 
are  snatched  up  again.  The  head  is  carried  high,  and  the 
countenance  denotes  suffering.  It  is  months  before  the 
horse  is  restored  to  its  normal  condition." 

(26.)  There  is  not  the  least  necessity  for  stables  being  the 
foul  smelling  places  they  so  frequently  are,  for  if  the  hostler 
and  his  assistants  perform  their  duties  properly  all  offen- 
sive odors  will  be  banished.  A  foul  atmosphere  in  a  stable, 
besides  being  repulsive  to  visitors,  is,  not  un frequently,  the 
cause- of  blindness  and  other  diseases  of  the  horse,  who  will 
also  carry  the  odor  in  his  hair  and  communicate  it  to  the  cloth- 
ing of  his  rider  as  well  as  to  her  saddle.  For  these  reasons,  a 


RULES  FOR  LADY  RIDERS.  307 

lady  should  always  positively  insist  that  the  stable  as  well  as 
the  horse  should  be  kept  perfectly  clean  and  free  from  ob- 
noxious exhalations.  Attention  to  cleanliness,  and  a  free  use 
of  disinfectants  will  bring  about  this  highly  desirable  result. 

(27.)  After  a  ride,  the  saddle  should  always  be  aired,  and 
placed  where  the  sun's  rays  can  fall  upon  its  under  surface. 
After  exercise  that  causes  the  horse  to  perspire  freely,  the 
saddle  should  not  be  removed  until  he  has  become  cool ;  this 
will  prevent  him  from  having  a  sore  back,  from  which  he 
often  suffers  when  this  precaution  is  neglected. 

(28.)  When  a  lady  stops  in  her  ride  to  visit  a  friend,  she 
should  always  attend  to  her  horse  herself  —  be  sure  that  he 
is  properly  hitched ;  that  in  warm  weather  he  is  fastened  in 
a  shady  place,  and  that  in  cold  weather  he  is  protected,  as 
far  as  possible,  from  the  cold,  as  well  as  from  wind,  rain,  or 
snow.  It  will  sometimes  happen,  especially  in  the  country, 
that,  instead  of  being  hitched,  the  horse  will  be  allowed  to 
remain  free,  but  within  some  inclosure,  that  he  may  nibble 
the  grass  ;  in  this  instance,  the  saddle  should  always  be  re- 
moved, as  otherwise  he  may  roll  upon  it.  A  city  horse, 
when  ridden  into  the  country,  should  not  be  allowed  to  eat 
grass,  from  a  mistaken  idea  that  it  will  be  a  good  treat  for 
him,  for,  as  he  is  not  accustomed  to  it,  it  will  be  very  apt  to 
injure  him. 

(29.)  After  a  good  seat  and  attitude  in  the  saddle  have 
been  obtained,  more  freedom  is  allowable ;  should  the  rider 
have  occasion  to  speak  or  to  look  aside,  she  should  never 
move  her  shoulders,  but  only  her  head,  and  this  momenta- 
rily, because  it  is  required  that  a  good  lookout  in  front  be 
kept  up,  to  discover  and  avoid  obstacles. 

(30.)  Delicate  persons  who  desire  to  derive  benefit  from 
horseback  riding  in  the  country  should  select  suitable  hours 
in  which  to  pursue  this  exercise.  The  intense  heat  of  a 
summer  noon  should  be  avoided,  as  well  as  the  evening  dew, 


308  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

the  imperceptible  dampness  of  which  will  penetrate  the  cloth- 
ing and,  perhaps,  implant  the  germ  of  some  serious  malady. 
Riding  upon  a  country  road  in  the  noon  heat  of  a  summer 
day,  where  there  is  little  or  no  shade,  will  tan  and  roughen 
the  finest  complexion,  will  overheat  the  blood,  and  will  occa- 
sion fatigue  instead  of  pleasure.  An  hour  or  two  after  sun- 
rise or  before  sunset  will  be  found  the  more  pleasant  and 
healthful  periods  of  the  day  for  this  exercise.  Riding  in  the 
country,  when  enjoyed  at  proper  hours,  is  a  sure  brightener 
of  the  complexion,  aerates  and  purifies  the  blood,  and  im- 
parts wonderful  tone  to  the  nervous  and  muscular  systems. 
Yet,  in  their  great  fondness  for  this  exercise,  ladies  fre- 
quently carry  it  to  excess,  making  their  rides  far  too  long. 

(31.)  What  to  do  with  the  whip,  when  making  a  call,  has 
puzzled  many  a  lady  rider.  Shall  it  be  left  outside,  where 
it  may  be  lost,  or  shall  it  be  taken  into  the  parlor,  where 
its  belligerent  appearance  will  be  entirely  out  of  place  ? 
This  much  mooted  question  can  soon  be  settled  by  the  gen- 
tleman who  assists  the  lady  to  dismount ;  he  will  usually 
understand  what  is  required,  and  take  charge  of  it  himself. 
Or,  in  the  absence  of  a  cavalier,  the  whip  may  be  handed  to 
the  groom  who  attends  to  the  horse,  or  to  the  porter  who 
waits  upon  the  door.  But  should  no  groom  or  porter  be 
present,  it  may  be  placed  in  some  convenient  and  secure 
spot,  as  would  be  done  with  a  valuable  umbrella. 

(32.)  Before  mounting  her  horse,  a  lady  should  always 
pat  his  head  and  speak  kindly  to  him,  and,  after  the  ride, 
should  express  her  satisfaction  in  the  same  manner.  The 
horse  will  fully  appreciate  these  manifestations.  Many  per- 
sons consider  a  horse  a  mere  living,  working  machine,  yet  it 
has  been  satisfactorily  ascertained,  by  those  who  have  inves- 
tigated the  matter,  that  this  machine  has  feeling,  affection, 
and  a  remarkable  memory ;  that  it  appreciates  favors,  has  a 
high  sense  of  gratitude,  and  never  forgets  an  injury. 


RULES  FOR  LADY  RIDERS.  309 

(33.)  The  secret  of  secure  and  graceful  riding  is  a  cor- 
rectly balanced  seat  in  the  saddle,  one  perfectly  independent 
of  reins  or  stirrup,  and  without  exaggerations  of  any  kind, 
whether  the  carelessness  or  indifference  of  the  instinctive 
rider,  or  the  affected,  pedantic  stiffness  of  the  antiquated 
haut  ecole.  While  maintaining  a  free,  easy,  yet  elegant  atti- 
tude, the  rider  should  present  to  the  spectator  such  an  ap- 
pearance of  security  and  perfect  equilibrium  that  it  will  seem 
as  if  no  conflicting  movements  of  the  horse  could  throw  her 
from  the  saddle.  Carelessness  and  indifference  cause  the 
rider  to  look  indolent  and  slovenly,  while  an  affected,  exag- 
gerated stiffness  and  preciseness  give  her  a  ridiculous  ap- 
pearance, and  destroy  the  pleasing  effect  of  an  otherwise 
correct  seat. 

(34.)  Go  quickly  in  the  walk,  quickly  and  regularly  in 
the  trot,  and  gently  in  the  gallop.  And  bear  well  in  mind 
the  following  supplication  of  the  horse  :  — 

"  In  going  up  hill,  trot  me  not ; 
In  going  down  hill,  gallop  me  not ; 
On  level  ground,  spare  me  not  ; 
In  the  stable,  forget  me  not." 

All  women  are  capable  of  enjoying  the  healthful  exercise 
of  horseback  riding  excepting  those  who  may  be  suffering 
from  disease.  Every  lady  who  has  the  means,  whether 
young  or  advanced  in  years,  should  learn  riding,  for  its  so- 
ciability, healthfulness,  and  pleasure,  without  regard  to  her 
bodily  conformation.  It  is  folly  to  deprive  one's  self  of  this 
high  enjoyment  and  captivating  exercise,  simply  because  one 
is  no  longer  young,  has  only  an  ordinary  figure,  or  because 
some  persons  appear  to  better  advantage  in  the  saddle,  and 
ride  with  more  ease  and  grace.  According  to  such  reason- 
ing, one  might  as  well  cease  to  exist.  If  a  lady  cannot 
attain  perfection,  she  can  strive  to  come  as  near  to  it  as  pos- 
sible, and  if  she  secures  a  correct  seat  in  the  saddle,  and  a 


310  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

suitable  horse,  she  will  present  a  decidedly  better  appear- 
ance than  one  who,  although  having  the  slender,  elegant 
figure  so  well  adapted  to  the  saddle,  yet  rides  in  a  crooked, 
awkward  attitude,  or  on  a  rough  moving  horse. 

To  become  a  complete  horsewoman  it  is  not  necessary  to 
begin  the  exercise  in  childhood.  The  first  lessons  may  be 
taken  in  the  twelfth  year,  though  many  of  our  best  horse- 
women did  not  begin  to  practice  until  they  were  eighteen 
years  old,  and  some  not  until  after  they  were  married.  Rid- 
ing-teachers state  that  persons  past  their  first  youth  who  have 
never  ridden  learn  much  more  readily,  and  become  better 
riders  than  those  who,  though  younger,  have  been  riding 
without  instruction,  and  in  an  incorrect  manner,  and,  conse- 
quently, have  contracted  habits  very  difficult  to  eradicate. 

Before  closing  this  part  of  the  work,  there  is  one  subject 
to  which  the  author  would  earnestly  invite  attention.  When 
a  lady  possesses  a  horse  which  has  been  long  in  her  service, 
and  been  treated  with  the  kindest  and  most  loving  care,  and 
she  finds  that  this  faithful  servant  is  becoming  old  and  stiff, 
or  that,  from  some  accident,  he  has  become  almost  useless  to 
her,  she  should  not  part  with  him  by  selling  him,  for  the  ones 
to  buy  him  will  be  those  who  have  no  sympathy  for  a  horse 
and  do  not  know  how  to  treat  him  properly,  but  purchase 
him  for  hard  and  severe  labor;  their  poverty  compelling 
them  to  this  course,  as  they  cannot  afford  to  buy  any  but  old 
and  maimed  horses  of  very  little  value.  To  a  well-treated 
and  trained  animal,  the  change  from  caresses  to  harsh  treat- 
ment, from  the  pleasant  task  of  carrying  the  light  form  of 
his  mistress  to  the  hardest  of  drudgery,  must  be  acutely  felt. 
The  horse  which  has  been  kindly  and  intelligently  managed 
is  one  of  the  most  sensitive  of  living  creatures,  and  has 
been  known  to  refuse  all  feed  and  die  from  starvation,  when 
placed  under  the  charge  of  a  cruel  and  ignorant  master. 

When  the  lady  finds  her  favorite  steed  permanently  use- 


RULES  FOR  LADY  RIDERS.  311 

less,  and  cannot  afford  him  an  asylum  in  which  to  pass  the 
remainder  of  his  days  in  rest  and  freedom  from  labor,  she 
should  have  some  merciful  hand  end  the  life  that  it  would 
be  cruel  to  prolong  in  the  hands  of  a  hard  master,  simply 
for  the  few  dollars  that  might  be  obtained  for  him.  To  thus 
destroy  the  animal  may  appear  heartless,  but,  in  reality,  is 
an  act  of  mercy ;  as  it  is  much  better  for  him  to  die  a  quick, 
painless  death,  than  to  be  sold  to  a  life  of  toil,  pain,  and 
cruelty,  in  which,  perhaps,  he  may  pass  months,  if  not  years, 
of  a  living  death. 

In  terminating  the  present  volume,  the  writer  ventures  to 
express  the  hope  that  her  appeal  to  American  women  to 
seek  health,  beauty,  and  enjoyment  in  the  saddle  will  not 
be  passed  by  with  indifference,  and  that  the  lady  rider,  after 
a  careful  perusal  and  due  consideration  of  the  instructions 
herein  laid  down  for  her  benefit,  may  be  awakened  to  a 
spirit  of  enthusiasm,  and  an  endeavor  "  to  well  do  that  which 
is  worth  doing  at  all."  To  gain  a  knowledge  of  horsewoman- 
ship  is  by  no  means  a  mysterious  matter  confined  to  only 
a  favored  few,  but  is,  on  the  contrary,  within  the  reach  of  all. 
The  requirements  necessary  to  manage  the  horse  are  soon 
learned,  but,  as  is  the  case  with  every  other  accomplishment, 
it  is  practice  that  makes  perfect.  Practice  alone,  however, 
without  study  or  instruction,  will  never  produce  a  finished 
rider  ;  and  study  without  practice  will  rarely  accomplish 
anything.  But  when  study  and  practice  are  judiciously 
combined,  they  will  enable  one  to  reach  the  goal  of  suc- 
cess, which  every  earnest  rider  will  strive  to  attain. 

In  the  endeavor  to  render  the  instructions  and  explana- 
tions in  this  work  as  clear  and  comprehensible  as  possible, 
many  repetitions  have  unavoidably  occurred  ;  but  as  the 
book  was  more  especially  designed  to  instruct  beginners,  as 
well  as  those  self-taught  riders  who  have  not  had  the 


312  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

advantage  of  a  teacher,  it  was  thought  advisable  not  to 
leave  any  point  in  doubt,  but  as  far  as  possible  to  render 
each  subject  independent  of  the  others,  and  strongly  to  im- 
press many  essential  points  upon  the  mind  of  the  reader. 

To  a  majority  of  my  countrywomen,  with  their  natural 
tact  and  grace,  it  was  only  deemed  necessary  to  point  out 
their  errors  in  riding ;  attention  once  called  to  them  would, 
it  was  believed,  undoubtedly  lead  to  their  prompt  correction, 
and  these  riders  would  then  cease  to  be  victims  of  ignorance, 
constantly  upon  the  verge  of  danger  from  incorrect  methods 
of  riding,  and  soon  be  able  to  excel  in  that  most  desirable 
and  fascinating  of  all  womanly  accomplishments,  secure  and 
graceful  horseback  riding. 

This  has  been  the  principal  object  of  the  author,  who 
would  not  only  have  women  ride  well  and  elegantly,  but 
with  the  confidence  and  enjoyment  that  true  knowledge 
always  imparts.  Having  spent  so  many  happy  hours  in  the 
saddle  herself,  she  wishes  others  to  experience  a  similar 
happiness,  and  if  a  perusal  of  these  unpretending  pages  will 
create  a  zeal  among  her  countrywomen  for  this  delightful 
and  invigorating  exercise,  and  enable  them  to  enjoy  it  in  its 
highest  sense,  it  will  prove  a  source  of  much  gratification  to 
her,  and  she  will  rest  satisfied  that  her  efforts  have  not  been 
in  vain. 


GLOSSARY 

OF   TERMS    USED   IN  HORSEMANSHIP. 


Aids :  The  various  methods  employed  by  a  rider  to  command  the 
horse,  and  urge  him  to  move  forward,  backward,  etc.,  and  in  such  gaits 
as  may  be  desired.  The  superior  aids  are  the  hands  acting  through 
the  medium  of  the  reins ;  the  inferior  aids  are  the  leg  and  whip.  See 
Effects. 

Appui,  Fr.  Support:  The  "give  and  take  "  movements,  by  which  the 
horse  is  supported  in  his  gait,  called  "  appui  of  the  hand."  The  sen- 
sation of  the  pressure  of  the  bit  upon  the  bars  of  the  horse's  mouth, 
experienced  by  the  rider's  hand.  Appui  of  the  Collar :  The  slope  or 
talus  presented  in  front  at  the  union  of  the  crest  of  the  neck  with  the 
shoulders. 

Attacks :  Methods  for  urging  or  inducing  the  horse  to  enter  upon 
any  gait  or  motion  required.  See  Aids. 

Bars :  The  upper  part  of  the  gums  (in  a  horse)  that  bears  no  teeth, 
and  which  is  located  on  each  side  of  the  lower  jaw.  This  part  lies 
between  the  grinders  (back  double  teeth)  and  the  tusks;  or,  in  mares 
and  in  horses  deprived  of  tusks,  between  the  grinders  and  the  incisors 
(front  cutting  teeth).  It  is  against  this  part,  the  bars,  that  the  curb- 
bit  rests.  See  Cheek  of  the  Bit. 

Bear  to  the  right :  To  keep  the  right  leg,  from  hip  to  knee,  as  station- 
ary as  possible,  by  downward  pressure  upon  the  right  side  of  the  sad- 
dle seat,  and  between  the  first  and  second  pommels,  at  the  same  time 
keeping  a  firm  knee-grasp  upon  the  second  pommel  without  hanging 
upon  it ;  by  this  means,  the  rider  guards  against  inclining  to  the  left, 
a  movement  very  apt  to  be  produced  by  her  position  in  the  saddle  and 
the  motion  of  her  horse.  The  body  of  the  rider  must  be  maintained 
in  an  erect  position  all  the  time  she  is  bearing  to  the  right.  See  In- 
cline to  the  Right. 

Boot :  A  term  sometimes  applied  to  that  part  of  the  saddle-girths  or 


314  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

flaps  back  of  the  rider's  leg,  and  at  which  the  horse  may  attempt  to 
kick;  also  applied  to  the  inferior  portion  of  the  rider's  leg. 

Bridle-hand:  The  left  hand.  When  both  hands  hold  the  reins  they 
are  called  the  bridle-hands. 

Bridoon :  The  snaffle-bit  and  rein,  when  used  in  connection  with  the 
curb-bit,  but  acting  independently  of  it.  The  two  bits  together  in  the 
horse's  mouth  are  called  "  the  bit  and  bridoon,"  or  "  the  curb  and 
bridoon." 

Bringing  up  to  the  bridle,  also  Kept  well  up  to  the  bridle  :  To  place  the 
horse's  head  up  and  in  position,  so  that  when  proper  tension  or  press- 
ure is  made  upon  his  mouth  he  will  readily  obey  the  reins.  Some 
horses  require  stronger  pressure  than  others,  as  stated  under  Corre- 
spondence. 

Cannon  bone,  also  Shank :  The  long  bone  situated  between  the  knee 
and  the  fetlock  joint  on  the  front  part  of  each  fore-leg  of  the  horse. 

Canon :  That  part  of  a  bit,  on  each  side,  that  rests  upon  the  bars  of 
a  horse's  mouth  when  the  bit  is  correctly  placed. 

Cantle :  The  somewhat  elevated  ridge  at  the  back  part  of  the  saddle- 
seat. 

Cheek  of  the  Bit,  also  Bars  of  the  Bit :  The  external  straight  or 
curved  rods  (levers)  forming  the  sides  of  a  curb-bit,  and  which,  when 
the  bit  is  in  the  horse's  mouth,  are  applied  along  the  outer  sides  of  his 
mouth,  the  reins  being  attached  to  their  lower  extremities.  That  part 
of  these  rods  situated  below  the  bit  in  the  mouth  is  called  "  the  lower 
bar,"  or  "  cheek,"  and  that  portion  above  the  bit,  "  the  upper  bar,"  or 
"  cheek." 

Chin-groove :  The  transverse  furrow  in  which  the  curb-chain  rests, 
on  the  under  surface  of  a  horse's  lower  jaw,  at  the  back  part  of  the 
lower  lip.  Also  called  "  curb-groove." 

Collected  canter :  A  canter  in  good  form. 

Correspondence :  The  degree  of  rein-tension  made  by  the  hand  of  the 
rider  upon  her  horse's  mouth,  which,  when  properly  established,  creates 
a  correspondence  between  her  hand  and  the  animal's  mouth,  so  that  the 
slightest  movement  of  the  one  is  immediately  felt  by  the  other ;  in  all 
cases  this  correspondence  must  first  be  had  before  any  utility  can  be 
obtained  from  the  "  give  and  take  "  movements.  Some  horses  require 
a  greater  degree  of  tension  for  this  purpose  than  others,  according  to 
their  training  and  the  range  of  sensibility  of  their  mouths. 

Croup :  The  hind-quarters  of  the  horse,  from  and  including  the  loins 
to  the  commencement  of  the  tail.  This  term  is  also  applied  by  some 


GLOSSARY.  315 

to  the  upper  part  of  the  animal's  back,  where  the  haunches  and  body 
come  in  contact. 

Curb-bit,  also  Lever-bit :  A  bit  with  a  straight  or  curved  lever  or  rod 
attached  on  each  side,  designed  for  the  purpose  of  restraining  the 
horse. 

Curb-chain  :  A  chain  attached  to  the  upper  bar  or  cheek  of  the  curb- 
bit,  and  passed  along  the  chin-groove,  from  one  side  of  the  bit  to  the 
other. 

Curb-hook :  A  hook  attached  to  the  curb-chain,  and  designed  to  fasten 
it  to  the  upper  bar  of  the  curb-bit ;  there  are  two  of  these  hooks,  one 
on  each  side  of  the  bit. 

Decompounded :  Taken  to  pieces ;  each  act,  movement,  or  part  of  a 
whole  or  group,  by  or  of  itself. 

Defend:  A  horse  is  said  to  defend  himself  when  he  refuses  to  obey, 
or  attempts  to  bite,  kick,  etc. ;  he  resists,  contends. 

Defenses :  The  resistances  made  by  a  horse  when  required  to  do  any- 
thing, or  when  he  is  ignorant  of  the  acts  or  movements  demanded  of 
him;  he  becomes  alarmed,  injured,  or  malicious,  and  employs  his  de- 
fenses. 

Double  bridle :  The  reins  of  the  curb-bit  and  bridoon,  when  both  bits 
are  placed  together  in  the  horse's  mouth. 

Dumb-jockey :  A  couple  of  stout  sticks  or  poles,  crossed  in  the  form 
of  the  letter  x,  and  fastened  upon  the  saddle ;  the  reins  are  attached 
to  the  upper  ends  of  these,  and  a  hat  may  be  placed  upon  one  of  them. 
Used  in  training  colts. 

Effects :  Movements  made  by  the  hands,  often  aided  by  the  leg  or 
whip,  which  serve  to  urge  the  horse  forward,  backward,  to  the  right, 
or  left ;  indications. 

Equestrian :  A  gentleman  rider  on  horseback. 

Equestrienne :  A  lady  rider  on  horseback. 

Equine :  From  equus,  Lat.     A  horse ;  pertaining  to  a  horse. 

Equitation :  Horseback  riding. 

False  pannels  :  Pannels  are  stuffed  pads  or  flaps,  attached  to  and  be- 
neath certain  parts  of  the  saddle,  in  order  to  prevent  these  from  in- 
juring the  horse ;  when  these  stuffed  pads  can  be  fastened  to,  or 
removed  from  the  saddle  at  pleasure,  they  are  termed  "  false  pannels." 

Fetlock :  The  tuft  of  hair  that  grows  upon  the  back  part  of  the  fet- 
lock joints  of  many  horses'  legs,  and  which  hides  the  ergot  or  stub  of 
soft  horn  that  lies  behind  and  below  the  pastern  joint. 

Fetlock  joint :  The  joint  between  the  cannon  and  the  upper  pastern 
bone  of  each  foot. 


316  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

Force  the  hands :  The  hands  are  said  to  be  forced  when  the  horse 
throws  his  head  downward,  pulling  upon  the  reins  so  as  to  cause  the 
rider  to  support  the  weight  of  the  animal's  head;  sometimes  this  is 
effected  so  suddenly  as  to  jerk  the  reins  out  of  her  hands. 

Forehand :  All  that  part  of  the  horse  in  front  of  the  rider. 

Get  out  of  condition  :  A  horse  is  said  to  be  in  "  good  condition  "  when 
he  is  well,  fresh,  and  sound ;  the  reverse  of  this  is  termed  "  out  of  con- 
dition." 

Girths:  Stout  straps  or  bands  passed  from  one  side  of  the  saddle 
and  underneath  the  horse's  abdomen  to  the  other  side,  where  they  are 
buckled  tight  and  fast ;  they  are  designed  to  keep  the  saddle  securely 
upon  the  horse's  back. 

Give  and  take :  The  traction  and  relaxation  of  the  reins  made  by  the 
fingers,  and  which  must  correspond  with  the  movements  of  the  horse's 
head ;  this  action  keeps  up  a  correspondence  with  the  .horse's  mouth, 
and  at  the  same  time  supports  him  in  his  gait. 

Hand :  The  height  of  a  horse  is  usually  measured  by  hands,  four 
inches  being  equal  to  one  hand.  A  rider  is  said  to  "have  hands" 
when  she  knows  how  to  use  her  hands  correctly  in  controlling  the 
horse  by  means  of  the  reins. 

Haunches :  When  a  horse  is  made  to  throw  his  weight  chiefly  upon 
his  hind-quarters,  he  is  said  to  be  "  well  placed  on  his  haunches,"  and 
•will  then  move  more  lightly  upon  his  fore-legs.  The  haunch-bones  are 
three  in  number,  the  superior  one  of  which  is  firmly  united  to  the 
spinal  column  (backbone)  near  its  posterior  extremity  ;  the  lower  one 
on  each  side  forms  a  joint  with  the  thigh  bone,  passing  downward  in  a 
more  or  less  oblique  direction.  The  obliquity  of  these  bones  enables 
the  horse  to  place  the  muscles  of  the  part  in  a  position  to  act  with 
greater  advantage  and  power,  and  the  degree  of  this  obliquity  serves 
to  distinguish  the  thorough  from  the  low  bred,  it  being  greater  in  the 
former.  Wide  haunches  and  broad  loins  are  indications  of  strength 
and  speed. 

Hippie :  Of,  belonging-  to,  or  relating  to  the  horse. 

Hock,  also  Tarsus :  The  part  or  joint  between  the  cannon  or  shank 
bone  and  the  lower  thigh  or  gaskin  of  the  hind-leg  :  it  consists  of  six 
bones;  the  part  at  this  joint  that  projects  backward  and  somewhat 
inward  is  called  the  "  point  of  the  hock."  The  hock  is  an  important 
part  of  a  horse,  as  any  unhealthy  or  diseased  condition  of  it  will  pre- 
vent him  from  resting  on  his  haunches,  and  will  thereby  interfere  with 
his  free  action  in  the  canter  and  gallop. 


GLOSSARY.  317 

Immobility:  A  disease  in  which  the  horse  becomes  unable  to  move, 
probably  referable  to  the  nervous  system. 

Incline  to  the  right,  or  to  the  left :  This  differs  from  "  bearing  to  the 
right,"  which  see.  It  means,  to  incline  the  body,  from  the  hips  up- 
ward, to  the  right  (or  to  the  left),  either  when  turning  or  riding  in  a 
circle. 

In  confidence :  A  horse  is  confident,  or  in  confidence,  when  he  com- 
pletely surrenders  his  own  will,  and  implicitly  trusts  to  his  rider  with- 
out dreaming  of  resistance. 

Inward  rein :  In  turning  or  circling,  the  "  inward  rein,"  as  well  as 
the  "  inward  leg,"  is  the  one  on  the  same  side  as  that  toward  which 
the  horse  turns,  or  the  one  toward  the  centre  of  the  circle  of  which 
the  turn  forms  an  arc. 

Legs  well  bent :  See  "  Well-bent  hind-legs.'" 

Lip-strap,  or  Curb-strap :  Two  small  straps  stitched  to  the  curb-bit, 
designed  to  prevent  a  horse  from  taking  the  cheek  of  this  bit  into  his 
mouth ;  an  unnecessary  appendage  when  the  cheek  is  curved. 

Lunge-line :  A  long  strap  or  cord  attached  to  the  nose-band  of  the 
cavesson  or  head-stall  of  a  horse  in  training,  by  means  of  which  the 
trainer  exercises  and  instructs  him  while  he  is  moving  around  in  cir- 
cles. 

Near-side:  The  left  side.  Near-pommel:  The  second  pommel,  on 
the  left  side  of  the  side-saddle ;  the  second  pommel  of  the  old-fashioned 
saddle  was  called  the  "  near-pommel,"  and  the  name  still  attaches  to 
it.  The  "  third  pommel "  is  variously  called  the  "  leaping  head  "  and 
the  "  hunting-horn,"  and  is  located  on  the  left  side  of  the  saddle  and 
below  the  second  pommel. 

Off-side:  The  right  side.  Off-pommel:  The  pommel  on  the  right 
side  of  the  saddle. 

Outward  rein :  In  turning  or  circling,  the  "  outward  rein,"  as  well 
as  the  "  outward  leg,"  is  the  one  opposite  to  the  direction  toward 
which  the  horse  turns. 

Overreaching,  also  Forging,  Clinking:  Is  when  a  horse  in  moving 
forward  strikes  the  heel  or  back  part  of  a  fore-foot  with  the  toe  or 
front  part  of  the  shoe  of  the  hind-foot.  When  the  stride  of  the  hind- 
legs  is  carried  so  far  forward  as  to  strike  the  coronet  or  upper  part  of 
the  hoof,  it  is  then  termed  a  "  tread." 

Pirouette:  A  movement  in  which  a  horse  turns  around  without 
changing  his  place,  the  hind-leg  of  the  side  toward  which  he  moves 
forming  the  pivot  upon  which  he  supports  himself. 


318  THE  AMERICAN  HORSEWOMAN. 

Port  of  the  bit ;  The  arched  part  in  the  centre  of  the  curb-bit. 

Resistances :  See  Defenses. 

Retroacting :  A  horse  retroacts  when,  in  his  volts,  he  steps  aside, 
bearing  his  croup  to  the  centre,  —  also  when  he  backs  toward  an  ob- 
stacle and  fixedly  remains  there,  against  the  will  of  his  rider;  and 
also  when  he  suddenly  throws  himself  upon  his  hocks  at  the  moment 
his  rider  checks  or  stops  him. 

Ring-bar  of  the  saddle :  A  bar  attached  beneath  the  saddle-flap  on 
the  left  side  and  at  its  upper  part,  over  which  the  stirrup-leather  rolls. 

Saddle-tree :  The  skeleton  or  solid  frame  of  a  saddle,  upon  which 
.the  pommels,  leather,  padding,  etc.,  are  properly  disposed. 

Snaffle-bit :  Is  the  mildest  bit  used  in  driving  a  horse  :  there  are  two 
kinds,  the  plain  snaffle  and  the  twisted,  and  the  latter  form  may  be 
made  to  act  very  severely. 

Surcingle :  A  wide  band  of  cloth  or  leather,  of  sufficient  length  to 
pass  around  the  body  of  a  horse,  and  employed  either  to  keep  a  blanket 
upon  him,  or  to  keep  down  the  flaps  of  the  saddle  or  the  shabrack. 

Thrown  forward  upon  his  shoulders :  A  horse  is  said  to  be  thrown  in 
this  manner  when,  in  moving,  he  throws  his  weight  chiefly  upon  his 
shoulders  and  fore-legs  instead  of  upon  his  hind-quarters  ;  he  is  then 
also  said  to  "  go  heavy  on  his  fore-legs/' 

Turn  upon  the  shoulders :  A  horse  is  said  to  "  turn  upon  his  shoul- 
ders "  when  he  throws  his  weight  upon  his  fore-legs  during  the  act  of 
turning ;  it  is  a  disunited  movement. 

Tusks,  also  Tushes :  These  are  the  canine  teeth,  two  in  each  jaw, 
which  grow  between  the  grinders  (back  double  teeth)  and  the  incisors 
(front  cutting  teeth),  being  closer  to  the  latter  than  to  the  former. 
They  are  frequently  missing.  Their  uses  are  not  well  known. 

Volt :  The  movement  of  a  horse  while  going  sidewise  in  a  circle,  his 
croup  being  toward  the  centre.  There  are  several  varieties  of  volt. 
An  inverted  or  reversed  volt  is  when  the  head  of  the  horse  is  kept 
toward  the  centre  of  the  circle. 

Well-bent  hind-legs :  A  horse  with  straight  hind-legs  does  not  possess 
good  and  easy  movements ;  but  if  these  limbs  be  well  bent,  he  can  be 
well  placed  on  his  haunches,  and  be  easily  collected,  so  that  his  action 
will  be  true  and  pleasant.  See  Haunches. 

Yield  the  hands :  Is  to  give  the  horse  more  rein  by  advancing  the 
hands  without  allowing  the  reins  to  slip.  To  give  a  free  rein  is  to 
allow  the  animal  all  the  length  of  rein  he  requires  without  any  traction 
or  opposition. 


INDEX. 


Addenda,  301. 
Adjusting  the  bit,  89. 

the  saddle,  71,  93. 
Affection  of  the  horse,  4,  16. 
Amble,  the,  197,  217. 
Appui,  313. 
Arab  horse,  16,  23. 

Backing,  152,  193,  281. 
Balance  strap,  81. 
Balking,  281. 
Basque,  the  riding,  53. 
Bit,  84. 

adjusting  the,  89. 

Chifuey,  84. 

combination,  85. 

curb,  85. 

curb,  Dwyer's,  86. 

curb  and  bridoon,  85. 

curb  and  bridoon,  to  hold 
reins  of.  160. 

Pelham,  84. 

snaffle,  84. 

snaffle,  to  hold  reins  of  the, 

152. 

Biting,  283. 
Bolting,  240,  289. 
Boots,  riding,  59. 
Box-stalls  for  horses,  49. 
Bridle,  82. 

double,  166. 

ladies',  82. 
Bucking,  284. 

Caligula  and  his  horse,  15. 
Canter,  221. 

disunited,  234. 

false  on  the  turn  in,  234. 

from  trot  to,  232. 

stop  in,  236. 

to  commence  the,  227. 


Canter,  true,  223,  234. 

turn  in,  233,  234. 

united,  234. 

with  left  leg  leading,  230. 

with  right  leg  leading,  227. 
Capriciousness  of  horses,  4. 
Cares  for  the  horse,  4,  44,  47, 
Cavalry  trot,  21,  199,  203. 
Changes    of    pressure  on   horse's 
mouth  should  be  gradual,  174, 
195. 
Changing  the  reins,  156. 

quickly,  158,  165. 
Character  of  the  horse,  4. 
Circling  to  the  left,  in  trot,  216. 
Circling  to  the  right,  in  trot,  215. 
Coiffure,  riding,  60. 
Collect  the  horse,  to,  170,  177. 
Collected  horse,  177. 
Combination  bit,  85. 
Confidence  of  horse,  5,  16,  317. 
Corns  on  horse's  feet,  32. 
Correct  position  of  limbs,  1 24. 
Correct  seat  for  a  lady,  118. 
Correspondence,  168,  314. 
Corsets  injurious  for  riding,  6. 
Corsets,  riding,  60. 
Country  jog-trot,  21,  198. 
Critical  situations,  271. 
Crossing  water  on  horseback,  304. 
Curb-bit,  85. 

Dwyer's,  86. 

and  bridoon,  85,  160. 

and  bridoon,  reins  of,  in  one 
hand,  160. 

when  best  to  use,  170,  174 ; 

note,  178. 
Curb-chain,  87. 
Curry -combing  the  horse,  45. 

Dangers  in  the  hand  gallop,  240. 


320 


INDEX. 


Dangers  of  turns  in  flying  gallop, 

242,  248. 

Dead  pull  upon  the  reins,  169. 
Defenses  of  the  horse,  271. 
Differences  between  high  and  low 

bred  horses,  23. 
Dismounting,  99,  108. 

gentleman's  aid  in,  109. 
without  assistance,  111. 
Distinguished  equestriennes,  46. 
Disunited  canter,  234. 

horse,  177- 
Double    bridle,   management    of, 

166. 
Drawers,  riding,  59. 

Ears,  the  language  of  horses',  25, 

273. 

Education  of  the  horse,  35. 
English  trot,  21,  200,  207. 
Equestriennes,  distinguished,  46. 
Erroneous  ideas  about  riding,  7. 
Exercise   of    the    horse,  remarks 

upon,  50. 

Fabric  for  riding-dress,  57. 
Falling  down  of  the  horse,  286, 

294. 

False  on  the  turn,  in  canter,  234. 
Faulty  position  of  limbs,  136. 
Fay's  training,  38. 
First  lessons   in   riding,   22,   125, 

149,  217. 
Flying  gallop,  238. 

carriage  of  body  in,  246. 

holding  of  reins  in,  240. 

management  of    horse   in, 
239. 

stop  in  the,  248. 

turns   in,  dangers  of,  242, 

248. 

Flying  leap,  249,  267. 
Flying  trot,  198. 
Foot-loop  in  skirt,  56. 
Foot,  the  leading,  209. 
Forcing  the  hands,  169,316. 
Formation  of  low-bred  horse,  24. 
Formation  of  thoroughbred  horse, 

24. 
French  trot,  21,  199,  203. 

Gaits  for  a  lady's  horse,  20. 
Gallop,  the,  238. 


Gallop,  flying,  dangers  of  turns  in, 

242. 

flying,  to  stop  in,  248. 
flying,  turns  in,  242,  248. 
hand,  238. 

Gauntlets,  riding,  64. 
Gayety  of  the  horse,  282. 
Gentleman's  aid  in  dismounting, 

109. 

Gentleman's  aid  in  mounting,  103. 
Girthing  the  saddle,  77,  93. 
Girths,  76,  95. 
Give  and    take  movements,   169, 

171,316. 
Glossary,  313. 

Good  riding,  tight  corsets  incom- 
patible with,  6. 
Grooms,  44,  50,  97,  305. 

Habit,  the  riding,  52. 
Hair,  in  riding,  61. 
Hand  gallop,  238. 

dangers  in,  240. 
Hard  mouth  of  horses,  50. 
Hat,  the  riding,  62. 
Head-dress,  61. 

Health  from  horseback  riding,  3. 
Height  of  horse  for  a  lady,  19. 
Holding  the  reins,  145. 

in  flying  gallop,  247. 
Holding  the  riding  skirt,  65. 
Holding  the  whip,  66. 
Horse,  affection  of,  4,  16. 

cares  of  the  lady  for,  4,  44, 
47. 

character  of,  4. 

collected,  177. 

confidence  of,  5,  16,  317. 

defenses  of,  271. 

dismounting  the,  99,  108. 

disunited,  177. 

education  of,  35. 

exercise  of  the,  50. 

falling  down  of,  286,  294. 

for  a  city  lady,  30,  31. 

for  a  country  lady,  37. 

gaits  of,  for  a  lady's,  20. 

height  of,  for  a  lady,  19. 

livery  stable,  for  a  lady,  51. 

managing  the,  145. 

managing,    with    different 
reins,  145. 

mounting  the,  99. 


INDEX. 


321 


Horse,  origin  of  the,  13. 

purchase  of,  18,  30. 

temperaments  of  the,  22. 

the,  13. 

the  Arab,  16,  23. 

the  kind  of,  to  select,  18. 

the  low-bred,  23. 

the  thoroughbred,  23. 

to  collect  the,  170,  177. 

to  stop  the,  152,  156,  164, 
191,  212,  236,  248. 

training  the,  34. 

treatment  of  the,  35. 

united,  177. 

unsteadiness  of,  while  being 
mounted,  290. 

whipping  the,  295. 
Horseback,  positions  on,  129,  133, 
137. 

riding,  healthy,  3. 

the  seat  on,  114. 

wrong    positions    on,    115, 

128. 
Horses,  box  stalls  for,  49. 

corns  on  feet  of,  32. 

hard  mouth  of,  50. 

humane  training  of,  35. 

ladies',  attentions  to,  4,  44, 
47. 

moderate  priced,  31. 

mouth,  changes  of  pressure 
on,  should  be  gradual, 
174,  195. 

stalls  for,  47,  49. 
Horse's  head,  raising  the,  174. 
Humane  training  of  horses,  35. 
Hunting,  10. 

Introduction,  I. 

Jacket,  the  riding,  53. 
Jog-trot,  the  country,  21,  198. 

Kicking,  282. 

Ladies  riding  in  park,  observations 

on,  128. 
Lady,  cares  of,  for  her  horse,  4, 38, 

44. 

correct  seat  for  a,  118. 
horse  for  a,  18,  30,  34. 
livery-stable    horse   for   a, 
51. 

21 


Lady's  attention  to  her  horse,  4, 
38,  44. 

bridle,  82. 

horse,  what  gaits  for  a,  20. 

pantaloons,  58. 

saddle,  69,  93. 

visiting  her  stable,  44. 

whip,  66. 

Language  of  horse's  ears,  25,  273. 
Latchford's  safety  stirrup,  80. 
Leading  foot,  which  is  the,  209. 
Leap,  the,  249. 

the  flying,  249,  267. 

the  standing,  249,  253. 
Length  and  width   of  saddle,  72, 

73. 

Lennan's  safety  stirrup,  80. 
Lessons  with  lunge-liiie,  42,  125. 
Liberty   of  reins,  when  to  give, 

175." 
Limbs,  correct  position  of,  124. 

faulty  position  of,  136. 
Livery-stable    horse  for    a    lady, 

51. 

Long  stirrup-leather,  74,  139. 
Low-bred  horse,  formation  of,  24. 
Lunge-line  lessons,  42,  125. 

Management  of  the  horse  in  flying 

gallop,  239. 
Managing  the   horse   with   reins, 

145. 

Martingales,  83. 
Moderate-priced  horses,  31. 
Mounting,  99. 

from    a   high    horse-block, 

100. 

from  a  low  horse-block,  101. 
from  the  ground,  101. 
gentleman's  aid  in,  103. 
unsteadiness  of  horse  while, 

290. 
Movements  of  the  rider's  body,  6. 

Natural  riders,  8, 114,  128. 
Near  pommel  to  saddle,  317. 

Observations   on  ladies  riding  in 

park,  128. 

Off-pommel  to  saddle,  75,  317. 
Origin  of  the  horse,  13. 
Original  position  of  snaffle-reins, 

one  in  each  hand,  150. 


322 


INDEX. 


Original  position  of  snaffle-reins, 

both  in  one  hand,  154. 
position  of  snaffle  and  curb 
reins,  all  in    one    hand, 
161. 

position  of  snaffle  and  curb 
reins,  one  of  each  in  each 
hand,  166. 
Over- reaching,  293,  317. 

Pace,  the,  21,  197,  218. 
Pantaloons,  a  lady's,  58. 
Petticoat,  the  riding,  58. 
Placing  the  saddle,  71,  93. 
Plunging,  176,  284. 
Pommels  to  saddle,  69. 

use  of,  70,  73,  100,  116. 
Position  of  limbs  should  be  taught 

by  a  lady,  144. 
Positions  on  horseback,  129,  133, 

137. 
original,  of  reins,  150,  154, 

161,  166. 
Pressure  on  horse's  mouth,  changes 

of,  to  be  gradual,  174,  195. 
Pupil  and  teacher,  142. 
Purchase  of  horse,  18,  30. 

Racing  trot,  198. 
Rack,  the,  21,  218. 
Raising  the  horse's  head,  1 74. 
Rearing,  286. 

Rein,   to  loosen   or  tighten    one, 
when   double    bridle   is   in   left 
hand,  162. 
Reining   back  in   the  walk,    184, 

193. 
Reins,  changing  the,  1 56. 

curb   and   bridoou   in    one 

hand,  160. 

dead  pull  upon,  169. 
double,  one   in  each  hand, 

166. 
double,  to  change  from  left 

to  right  hand,  1 64. 
double,    to     change     from 

right  to  left  hand,  164. 
double,    to    separate,    and 
hold  one  of  each    in   a 
hand,  165. 
holding  the,  145. 
snaffle,  both  in   one  hand, 
152. 


Reins,  snaffle,  both  in  one  hand, 

original  position  of,  154. 
snaffle,  both  in  one  hand,  to 

separate,  158. 
snaffle,  both  in  one  hand,  to 

stop  the  horse,  156. 
snaffle,  both  in  one  hand,  to 

turn  to  the  left,  155. 
snaffle,  both  in  one  hand,  to 

turn  to  the  right,  155. 
snaffle,  one  in   each   hand, 

149. 
snaffle,  one   in   each   hand, 

original  position  of,  150. 
snaffle,  one  in  each  hand,  to 

stop  the  horse,  152. 
snaffle,  one  in  each  hand,  to 

turn  to  the  left,  151. 
snaffle,  one  in  each  hand,  to 

turn  to  the  right,  151. 
to  change  quickly,  158,  165. 
to  change  snaffle  from  left 

to  right  hand,  156. 
to  change  snaffle  from  right 

to  left  hand,  157. 
to    hold,    in    flying-gallop, 

247. 
to  return  snaffle,  to  the  left 

hand,  157. 
to   shorten    the  curb    and 

lengthen  the  snaffle,  162. 
to  shorten    the  snaffle  and 

lengthen  the  curb,  163. 
to  shorten  or  lengthen  the 

curb  and  snaffle,  162. 
to  shorten  or  lengthen  the 

snaffle,  159. 
when  to  give  more  liberty 

of,  175. 

Remarks,  on  exercise  of  horse,  50. 
on  grooms,  44,  50,  97,  305. 
on  the  stable,  44,  47. 
on  training   the   horse,  34, 

35,  43. 

Restivencss,  1 73. 
Rider's  body,  movements  of,  6. 
figure,  style  of,  18. 
natural,  8. 
Riding  basque,  53. 
boots,  59. 
coiffure,  61. 
corsets,  60. 
dress,  fabric  for,  57. 


INDEX. 


323 


Riding,  does  not  produce  coarse- 
ness in  rider,  9. 

drawers,  59. 

erroneous  ideas  concerning, 
7. 

first  lessons  in,  22,  125,  149, 
217. 

gauntlets,  64. 

habit,  52. 

habit,  shirt,  59. 

habit,  skirt  of,  55. 

habit  skirt,  how  to  hold,  65. 

habit,  waist  of,  53. 

hair  in,  61. 

hat,  62. 

jacket,  53. 

pantaloons,  58. 

petticoat,  58. 

whip,  66,  308. 
Rising  in  the   saddle   in  English 

trot,  207. 

Running  away,  288. 
Running  walk,  20. 

Saddle-flaps,  76. 

Saddle,  girthing  the,  77,  93. 

lady's,  68,  93. 

length  of,  72,  73. 

off-pommel  to,  75. 

placing  the,  71,  93. 

seat  to  the,  72. 

second  pommel  to,  68,  75. 

third  pommel  to,  68,  73-,  74. 

to  adjust  the,  71,  93. 

to   rise   in  the,  in   English 
trot,  207. 

weight  of  the,  76. 

width  of  the,  73. 
Safety  stirrups,  79. 
Seat,  correct  one  for  a  lady,  118. 

on  horseback,  114. 

to  saddle,  72. 

Separation  of  the  reins,  165. 
Shirt,  the  riding-habit,  59. 
Short  stirrup-leather,  74. 
Shying,  273. 
Skirt,  foot-loop  in,  56. 

holding  the,  65. 

of  the  riding  habit,  55. 
Snaffle-bit,  84,  148. 

when  best,  to  use,  148.  170. 
Spring-bar  attachment  to  stirrup- 
leather,  80. 


Spur  and  whip,  294. 
Stable,  ladies  visiting  the,  44. 
Stalls  for  horses,  47,  49. 
Standing  leap,  249,  253. 
Stirrup,  74,  79. 

irons,  81. 

leather,  74,  81. 

leather,   spring-bar   attach- 
ment to,  80. 

leather,  too  long,  74,  139. 

leather,  too  short,  74,  136. 
Stokes'  mode  of  girthing  the  sad- 
dle, 77. 
Stop  in  the  canter,  236. 

the  English  trot,  212. 

the  flying  gallop,  248. 

the  walk,  191. 
Stumbling,  176,  292. 
Style  of  the  rider's  figure,  18. 
Support,  168,  173,  313. 

Teacher  and  pupil,  142. 

Temperaments  of  the  horse,  22. 

The  Arab  horse,  16,  23. 

The  canter,  222. 

The  gallop,  238. 

The  horse,  13. 

The  kind  of  horse  to  purchase,  18, 
30. 

The  leap,  249. 

The  low-bred  horse,  23. 

The  saddle  and  bridle,  67. 

The  seat  on  horseback,  114. 

The  thoroughbred,  23. 

The  trot,  197. 

The  walk,  181. 

Third  pommel,  68-74,  121,  202. 

Thorough  and  low  bred,  differ- 
ences, 23. 

Tight  corsets  prevent  good  riding, 
6. 

To  change  reins  quickly,  158,  165. 

To  collect  the  horse,  170,  177. 

To  hold  the  riding-skirt,  65. 

To  manage  the  horse  with  the  va- 
rious reins,  145. 

To  rise  in  the  saddle  in  the  Eng- 
lish trot,  207. 

Too  long  stirrup-leather,  74,  139. 

Too  short  stirrup-leather,  74,  136. 

To  turn  the  horse  to  the  left,  151. 

To  turn  the  horse  to  the  right, 
151. 


324 


INDEX. 


Training  horses,  humane,  35. 

remarks  on,  34,  35,  42. 

to  stop  at  the  voice,  43. 
Treatment  of  horse,  34,  35,  42. 
Trot,  circling  to  the  left,  216. 

circling  to  the  right,  215. 

country -jog,  21,  198. 

English  or  rising,  21,  200, 
207. 

French  or  cavalry,  21,  199, 
203. 

the  flying,  1 98. 

the  true,  199. 

to  canter  from  the,  232. 
Trotting  in  a  circle,  214. 
True  trot,  199. 
Turns  in  the  canter,  233,  234. 

dangers    of,   in   the   flying 
gallop,  242,  248. 

in  the  hand  gallop,  240. 

in  the  walk,  187. 

United  canter,  234. 

Unsoundness  of  horses'  feet  and 

legs,  23. 
Unsteadiness  of  horse  while  being 

mounted,  290. 
Use  of  pommels,  70,  73,  100,  116, 

202. 


Victoria  stirrup,  79. 

Waist  of  riding  habit,  53. 
Walk,  reining  back  in,  184,  193. 
running,  20. 
stopping  in  the,  191. 
the,  181. 

the  advance  in  the,  184. 
turning  in  the,  187. 
Weight  of  the  saddle,  76. 
What  gaits  to  train  a  lady's  horse 

in,  20. 

When  best  to  use  the  curb,  170, 
174,  note  178. 

best  to  use  the  snaffle,  148, 

170. 
When    to    give  more    liberty  of 

reins,  175. 

Which  is  the  leading  foot,  209. 
Whip,  the  lady's,  66. 

the  lady's,  how  to  hold,  66. 
Whipping  the  horse,  295. 
Whip  and  spur,  294. 
Why  some  women  do  not  enjoy 

riding,  6. 

Width  of  saddle,  73. 
Wrong    positions    on    horseback, 
115,  128. 


